kTITF
UNIVERSITY dlH)L
OF SOUTHERN
ISSISSIPPI
mmm
Accredited by:
Southern Association of Colleges and Schools
National Association of Schools of Music
National Council for Accreditation of
Teacher Education
The American Association of University Women
American Association of Colleges for Teacher
Education
American Chemical Society
Member of the:
American Council on Education
Association of American Colleges
Association of Urban Universities
National Commission on Accrediting
Council of Graduate Schools
in the United States
Mississippi Association of Colleges
NOTE: Programs previously accredited by the American Association of Colleges for
Teacher Education are accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of
Teacher Education.
University of Southern Mississippi
Bulletin
GENERAL CATALOG ISSUE
UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMS
ANNOUNCEMENTS
1966-67
* * *
FALL QUARTER OPENS SEPTEMBER 5, 1966
Published quarterly by the University of Southern Mississippi, Hattiesburg, Miss.
Entered as second-class matter February 19, 1917, at the post office
at Hattiesburg, Mississippi, under act of August 24, 1912.
VOLUME 53
(Published April 1, 1966)
NUMBER 4
m
I
III
llllilliiii
Ig55*
illif
;asst52ssaa*sa
1966-1967 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
CALENDAR: 1966-1967 5
GENERAL UNIVERSITY ADMINISTRATION 10
Board of Trustees 11
Administrative Officers 12
Faculty Committees 13
INSTRUCTIONAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE STAFFS
Faculty 15
Graduate Fellows 31
Staff Members 33
GENERAL INFORMATION
Historical 35
Purposes of the University 36
General Admission Requirements
Freshman 37
Transfer 37
Military 38
Foreign Student 39
Special 39'
Correspondence, Extension and Resident Center 39
General Application Procedures 39
Orientation and Counseling 40
Student Community
Housing 40
Health and Safety 42
Automobiles on Campus 42
Student Activities 42
Athletics 45
R. C. Cook Union Building 45
Student Expenses 46
Student Aid and Scholarships 50
Latin- American Institute 52
Alumni Association 53
Library 53
Sam Woods Collection 54
Placement Bureau 54
ACADEMIC ORGANIZATION AND REQUIREMENTS
Organization Chart 56
Organization for Instruction 57
Academic Areas '58
General Academic Regulations 59
General Degree Requirements 62
Specific Degree Requirements 66
COLLEGES, SCHOOLS, AND DIVISIONS
BASIC COLLEGE 70
COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES 76
Honors Program 77
Biology 77
Chemistry 86
Communication 89
Computer Science and Statistics 95
Economics 96
English and Literature 97
Foreign Language 99
Geography and Geology 102
History 107
1966-1967 TABLE OF CONTENTS— (Continued)
Page No.
Mathematics 110
Military Science 113
Physics and Astronomy 116
Political Science 119
Religion and Philosophy 120
Science Education 123
Sociology 126
Speech and Hearing Sciences 129
SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 133
Accounting 135
Economics 137
Finance and General Business 140
Management 143
Marketing 146
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION AND PSYCHOLOGY 150
Admission Requirements 150
Student Teaching 153
Special School Services
Audio Visual Center 155
Psychological and Special Education Clinic 155
Reading Center 156
Speech and Hearing Clinic 156
Business Education 157
Educational Foundations 161
Elementary Education 161
Guidance 164
Health, Physical Education, and Recreation 164
Industrial Arts 172
Library Science 176
Psychology 179
Special Education 182
Human Relations 183
School Administration 184
Science Education 185
Secondary Education 186
SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS 189
Art 189
Music 195
Music Education 206
Theatre 215
DIVISION OF CONTINUING EDUCATION 217
Correspondence 217
Community Services 217
Conferences, Institutes, and Workshops 217
DIVISION OF HOME ECONOMICS 220
Child Development 222
Clothing and Textiles '. 224
Food and Nutrition 226
Institution Management — Dietetics 227
Institution Management — Commercial 227
Home Economics Education 232
Housing and Home Management 233
Marriage and Family Life 235
INDEX 236
CALENDAR
GENERAL CALENDAR 1966-1967
FALL QUARTER-1966
Friday, August 26, 1966
Deadline for making application for admission
Tuesday through Saturday, August 30-September 3
Pre -school rush — fraternities and sororities
Thursday and Friday, September 1 and 2
Various pre-quarter faculty and departmental meetings
(faculty on duty)
Sunday, September 4
Dormitories open for freshman and transfer students
Monday and Tuesday, September 5 and 6
8:00 A.M. Orientation for freshman and transfer students
Tuesday, September 6
Dormitories open for former students
5:00 P.M. Registration for night graduate courses
7:00 P.M. Tuesday night classes meet
Wednesday, September 7
Registration by appointment
Thursday, September 8
Continuation of registration by appointment
Last day to register without late registration fee
Friday and Saturday, September 9 and 10
8:00 A.M. Classes meet on schedule (Saturday classes meet on
Monday schedule)
Friday, September 9
8:00 A.M. Fee for adding and dropping courses effective
Friday, September 16
Last day for registering or adding Fall Quarter courses
Wednesday, September 21
Last day for dropping courses
Saturday, October 8
National Teacher Examination
Monday, October 17
Beginning of second term of Fall Quarter — only date for
adding or registering for second term courses without
penalty (Date for reporting mid-term deficiencies)
Thursday, October 20
English Proficiency Examination
Saturday, October 29
Graduate Record Examination
Thursday, Friday, Saturday, November 17, 18, 19
Fall Quarter Examinations
1966
JANUARY
APRIL
JULY
OCTOBER
S M
T W T
F
S
S
3
10
17
24
M
4
II
18
25
T W T
5 6 7
12 13 14
19 20 21
26 27 28
F
1
8
15
22
29
S
2
9
16
23
30
S
3
10
17
24
31
M
4
II
18
25
T W T
5 6 7
12 13 14
19 20 21
26 27 28
F
1
8
15
22
29
S
2
9
16
23
30
S
2
9
16
23
30
M
3
10
17
24
31
T W T
4 5 6
II 12 13
18 19 20
25 26 27
F S
2 3
9 10
16 17
23 24
30 31
4 5 6
II 12 13
18 19 20
25 26 27
7
14
21
28
1
8
15
22
29
1
7 8
14 15
21 22
28 29
FEBRUARY
MAY
AUGUST
NOVEMBER
5 M
6 7
13 14
20 21
27 28
T W T
1 2 3
8 9 10
15 16 17
22 23 24
MARCH
F
4
II
18
25
S
5
12
i9
26
S
1
8
15
22
29
M
2
9
16
23
30
T W T
3 4 5
10 II 12
17 18 19
24 25 26
31
F
6
13
20
27
S
7
14
21
28
S
7
14
21
28
M
1
8
15
22
29
T W T
2 3 4
9 10 II
16 17 18
23 24 25
30 31
F
5
12
19
26
S
6
i:
2C
27
S
6
13
20
27
M
7
14
21
28
T W T
1 2 3
8 9 10
15 16 17
22 23 24
29 30
F S
4 5
II 12
18 19
25 26
JUNE
SEPTEMBER
DECEMBER
5 M
6 7
13 14
20 21
27 28
T W T
1 2 3
8 9 10
15 16 17
22 23 24
29 30 31
F
4
II
18
25
S
5
12
IS
u
S
5
12
19
26
M
6
13
20
27
T W T
1 2
7 8 9
14 15 16
21 22 23
28 29 30
F
3
10
17
24
S
4
II
18
25
S
4
II
18
25
M
5
12
19
26
T W T
1
6 7 8
13 14 15
20 21 22
27 28 29
F
2
9
16
23
30
c
If
i;
2
S
4
II
18
25
M
5
12
19
26
T W T
1
6 7 8
13 14 15
20 21 22
27 28 29
F S
2 3
9 10
16 17
23 24
30 31
1967
JANUARY
S M
W
F S
I 2
8 9
15 16
3 4
10 II
5
12
19 20
6 7
13 14
22 23 24 25 26 27
29 30 31
FEBRUARY
S M T W T F S
12 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 II
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28
MARCH
S M T W
F S
12 3 4
5, 6 7 8 9 10 II
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
APRIL
S M T W T F S
I
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 II 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30
MAY
S
M
T W T
F
S
7
14
21
28
1
8
15
22
29
2 3 4
9 10 II
16 17 18
23 24 25
30 31
5
12
19
26
6
13
20
27
JUNE
S
M
T W T
F
S
I 2 3
5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17
19 20 21 22 23 24
26 27 28 29 30
JULY
S M T W
F S
2 3
9 10
16 17
23 24
30 31
I
4 5 6 7 8
II 12 13 14 15
18 19 20 21 2.
25 26 27 28 29
AUGUST
S M T W T F S
6 7
13 14
20 21
27 28
12 3 4 5
3 9 10 II 12
15 16 17 18 19
22 23 24 25 26
29 30 31
SEPTEMBER
S M T W T F S
3 4
10 II
17 18
24 25
I 2
5 6 7 8 S
12 13 14 15 16
19 20 21 22 23
26 27 28 29 30
OCTOBER
S M T W T F S
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
10
II
12
13
14
15 16
17
18
19
20
21
22 23
24
25
26
27
28
29 30 31
NOVEMBER
S M T W T F S
12 3 4
5 & 7 8 9 10 II
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30
DECEMBER
S M T W
F S
I 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 II 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31
1968
JANUARY
M
T W T F S
I
7 8
14 15
21 22
28 29
2 3 4
9 10 II
16 17 18
23 24 25
30 31
5 6
12 13
19 20
26 27
FEBRUARY
S M T W T F S
4 5
II 12
18 19
25 26
6 7 8
13 14 15
20 21 22
27 28 29
2 3
9 10
16 17
23 24
MARCH
S M T W T F S
3 4
10 II
17 18
24 25
31
5 6 7
12 13 14
19 20 21
26 27 28
I 2
8 9
15 16
22 23
29 30
30
APRIL
JULY
s
M
T W T
F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
1
2 3 4
5
6
1
2 3 4
5
A
7
8
9 10 II
12
13
7
8
9 10 II
1?
n
14
15
16 17 18
19
20
14
15
16 17 18
19
70
21
22
23 24 25
26
27
21
22
23 24 25
76
?7
28
29
30
28
29
30 31
MAY
AUGUST
S
M
T W T
F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
1 2
3
4
1
7
3
b
6
7 8 9
10
II
4
5
6 7 8
9
10
12
13
14 15 16
17
18
II
1?
13 14 15
16
17
19
20
21 22 23
24
25
18
19
20 21 22
n
74
26
27
28 29 30
31
25
26
27 28 29
30
31
JUNE
SEPTEMBER
S
M
T W T
F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
1
1
2
3 4 5
6
7
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
8
9
10 II 12
13
14
V
10
II 12 13
14
15
15
16
17 18 19
20
71
lo
17
18 19 20
21
22
22
73
24 25 26
77
7R
23
24
25 26 27
28
29
29
30
OCTOBER
S M T W T F S
12 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 II 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31
NOVEMBER
S M T W T F S
I 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 II 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
DECEMBER
S M T W T F S
12 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 II 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29 30 31
General Calendar
WINTER. QUARTER— 1966-67
Tuesday, November 8, 1966
Deadline for making application for admission for the
Winter Quarter
Monday, November 28
5:00 P.M. Registration for night and graduate courses
7:00 P.M. Monday night classes meet
Tuesday, November 29
Registration by appointment
Wednesday, November 30
Continuation of registration by appointment. Last day
of registration without late registration fee
Thursday and Friday, December 1 and 2
8:00 A.M. Classes meet on schedule
Fee for adding and dropping courses effective on Thurs-
day, December 1
Thursday, December 8
Last day for registering or adding Winter Quarter courses
Wednesday, December 14
Last day for dropping courses
Friday, December 16
6:00 P.M. Christmas holidays begin (Friday night and Saturday
morning classes will meet)
Saturday, December 17
Graduate Record Examination
Saturday, December 31
Deadline for making application for admission for the
second term of the Winter Quarter
Monday, January 2, 1967
8:00 A.M. Class work resumed
Saturday, January 7
National Teacher Examination
Wednesday, January 18
8:00 A.M. Registration for second term of Winter Quarter
Thursday, January 19
Beginning of second term of Winter Quarter. (Date for
reporting mid-term deficiencies)
Saturday, January 21
Graduate Record Examination
Thursday, January 26
English Proficiency Examination
Thursday, Friday, Saturday, February 23, 24, 25
Winter Quarter examinations
Saturday, February 25
Graduate Record Examination
Last day to file application for May graduation
General Calendar
SPRING QUARTER— 1967
Monday, February 13, 1967
Deadline for making application for admission for the
Spring Quarter
Monday, March 6
5:00 P.M. Registration for night and graduate courses
7:00 P.M. Monday night classes meet
Tuesday, March 7
Registration by appointment
Wednesday, March 8
Continuation of registration by appointment. Last day to
register without late fee
Thursday, Friday, Saturday, March 9, 10, 11
8:00 A.M. Classes meet on schedule. (Saturday classes meet on
Monday schedule)
Fee for adding and dropping courses effective on Thurs-
day, March 9
Thursday, March 16
Last day for registering or adding Spring Quarter courses
Saturday, March 18
National Teacher Examination
Tuesday, March 21
Last day for dropping courses
Thursday, March 23
6:00 P.M. Easter holidays begin (Thursday and Friday night classes
and Saturday morning classes will meet)
Tuesday, March 28
8:00 A.M. Class work resumed
Thursday, March 30
University of Southern Mississippi Day
Monday, April 17
Beginning of second term of Spring Quarter — only date
for adding or registering for second term courses. (Date
for reporting mid -term deficiencies)
Thursday, April 20
English Proficiency Examination
Saturday, April 22
Graduate Record Examination
Tuesday, May 2
10:00 A.M. Honors Day Convocation
Thursday, Friday, Saturday, May 18, 19, 20
Spring Quarter examinations
Saturday, May 20
Last day to file degree applications for August graduation
Wednesday, May 24
5:45 P.M. Graduation Exercises
8
General Calendar
SUMMER QUARTER^1967
Tuesday, May 16
Deadline for making application for admission for the
Summer Quarter
Monday. June 5
8:00 A.M. Orientation for freshman and transfer students
5:00 P.M. Registration for night and graduate courses
7:00 P.M. Monday night classes meet
Tuesday, June 6
8:00 A.M. Registration by appointment
Only day to register for Summer Quarter without late fee
Wednesday, June 7
8:00 A.M. Classes meet as scheduled
Friday, June 9
Last day for registering or adding first term courses
Tuesday, June 13
Last day for dropping first term courses
Wednesday, June 14
Last day for registering or adding full quarter courses
Tuesday, June 20
Deadline for making application for admission for the
second term of the Summer Quarter
Last day for dropping full quarter courses
Saturday, July 1
National Teacher Examination
Friday, July 7
First term examinations
Saturday, July 8
Graduate Record Examination
Monday, July 10
8:00 A.M. Registration for second term of Summer Quarter. Second
term courses may be added on this date without change
of schedule fee
Wednesday, July 12
Last day for registering or adding second term courses
Thursday, July 13
English Proficiency Examination
Friday, July 14
Last day for dropping second term courses
Thursday, Friday, Saturday, August 10, 11, 12
Summer Quarter examinations
Wednesday, August 16
5:45 P.M. Graduation Exercises
ADMINISTRATION, FACULTY,
AND STAFF
General Administration
Board of Trustees
Administrative Officers
Faculty Committees
Instructional and Administrative Staff
Faculty Emeriti
Professors
Associate Professors
Assistant Professors
Instructors
Graduate Fellows
Staff
10
GENERAL ADMINISTRATION
BOARD OF TRUSTEES
Of State Institutions of Higher Learning, State of Mississippi
Members Whose Terms Expire May 7, 1976
M. PAUL HAYNES, Northern Supreme Court District, Baldwyn
THOMAS N. TURNER, Third Congressional District, Belzoni
SENATOR GEORGE M. YARBROUGH, 2nd Congressional District, Red Banks
LEON LOWERY, LaBauve Trustee (Desoto County), Olive Branch
Members Whose Terms Expire May 7, 1972
W. O. STONE, Central Supreme Court District, Jackson
IRA L. MORGAN, State-at-Large, Oxford
DR. M. M. ROBERTS, Sixth Congressional District, Hattiesburg
E. RAY IZARD, Southern Supreme Court District, Hazlehurst
Members Whose Terms Expire May 7, 1968
DR. VERNER S. HOLMES, Seventh Congressional District, McComb
J. N. LIPSCOMB, First Congressional District, Macon
S. R. EVANS, State-at-Large, Greenwood
TALLY RIDDELL, Fifth Congressional District, Quitman
OFFICERS OF BOARD
DR. VERNER S. HOLMES, Chairman
DR. E. R. JOBE, Executive Secretary and Director
XI
General Administration
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS
WILLIAM DAVID McCAIN, B.S., M.A., Ph.D President
ROGER BARTON JOHNSON, B.S., M.S Administrative Assistant
PAULINE ROGERS STOUT, B.A., M.A Research and Editorial Assistant
to the President
JOHN HORTON ALLEN, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Dean of the University
RALPH SEER OWINGS, A.B., M.A., Ed.D Dean of the Graduate School
CARLTON LAMAR McQUAGGE, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Dean of the School of
Education and Psychology
CLAUDE EDWIN FIKE, A.B., A.M., Ph.D Dean of the College of
Arts and Sciences
JOSEPH ARTHUR GREENE, JR., A.B., M.A, Ph.D Dean of the School of
Business Administration
RAYMOND MANNONI, B.S., B.M., M.M.Ed., M.Ed.D Dean of the School of
Fine Arts
BERTHA MAUDE FRITZSCHE, B.S, M.S., Ph.D Chairman of Division
of Home Economics
SIDNEY E. L. WEATHERFORD, JR., B.S., M.A., Ed.D Dean of the Basic
College and Director of Student Counseling
JAMES REGINALD SWITZER, B.S, M.A, Ed.D .Dean of Student Affairs
IVAH OSTRANDER WILBER, B.S, M.A Dean of Women
WILLIAM RADER GRANTHAM, B.S, M.A Dean of Men
AUBREY KEITH LUCAS, B.S, M.A Registrar
i JOSEPH SAMUEL ANZALONE, B.S, M.S Director of Admissions
ALONZO HOLMES STURGEON, B.S, LL.B. ..Acting Director of Admissions
CHARLES OTTO SMALLING, B.S Financial Secretary
ALBERT JOSEPH JAEGER, B.B.A Assistant Financial Secretary
PAUL CLAUDE MORGAN, A.B, M.S, Ed.D Dean of Division of
Continuing Education
WARREN FRANCIS TRACY, A.B, B.S, M.A, Ph.D Librarian
BERNARD REED GREEN, B.S Director of Intercollegiate Athletics
ROBERT HAYS CLEVELAND, B.S Director of Public Relations
CLIFFORD HELMAR HAGENSON, B.S.Ed, Ph.M Director of Housing
JAMES EDWARD BAXTER, B.A, M.A, Ed.D. . .Director of Placement Bureau
POWELL G. OLGETREE, B.S, M.A, Alumni Secretary
WILLIAM ELLIS KIRKPATRICK, B.S, M.S Director of University Union
RALPH MANUEL SIVERIO, B.S Director of Latin- American Institute
JOEL REESE EAKENS, B.S Director of Physical Plant
ROBERT WILLIAM PETERS, B.A, M.A, PhD, Director of Research and
Projects
a Leave of Absence, 1965-66
Ji
General Administration
♦FACULTY COMMITTEES, 1965-1966
ACADEMIC COUNCIL: McCain, Allen, Bishop, Clements, Dixon, Felder, Fike,
Fritzsche, Greene, Hamman, W. Hatcher, A. Kelley, J. Kelley, Landskov,
Lane, Lok, Lynch, McCarty, McQuagge, Mannoni, W. Moody, Musgrave,
Orange, R. Owings, B. Smith, Stegenga, Stritch, Tracy, White.
ADMISSIONS & CREDITS (Undergraduate): Sturgeon, Allen, Fike, Grantham,
Greene, Lucas, McQuagge, Weatherford, I. Wilber.
ADMISSIONS & CREDITS (Graduate): Sturgeon, Allen, Fike, Greene, Lucas,
McQuagge, R. Owings.
ATHLETICS: Milam, J. T. Davis, Miller, Smalling, Switzer.
AUDITORIUM: Allen, Fike, Hartwig, R. Johnson, Mannoni, Smalling.
CALENDAR: Allen, Fike, Fritzsche, B. Green, R. Green, Greene, R. Johnson,
Lucas, McQuagge, Mannoni, Miller, P. Morgan, R. Owings, Siverio,
Smalling, Stritch, Sturgeon, Switzer, Weatherford, I. Wilber.
COMMENCEMENT: Allen, Dale, Easterling, Felder, Fike, Fritzsche, Greene,
Hartwig, R. Johnson, McQuagge, Mannoni, Nau, Ogletree, R. Owings,
Smalling, I. Wilber, L. Wilber, Officers of the Senior Class.
CONTINUING EDUCATION: P. Morgan, Allen, Greene, A. C. Johnson, Mc-
Quagge, Musgrave, R. Owings, Smalling, Welker.
FACULTY BENEFITS: A. Kelley, C. Brent, J. T. Davis, Drain, Gonzales,
W. Hatcher, H. O. Jackson, Jaeger, Landskov, Milam, Peters, Saetre,
Sorbet, J. Thomas.
FRATERNITIES & SORORITIES: Switzer, Benner, J. T. Davis, Felder,
Grantham, W. Jackson, Lawhon, Munn, Musgrave, Nau, O. Thomas,
I. Wilber.
GRADUATE COUNCIL: R. Owings : Allen, Bahr, Boroughs, J. T. Davis,
Forbes, Fike, Fritzsche, Greene, Hartwig, McQuagge, Mailey, Mannoni,
Milam, K. Neumann, Pound, Stepp, Tracy, Vreeland, Webster.
HOUSING: Smalling, Bizzell, Grantham, R. Green, Hagenson, Jaeger, R.
Johnson, Switzer, I. Wilber.
LIBRARY: Tracy, Allen, Fike, Fritzsche, Gonzales, Greene, Hartwig, Landskov,
Lane, McQuagge, Mannoni, Moorman, A. Morgan, Musgrave, R. Owings,
Peters, Stegenga, Wall, L. Wilber.
PUBLIC RELATIONS: Cleveland, Chappell, Dudley, Gonzales, R. Green,
Horton, H. O. Jackson, Lucas, Mannoni, Myers, Ogletree, Switzer.
REGISTRATION: Lucas, Allen, Dale, Fike, B. Green, Greene, Jaeger, Mc-
Quagge, P. Morgan, R. Owings, Smalling, Sturgeon, Switzer, Weatherford.
RELIGIOUS ACTIVITIES: Lucas, J. T. Davis, Bonner, Felder, Golden, Napier,
Reck, L. Wilber, President Student Christian Federation.
RESEARCH & CREATIVE ACTIVITIES: Peters, J. T. Davis, Bahr, Burrus,
Coe, Dixon, Easterling, Fike, Fritzsche, Gonzales, Jones, A. Kelley, E.
Kelly, Lane, Monachino, L. Moody, R. Owings, Pound, Stritch, Webster.
STUDENT AID & SCHOLARSHIPS: Switzer, Conn, Fike, Jaeger, R. Johnson,
E. Kelly, Mannoni, Ogletree, Sturgeon, I. Wilber.
STUDENT SOCIAL LIFE: Kirkpatrick, J. T. Davis, Grantham, King, Lawhon,
I. Wilber, President Panhellenic Council, President Interfraternity Coun-
cil, 1st and 2nd Vice Presidents and Social Chairman Student Govern-
ment Association, Chairman University Union Activities Committee.
General Administration
TEACHER EDUCATION COUNCIL: McQuagge, Boroughs, Felder, Fritzsche,
Gonzales, Landskov, Mailey, Orange, Pound, Stegenga, VanDeusen.
TENURE: Burrus, Easterling, Felder, Kenamond, Orange, Pound, Stegenga.
UNIVERSITY COUNCIL: McCain, Allen, Ambrose, Bahr, Bonner, Boroughs,
Burns, Burrus, Chappell, Cliburn, Dale, J. T. Davis, Dudley, Dixon,
Easterling, Fike, Foltz, Fritzsche, Gonzales, Gower, R. Green, Greene,
Gunn, Hardin, Hartwig, W. Hatcher, H. O. Jackson, R. Johnson, A.
Kelley, J. Kelley, E. Kelly, Landskov, Lane, Lok, Lucas, McCarver,
McQuagge, Mailey, Mannoni, Moorman, A. Morgan, P. Morgan, Mus-
grave, Nau, Ogletree, R. Owings, Payne, Peters, Scheel, Smalling,
Stegenga, Stritch, Switzer, Tracy, Van Deusen, Vreeland, Walker,
Weatherford, L. Wilber.
UNIVERSITY UNION: Switzer, Grantham, Hartwig, W. Moody, King, Kirk-
patrick, Nesbitt, Ogletree, I. Wilber, Interfraternity Council President,
Panhellenic Council President, 1st and 2nd Vice Presidents Student
Government Association.
*The President of the University is ex-officio member of all committees.
The person named first on each committee is chairman of the committee.
14
INSTRUCTIONAL AND
ADMINISTRATIVE STAFFS
FACULTY
FACULTY EMERITI
DR. ROY GILBERT BIGELOW, Dean Emeritus of the School of Education
and Psychology
MISS HAZEL MARIE BLACK, Assistant Professor Emerita of Education
MISS PEARL CAMPBELL, Associate Professor Emerita of Home Economics
MRS. KATHERINE SELBY FOOTE, Associate Professor Emerita of
Mathematics
MRS. MINNIE BELLE FORD, Assistant Professor Emerita of Education
MISS ALMA HICKMAN, Professor Emerita of English
MRS. NETTA McKEITHEN JENKINS, Assistant Professor Emerita of
Latin American Studies
MISS EMILY PEYTON JONES, Professor Emerita of Education
MR. JOHN MICHAEL KING, Associate Professor Emeritus of Education
DR. ROSEWELL GRAVES LOWREY, Professor Emeritus of English
MRS. SALLIE STEVENS McLEMORE, Assistant Professor Emerita of
Education
MISS ANNA MARGARET ROBERTS, Librarian Emerita
DR. WILLIAM HERBERT SUMRALL, Dean Emeritus of the Graduate School
MISS ERNESTINE THOMAE, Associate Professor Emerita of English
MISS AMELIA THOMPSON, Assistant Professor Emerita of Home Economics
MR. FERDINAND ARMIN VARRELMAN, Professor Emeritus of Biology
THE FACULTY
WILLIAM DAVID McCAIN, B.S., M.A., Ph.D President of the University
B.S., Delta State College; M.A., University of Mississippi; Ph.D., Duke University.
PROFESSORS
JOHN HORTON ALLEN, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Dean of the University
and Professor of Sociology
B.A., Southeastern Louisiana College; M.A., Louisiana State University; Ph.D., The
Pennsylvania State University.
HOWARD WILSON BAHR, A.B., Ph.D Professor of English and Literature
A.B., Oberlin College; graduate study, Ohio State University, Oberlin College;
Ph.D., University of North Carolina.
HARRY ROSS BARKER, JR., B.A., M.A., Ph.D Professor of Psychology
B.A., West Virginia Wesleyan College; M.A., Marshall University; Ph.D., Emory
University.
HERMAN BOROUGHS, B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D Chairman of Department of
Guidance and Professor of Education
B.S., Texas College of Arts and Industries; M.Ed., Ed.D., University of Missouri.
'ROBERT ARTHUR BRENT, A.B./M.A., Ph.D Professor of History
A.B., Gettysburg College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Virginia; post-doctoral study,
Columbia University.
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
BAHNGRELL WALTER BROWN, B.A., M.S., Ph.D Professor of Geology
B.A., University of Omaha; M.S., Ph.D., University of Nebraska.
ZED HOUSTON BURNS, B.S., M.S., Ed.D Chairman of Department of
Industrial Arts and Professor of Industrial Arts
B.S., in Arch., M.S., Auburn University; Ed.D., University of Cincinnati; summel
study, Columbia University; University of Alabama.
JOHN NEWELL BURRUS, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Sociology and Professor of Sociology
A.B., University of Mississippi; M.A., Ph.D., Louisiana State University.
JOSEPH HARDIN CLEMENTS, A.B., M.B.A., Ed.D Professor of Finance
A.B., University of Kentucky; M.B.A., University of Mississippi; Ed.D., University
of Oklahoma.
JOSEPH WILLIAM CLIBURN, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Professor of Biology
B.S., Millsaps College; M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; Ph.D., University
of Alabama.
JOHN HARBERT DALE, Lieutenant Colonel, U.S.A., B.S., M.S. .. Professor of
Military Science
B.S., Mississippi State University; M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
JAMES TREAD WELL DAVIS, B.S., M.A., Ph.D.. .Chairman of Department of
History and Professor of History
B.S., Memphis State University; M.A., Ph.D., Vanderbilt University.
DAVID ANDREW DeVRIES, B.S., Ph.D Professor of Geology
B.S., Wheaton College; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin.
LOUIS VERNON DIXON, B.S., M.S., Ph.D. .. Acting Chairman of Department
of Economics and Professor of Economics
B.S., M.S., University of Connecticut; Ph.D., University of Florida.
HORACE CHESTER DUDLEY, A.B., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Physics and Astronomy and Professor of Physics
A.B., Southwest Missouri State College; Ph.D., Georgetown University; post-doc-
toral studies, Oak Ridge Institute of Nuclear Studies; University of California;
Brookhaven National Laboratory.
HENRY BENJAMIN EASTERLING, B.S., M.A., Ed.D. . Chairman of Department
of Educational Foundations and Professor of Education
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., University of Alabama; Ed.D.,
Duke University.
VIRGINIA ISABELLE FELDER, A.B., M.S., Ed.D Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Mississippi State College for Women; M.S., Tulane University; Ed.D., Colum-
bia University.
CLAUDE EDWIN FIKE, A.B, A.M., Ph.D Dean of the College of Arts and
Sciences and Professor of History
A.B., Duke University; A.M., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of Illinois.
DAVID BARON FOLTZ, B.M., M.M., Mus.D Chairman of Department of
Music and Professor of Music
B.M., M.M., Illinois Wesleyan University; Mus.D., Texas Wesleyan College.
BEN LAWRENCE FORBES, B.S., M.B.A., C.P.A., Ph.D Professor of
Accounting
B.S., M.B.A., Louisiana State University; Ph.D., University of Illinois.
BERTHA MAUDE FRITZSCHE, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Chairman of Division of
Home Economics and Professor of Home Economics
B.S., M.S., Iowa State University; Ph.D., Ohio State University.
JEWEL GOLDEN, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Professor of Home Economics
B.S., Auburn University; M.A., Columbia University; Ph.D., Florida State Univer-
sity.
JOHN EDMOND GONZALES, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Professor of History
B.S., M.A., Louisiana State University; Ph.D., University of North Carolina.
16
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
LENA YARBRQUGH GOUGH, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Professor of Psychology
A.B., Alabama College; M.A., George Peabody College; Ph.D M University of Ala-
bama.
WILLIAM TURNER GOWER, B.Mus., M.Mus., M.F.A., Ph.D Chairman of
Department of Music Education and Professor of Music Education
B.Mus., M.Mus., University of Denver; M.F.A., Ph.D., University of Iowa.
JOSEPH ARTHUR GREENE, JR., B.A., M.A., Ph.D Dean of the School of
Business Administration and Professor of Economics
B.A., Berea College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Virginia.
ERIC McCOY GUNN, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Professor of Education
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; Ed.D., George Peabody College.
GORDON GUNTER, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Professor of Biology
A.B., Northwestern State College of Louisiana; M.A., Ph.D., University of Texas.
RECTOR ROEMILT HARDIN, B.A., M.A., C.L.U., Ph.D Chairman of
Department of Finance and Professor of Finance
B.A., Berea College; M.A., Ph.D., Duke University; C.L.U., The American College
of Life Underwriters; post-doctoral study, Harvard University.
ANTONIO EFTHEMIOS HARRISES, A.B., M.S., Ph.D. ..Professor of Biology
A.B., Saint Anslem's College; M.S., University of New Hampshire; Ph.D., Univer-
sity of Notre Dame.
GILBERT FREDERICK HARTWIG, Ph.B., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of
Department of Theatre and Professor of Theatre
Ph.B., M.A., Marquette University; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin.
WILLIAM HAMILTON HATCHER, B.A, M.A., Ph.D Professor of Political
Science
B.A., M.A., University of Arkansas; Ph.D., Duke University.
ARTHELL KELLEY, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Geography and Geology and Professor of Geography
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., University of Missouri; Ph.D.,
University of Nebraska.
EDGAR PRESTON KELLY, JR., B.S., M.S., Ph.D.. .Chairman of Department of
Mathematics. Professor of Mathematics and Director of Computer Center
B.S., Stephen F. Austin State College; M.S., Florida State University; Ph.D., Okla-
homa State University.
SHERIFF L. KNIGHT, B.A., M.A., Ed.D Professor of Education and
Director of The Film Library
B.A., Southwestern at Memphis; M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; Ed.D.,
Indiana University.
NORVIN LAWRENCE LANDSKOV, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of
Department of Secondary Education and Professor of Education
B.A., St. Olaf College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Minnesota.
CHARLES ELMER LANE, JR., B.S., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Chemistry and Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Ph.D., University of Chicago.
WALTER JAMES LOK, B.Des., M.Des., Ph.D Chairman of
Department of Art and Professor of Art
B.Des., M. Des., University of Michigan; Ph.D., University of Alabama.
JAMES SCOTT LONG, B.S. in Ch.E., M.S., Ph.D.. .Research Professor Emeritus
B.S. in Ch.E., M.S., Lehigh University; Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University.
CLARENCE EDWARD McCARVER, A.B., B.S., M.A., D.Ed Chairman of
Department of Health, Physical Education, and Recreation and
Professor of Heaithand Physical Education
A.B., Howard Payne College; B.S., M.A., George Washington University; D.Ed.,
Texas University.
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
CARLTON LAMAR McQUAGGE, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Dean of School of
Education and Psychology and Professor of Educational Administration
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., University of Mississippi; Ed.D.,
University of Texas.
JAMES HOWARD MAILEY, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Educational Administration and Professor of Educational Administration
B.S., Western Montana College of Education; M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago.
RAYMOND MANNONI, B.S., B.M., M.M.Ed., M.Ed.D Dean of School of
Fine Arts and Professor of Music
B.S., Kansas State College; B.M., University of Michigan; M.M.Ed., Northwestern
University; M.Ed.D., Chicago Musical College; study, U.S. Navy School of Music;
University of Chicago; Kansas University.
JESSE LLOYD MILAM, B.A., M.A., Ed.D Professor of Health and
Physical Education
B.A., Louisiana Polytechnic Institute; M.A., Ed.D., Columbia University.
LEO REYNOLDS MILLER, B.S.Ed., M.S.Ed., Ed.D Professor of
Elementary Education
B.S.Ed., Kansas City, Missouri Teachers College; M.S.Ed., University of Kansas;
Ed.D., Pennsylvania State University.
LAMAR MOODY, B.A.E., M.Ed., Ed.S., Ed.D Professor of Educational
Administration
B.A.E., M.Ed., Ed.S., Ed.D., University of Florida.
CHARLES WTCKLIFFE MOORMAN, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of
Department of English and Literature and Professor of
English and Literature
A.B., Kenyon College; M.A., Ph.D., Tulane University; Guggenheim Fellow.
PAUL CLAUDE MORGAN, A.B., M.S., Ed.D Dean of Division of
Continuing Education and Professor of Education
A.B., Louisiana State University; M.S., Auburn University; Ed.D,, George Peabody
College.
RAY SIGLER MUSGRAVE, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Psychology and Professor of Psychology
B.A., Bethany College; M.A., Ohio Wesleyan University; Ph.D., Syracuse Univer-
sity; post-doctoral study, University of Cincinnati; Columbia University.
JOHN FREDERICK NAU, B.D., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Religion and Philosophy and Professor of Religion and Philosophy
B.D., Concordia Seminary; M.A., Tulane University; Ph.D., University of South
Carolina.
HOWARD CARROLL NESBITT, B.A., M.A., Ed.D. .. Professor of Health and
Physical Education
B.A., Washington College; M.A., Ed.D., Columbia University.
GEORGE WILSON NICHOLSON, B.S., M.A., LL.B., Ph.D Professor of
Mathematics
B.S., The Citadel; M.A., LL.B., University of South Carolina; Ph.D., University of
North Carolina.
LINWOOD ELDEN ORANGE, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Professor of
English and Literature
A.B., M.A., Ph.D., Duke University.
INGOLF HELGI ELFRIED OTTO. AB., M.A., Ph.D Professor of Finance
A.B., University of Cincinnati; M.A., Ph.D., George Washington University.
RALPH SEER OWINGS, A.B., M.A., Ed.D... Dean of the Graduate School and
Professor of Educational Administration
A.B., M.A., Wofford College; M.A., Ed.D., Columbia University.
ROBERT WILLIAM PETERS, B.A., M.A., Ph.D. .. Chairman of Department of
Speech and Hearing Sciences, Director of Speech and Hearing Clinic,
Professor of Speech and Hearing Sciences and Director of Research and Projects
B.A., University of Minnesota; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University.
GOMER JEFFREY POUND, Mus.B., M.Mus. Ed., Ph.D. in M.Ed., . .Coordinator
of Graduate Studies and Professor of Music Education
Mus.B., Michigan State University; M.Mus.Ed., Ph.D. in M.Ed., Florida State Uni-
versity.
iS
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
GASTON SMITH. B.S., M.A., Ph.D Professor of Mathematics
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., Ph.D., University of Alabama.
MARTIN STEGENGA, B.S., M.S., D.B.A Chairman of Department of
Management and Professor of Management
B.S., M.S., Mississippi State University; D.B.A., Indiana University.
HUBERT FADILLE STEPP. A.B.. M.A., Ph.D Professor of Finance
A.B., Berea College; M.A., Ph.D.. University of Virginia.
THOMAS MICHAEL STRITCH, B.A.. M.A., Ph.D Professor of Psychology
B.A.. M.A., Ph.D., Emory University.
JAMES REGINALD SWITZER, B.S., M.S., Ed.D.. .Dean of Student Affairs and
Professor of Health and Physical Education
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S., Louisiana State University; Ed.D.,
University of Texas.
JAMES ERNEST THOMAS, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Professor of Educational
Administration
B.S., Middle Tennessee State College; M.A., Ed.D., University of Tennessee.
WARREN FRANCIS TRACY, A.B., B.S. in L.S., M.A., Ph.D Librarian
Chairman of Department of Library Science
and Professor of Library Science
A.B., Earlham College; B.S. in L.S., Western Reserve University; M.A., Ph.D.,
University of Chicago.
JOHN PIETERSEN VAN DEUSEN, B.S.. M.A., Ed.D Chairman of
Department of Elementary Education
and Professor of Education
B.S., M.A., Ed.D., Florida State University.
BENJAMIN ORMOND VAN HOOK. A.B.. M.A Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Millsaps College, M.A., Vanderbilt University; pre-doctoral study, Vanderbilt
University; Duke University.
RICHARD CRAWFORD VREELAND, B.A., M.B.A., Ph.D Chairman of
Department of Marketing and Professor of Marketing
B.A., Rollins College; M.B.A., Ph.D., University of Florida.
JAMES FREDERICK WALKER, A.B., M.S., Ph.D.. .Chairman of Department of
Biology and Professor of Biology
A.B., M.S., University of Mississippi; Ph.D., University of Iowa; post-doctoral
study, University of Miami; University of California at L.A.
JESSIE STEWART WALL, A.B., A.M., Ed.D. . Prof essor of Elementary Education
A.B.. Fairmont State College; A.M.. West Texas State College; Ed.D.. Florida State
University; post-doctoral study, Florida State University; Columbia University.
SIDNEY EDWARD LEE WEATHERFORD, JR., B.S., M.A., Ed.D.. .Dean of the
Basic College, Director of Student Counseling and Professor of Education
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; Ed.D., University of Florida.
PORTER GRIGSBY WEBSTER, B.A., M.S., Ph.D Professor of Mathematics
B.A., Georgetown College; M.S., Ph.D., Auburn University.
RALPH LEE WHITE, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Professor of Education and Director
of Office of Studprit Teaching
B.S., University of Tennessee; M.A., George Peabody College; Ed.D., University
of Tennessee.
LEON AUSTIN WILBER, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Political Science and Professor of Political Science
A.B., M.A., Ph.D., University of Michigan; post-doctoral study, University of
Chicago; University of Southern California.
4 MERTON STROEBEL ZAHRT, Mus.B., Mus.M., Ed.D Professor of
Music Education
Mus.B., Lawrence College; Mus.M., University of Rochester; Ed.D.. Columbia Uni-
versity.
*9
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS
WALTER ABBOTT, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Associate Professor of Biology
B.S., Tulane University; M.S., Texas A&M; Ph.D.. Rice Institute.
JOHN DOUGLAS ALCORN, B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Guidance
B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D., East Texas State University.
CHARLES EDWARD AMBROSE, B.F.A., M.A Associate Professor of Art
and Resident Artist
B.F.A., M.A., University of Alabama.
ELIZABETH MARTIN ANTLEY, B.A., M.Ed., Ed.D Associate Professor of
Elementary Education and Director
of the Reading Center
B.A., University of Mississippi; M.Ed., Ed.D., University of Southern Mississippi.
TAMES EDWARD BAXTER, B.A., M.A., Ed.D.. .Director of Placement Bureau
and Associate Professor of Education
B.A., Millsaps College; M.A.. Duke University: Ed.D.. University of Southern Mis-
sissippi.
MARY POE BAYLIS, A.B., Mus.B Associate Professor of Music
A.B., Davenport College. Lenoir. N.C.: Mus.B., New York School of Music and
Arts; graduate study, New York School of Music and Arts; University of
Wyoming.
FRANCES ELIZABETH BENNER, B.M.. Mus.M. . . Associate Professor of Music
Arthur Jordan Conservatory, Butler University, Soloist Diploma in Piano; Fon-
tainbleau School of Music; B.M., Mus.M. in voice, Cincinnati College of Music.
LILLY ANNELLE BONNER, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Acting Chairman of
Department of Business Education
and Associate Professor of Business Education
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; Ed.D., Indiana University.
RICHARD T EE BOWEN, A.B.. M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of Geology
A.B., University of North Carolina; M.A.. Indiana University; Ph.D.. University of
Melbourne.
CHARLES RAY BRENT. B.A., M.S., Ph.D Associate Professor of Chemistry
B.A., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S., Ph.D., Tulane University.
^FRANK WILSON BUCKLEY, B.A., LL.B., M.A Associate Professor
of Journalism
B.A., Louisiana College; LL.B., Vanderbilt University; M.A., Florida State Univer-
sity.
CLAUDE LOUIS CAMPBELL, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Associate Professor of
Education
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., Ed.D., George Peabody College.
STANLEY MALCOLM CARPENTER, B.S., M.B.A., C.P.A. Associate Professor
of Accounting
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.B.A., doctoral study, University of
Georgia.
BEN ARLEN CHAPPELL. B.A., M.A., Ph.D Chairman of Department of
Communication and Associate Professor of Public Address
B.A., M.A., North Texas State University; Ph.D., University of Oklahoma.
THOMAS THORNTON CHISHOLM, B.A., M.A Acting Chairman of
Department of Foreign Languages and
Associate Professor of Fo^eion Lan^nia^es
B.A., University of Mississippi: M.A., University of Texas; Fulbright Fellow, Sor-
bonne and University of Strasbourg; pre-doctoral study, University of Texas.
CALVIN ANDRE CLAUDEL, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Foreign Languages
B.A., M.A.. Tulane University; Ph.D., University of North Carolina; post doctoral
study, University of Paris (Sorbonne)
GORDON RANDOLPH COE. A.B., M.S., Ph.D.. Associate Professor of Chemistry
A.B., Centre College; M.S., University of Tennessee; Ph.D., University of Cincin-
nati.
'GEORGE THOMAS CROCKER, B.S., M.S.. Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.S., Union University; M.S., Auburn University; pre-doctoral study, Auburn
University.
lO
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
LENA YOUNG deGRUMMOND, B.A., B.S.in L.S., Ph.D. ..Associate Professor
of Library Science
B.A., The University of Southwestern Louisiana; B.S. in L.S., Ph.D., Louisiana
State University.
ROY EDISON DODSON, B.A., M.A., Ed.D Associate Professor of Art
B.A.. University of Missouri; M.A., San Jose State College; Ed.D., University of
California at Los Angeles.
JOHN MARTIN FRAZIER, B.S., M. A. . Associate Professor of Science Education
B.S., M.A., George Peabody College; graduate study, University of Chicago; Leland
Stanford University.
3 MARY ALLEN GAYLE, B.S., M.S Associate Professor
of Home Economics
B.S., Ball State University: M.S., Ohio State University; pre-doctoral study,
Purdue University.
ALBERT DONALD GEORGE, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Speech and Hearing Sciences
A.B., M.A., Ph.D., Louisiana State University.
5 ROBERT ORVILIE GRANGE, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Speech
B.A., Idaho State College; M.A., Denver University; Ph.D., Indiana University.
ERNEST BASIL GURMAN, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Psvcholocfy
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., Ph.D., Louisiana State University.
KENNETH URIAL GUTSCH, B.M., M.Ed, Ed.D Associate Professor of
Education
B.M., University of Miami; M.Ed., University of Mississippi; Ed.D, Florida State
University.
JOHN K. HAKEN. B.S.. M.S Visiting Lecturer in Chemistry
B.S., Glasgow University; M.S., doctoral study, The University of New South Wales.
GLENN TERRY HARPER. B.A.. M.A, Ph.D. . . .Associate Professor of History
B.A., Furman University; M.A., Ph.D., Duke University
ROBERT DENECKE HAYS, B.S.. M.S Associate Professor of Music
B.S., M.S, University of Oregon; graduate study, Columbia University; Florida
State University; Indiana University.
JOSEPH FRANCIS HUCK, Mus.B., M.M Associate Professor of Music
Mus.B., M.M, American Conservatory; graduate study, American Conservatory;
Chicago Musical College.
ELVIN MAX HUNTER, B.S, M.Ed., Ed.D Associate Professor of Industrial
Arts
B.S, M.Ed, Ed.D, University of Missouri.
HOWARD OLIVER JACKSON, B.S, M.A, C.P.A Acting Chairman
of Department of Accounting
and Associate Professor of Accounting
B.S., M.A, University of Southern Mississippi; graduate study, University of
Alabama.
WILLERY HARRIETTE JACKSON, A.B, M. A.. Associate Professor of History
A.B, Mississippi State College for Women; M.A., Columbia University; graduate
study, Columbia University.
BRYCE DONNELL JORDAN. B.S, M.P.A Associate Professor of Finance
B.S, Mississippi State University; M.P.A, Harvard University; pre-doctoral study,
University of Alabama.
JAMES WILLIAM KELLEY, B.B.A, M.B.A, C.P.A Associate Professor of
Accounting
B.B.A, Baylor University; M.B.A, Indiana University; pre-doctoral study, Univer-
sity of Alabama.
FREDERICK DILL KENAMOND, A.B., M.S, C.P.A Associate Professor of
Accounting
A.B, Shepherd College; M.S, University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral
study, University of Alabama.
5 HOWARD McCONNERAL KINLAW, B.A, MA., Ed.S, Ph.D Associate
Professor of Educational Administration
B.A., M.A, Mississippi College; Ed.S., Ph.D., Peabody College.
11
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
AUBREY KEITH LUCAS. B.S., M.A Registrar and
Associate Professor of Education
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study, Florida State
University.
RAYMOND MARTIN LYNCH, B.S., M.Mus., D.M.A Associate Professor
of Music Education
B.S., Davidson College; M.Mus., D.M.A. , University of Michigan.
ROBERT FINLEY McDAVID, B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D.. .Associate Professor of Health
and Physical Education
B.S., University of Notre Dame; M.S., University of Mississippi; Ph.D., University
of Michigan.
HELEN JANET McDONALD, Mus.B., M.M Associate Professor of Music
Education
Mus.B., M.M., Chicago Musical College; graduate study, University of Michigan;
Chicago Musical College.
JAMES HAROLD McPHAIL, B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D Coordinator of Student
Teaching and Associate Professor of Education
B.S., M.Ed., University of Southern Mississippi; Ed.D., Boston University.
HARVEY EDWIN MAIER, B.A., M.A., Ed.D Associate Professor of Music
Education
B.A., North Dakota State Teachers College; M.A., University of Washington;
Ed.D., Columbia University.
LILLIEN ERL MEHEARG, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor
of Psychology
B.A., Millsaps College; M.A., Louisiana State University; Ph.D., University of
Southern Mississippi.
WILLIAM JOSEPH MOODY, B.S., M.M., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Music Education and Director of Bands
B.S., University of Minnesota at Duluth; M.M., Butler University; Ph.D., Uni-
versity of Minnesota.
ASHLEY GRANTHAM MORGAN, B.S.Ed., M.Ed., Ed.D Chairman of
Department of Science Education
and Associate Professor of Science Education
B.S.Ed., University of Georgia; M.Ed., University of Virginia; Ed.D., University of
Georgia.
EDWARD HOLT MOSELEY, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor
of History
B.S., M.A., Ph.D., University of Alabama.
LOUIS EDWIN MULLEN, B.B.A., M.S., Ph.D. . Associate Professor of Accounting
B.B.A., University of Georgia; M.S., Ph.D., University of Illinois.
KARL NEUMANN, LL.D., M.F.A Associate Professor of Music Education
LL.D., Prague University; M.F.A., Carnegie Institute of Technology.
CARL RAY NEWSOM, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Associate Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Millsaps College; M.S., University of Alabama; Ph.D., George Peabody
College.
STANLEY JOSEPH PARRY, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Political Science
A.B., University of Notre Dame; M.A., Georgetown University; Ph.D., Yale Uni-
versity.
CHARLES ALFRED PAYNE, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Chemistry
B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Auburn University.
3 WILLIAM HENRY PRESSER, A.B., Mus.M, Ph.D Associate Professor of
Music
A.B., Alma College; Mus.M., University of Michigan; Ph.D., University of Ro-
chester; post-doctoral study, George Peabody College; University of the South.
LOUIS LEROY ROGERS, B.S., M.A., Ed.D. .. Associate Professor of Education
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; Ed.D., University of Tennessee.
ANTHONY CLAUDE ROUCHON, JR., Major, U.S.A., B.S.. .Associate Professor
of Military Science
B.S.. University of Southern Mississippi.
IX
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
GILBERT THEODORE SAETRE, B.S., M.A. in Mus.Ed Associate Professor
of Music Education
B.S., M.A. in Mus.Ed., New York University; graduate study, Juilliard School of
Music.
WILLIAM KAUFFMAN SCARBOROUGH, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Associate
Professor of History
A.B., University of North Carolina; M.A., Cornell University; Ph.D., University
of North Carolina.
EDUARDO GONZALEZ SCHEEL, B.A., M.A Acting Chairman of
Department of Foreign Languages
and Associate Professor of Foreign Languages
B.A., M.A., pre-doctoral study, University of Texas.
OLINDO SECONDINI, B.A., M.A. in Ed., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Foreign Languages
B.A., M.A. in Ed., State College of Education, Naples, Italy; Ph.D., Royal Oriental
University of Naples, Italy; post-graduate, New York City College; Polytechnic
Institute of Brooklyn.
BYRON COLMAN SMITH, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of Biology
B.S., Indiana State University; M.A., DePauw University; Ph.D., University of
Georgia.
ELIZABETH MELANIE SORBET, A.B., M.A., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Marketing
A.B., Northwestern State College of Louisiana; M.A., George Peabody College;
Ph.D., Louisiana State University.
WILLIAM TUCHAK, LL.M., I. A.M., Ph.D Associate Professor of
Political Science
LL.M., Casimir University; I.A.M., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of
Colorado.
FORREST DALE TUCKER, B.A., M.A, Ph.D Associate Professor of
Public Address
B.A., University of Wichita; M.A., Ph.D., Cornell University.
SARAH LITTLETON WEAVER, B.S., M.A., Ph.D .Associate Professor of
Home Economics
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; Ph.D., Florida State University.
ALLIE MARGUERITE WEBB, A.B, M.A Associate Professor of English
and Literature
A.B., Mississippi State College for Women; M.A., Columbia University; graduate
study, University of North Carolina; Breadloaf School of English.
MINER LILE WEEMS, B.A, M.A, Ph.D . . .Associate Professor of Political
Science
B.A., University of Washington; M.A., Ph.D., Georgetown University.
PAUL FRANCIS WEISEND, B.A, LL.B, M.A Associate Professor of
Finance
B.A., Duquesne University; LL.B., St. Mary's University; M.A., Mississippi State
University.
JOSEPH RICHARD WHITTINGTON, B.A, M.A, Ph.D. ...Associate Professor
of English and Literature
B.A., MA., Ph.D., University of Oklahoma.
ANNETTE BEDFORD WILDER, B.A, M.A. in L.S Education and
Psychology Librarian
B.A., William Carey College; M.A. in L.S., George Peabody College.
JERRY CHARLES WOFFORD, B.A, Ph.D Associate Professor
of Psychology
B.A, Ph.D., Baylor University.
WALTER HARRY YARROW, B.S, M.A, Ed.D Associate Professor
of Health and Physical Education
B.S, M.A., Ed.D., University of Southern Mississippi.
*3
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
ASSISTANT PROFESSORS
PAUL DAVID ANDERSEN, B.Mus., M.Mus Assistant Professor of Music
B.Mus., Drake University; M.Mus., Syracuse University; doctoral study, Washing-
ton University.
HAYWARD GLENN ANDERSON, B.S., M.A., C.P.A Assistant Professor of
Accounting
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; graduate study, University of
Alabama.
ROBERT LEE ARRINGTON, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of Philosophy
B.A., Vanderbilt University; M.A., Tulane University; pre-doctoral study, Tulane
University.
HAROLD VINCENT AVERY, B.M.Ed., M.Mus.. .Assistant Professor of Music
B.M.Ed., M.Mus., University of Nebraska; pre-doctoral study, University of Texas.
MABEL MAE BALDWIN, B.S. in Ed., M.A Assistant Professor of
Business Education
B.S. in Ed., Central Missouri State College; M.A., University of Iowa; graduate
study, Columbia University.
UOSE LUIS BARRIO-GARAY. B.S., M.A., Assistant Professor of Art
B.S.. Institute de Ensenanza Media; M.A., University of Madrid; advanced study.
Paris, France; Rome, Italy; Mississippi State University.
JOHN LEWIS BEAN, B.A.. M.A Assistant Professor of Geography
B.A., M.A., University of Texas; doctoral study, University of Pittsburgh.
IRVING BECKER, B.M., M.M Assistant Professor of Music Education
B.M., Manhattan School of Music; M.M., Duquesne University.
RAYMOND GERALD BISHOP, A.B., M.A.. . .Assistant Professor of Philosophy
A.B., Tulane University; M.A., University of Virginia; pre-doctoral study, Tulane
University.
BEN ALLAN BLACKMON, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of Sociology
B.A., Mississippi College; M.A., Louisiana State University; pre-doctoral study.
Louisiana State University.
KIRON CHANDRA BORDOLOI, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Assistant Professor \
of Physics
B.S., University of Gauhati; M.S., University of Calcutta; Ph.D., Louisiana State
University.
HILDA LYNELL BRISTER, B.S., M.S. .. Assistant Professor of Home Economics
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi; graduate study, Eastern Kentucky
State College.
!MARICE COLLINS BROWN, A.B., M.A. ..Assistant Professor of English and
Literature
A.B., Mississippi State College for Women; M.A., University of Southern Missis-
sippi: pre-doctoral study, University of Washington; Louisiana State University.
FRED WALDO BROWN, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Assistant Professor of
Science Education
B.S., Georgia Southern; M.A., University of Alabama; Ed.D., University of Georgia.
GEORGE EDWIN BULLARD, B.S,, M.S Assistant Professor of Marketing
B.S., University of Arizona; M.S., Mississippi State University.
CORRIE LYNNE BUNCH, B.S., M.A. in L.S Order Librarian
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A. in L.S., George Peabody College.
!OTTAMISE COLLEEN WHITTINGTON CAMERON, B.S., M.S Assistant
Professor of Business Education
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study, Indiana Uni-
versity.
AUGUST NORBERT CARNOVALE, B.M., M.A. .. Assistant Professor of Music
Education
B.M., Louisiana State University: M.A.. Columbia University; advanced study,
Colorado Western State College; Oklahoma State University.
ELSIE BOSCHERT CHICHESTER, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of
Home Economics and Director of the Nursery School
B.S., Delta State Teachers College; M.S., University of Tennessee.
EUGENE JOSEPH CONNER, Major, U.S.A., B.S Assistant Professor of
Military Science
B.S., Omaha University.
i4
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
GENE ARNOLD CROWDER, B.S., M.Ed Assistant Professor of Industrial
Arts
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.Ed., Colorado State University.
JAMES LOUIS DAVIS. B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Management
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi; doctoral study, Louisiana State
University.
PAUL MICHAEL DAVIS, B.B.A., M.A., C.P.A Assistant Professor of
Accounting
B.B.A., University of Cincinnati; M.A., University of Florida.
ELOISE CHATHAM DENT, B.S, M.A Assistant Professor of Education
and Assistant in the Reading Center
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; graduate study, University of
Virginia.
ANNIE LOUISE D'OLIVE, B.S., M.A Assistant Professor of Art
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., Columbia University; graduate
study, Dixie Art Colony; study at Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts.
JOHN ROBERT DONOHUE, B.M., M.M Assistant Professor of Music
B.M., M.M., Louisiana State University; pre-doctoral study, Michigan State Uni-
versity.
CHRISTOS LEONIDAS DOUMAS, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Assistant Professor
of Political Science
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles.
LOIS ARENDER DRAIN, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Home Economics
B.S., Northeastern State College; M.S., Oklahoma State University.
NETTIE ETOILE DUBARD, B.S., M.A. .. Director of Deaf and Aphasic School
and Assistant Professor of Speech and Hearing Sciences
B.S., Mary Hardin-Baylor University; M.A., George Peabody College; graduate
study, University of Texas; University of Utah; Central Institute for the Deaf at
Washington University.
!WOODROW WILSON ELLIS, B.A., M.B.A Assistant Professor
of Management
B.A., University of Mississippi; M.B.A., University of Alabama.
MASON LEON EUBANKS, B.S., M.A Assistant Professor of English and
Literature
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., University of Mississippi; graduate
study, George Peabody College.
WILLIE EVELYN EWELL, B.S., M.A Assistant Professor of
Business Administration
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., Colorado State College of Educa-
tion; graduate study, University of Denver; University of Colorado.
ARTHUR GEOFFREY FISH, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Biology
B.S., Carleton University; M.S., McGill University; pre-doctoral study, Univer-
sity of British Columbia.
MADELINE VIRGINIA FLYNT, A.B., M.A Assistant Professor of Library
Science
A.B., William Carey College; Certificate in Library Science, University of Ala-
bama; M.A., George Peabody College.
ARGLE SCOTT GARROW, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Assistant Professor of
English and Literature
B.S., Hampden-Sydney College; M.A., Ph.D., University of North Carolina.
SUE McGEHEE GILVIN, B.M., M.M. . . . Assistant Professor of Music Education
B.M., University of Louisville; M.M., Northwestern University; pre-doctoral study.
Northwestern University.
5 DAVID SLATE GOFORTH, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of
English and Literature
B.A., M.A., University of Mississippi; doctoral study, Indiana University.
WILLIAM RADER GRANTHAM, B.S., M.A Dean of Men and Assistant
Professor of Health and Physical Education
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study, Louisiana State
University,
*5
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
CLIFFORD HELMAR HAGENSON, B.S.Ed.. Ph.M Director of Student
Housing and Assistant Professor of Education
B.S.Ed., University of Illinois; Ph.M., University of Wisconsin; graduate study.
University of Illinois.
WILLIAM BONDURANT HALL, B.A., M.S Director
Jack c on Resident Center
B.A., Mississippi College; graduate study, University of Mississippi; Mississippi
College; University of Virginia; University of Chattanooga; M.S., University of
Southern Mississippi.
ALTRA HOWSE GILL HAMMAN, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of
Home Economic^
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S., University of Tennessee.
JAMES THOMAS HANSON, B.S Mississippi Librarian
B.S., Louisiana State University.
MARY STUART HARMON. B.S.. Mus.M Assistant Professor of Music
B.S,, Mus.M.. University of Southern Mississippi: graduate study, Northwestern
University; New Orleans Conservatory; Juilliard School of Music; Columbia Uni-
versity; University of North Carolina,
RICHARD IRWIN HARPER. B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of Historv
B.A., Rice University; M.A.. Emory University; pre-doctoral study, Emory Uni-
versity.
ROBERT DALE HATCHER. SR., B.S.F., M.S Assistant Professor
of Geography
B.S.F., M.S., doctoral study, University of Georgia.
FERN ROGERS HESSON, B.S., M.A. . .Assistant Professor of Home Economics
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi.
LEE KEMERLY HILDMAN, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Psychology
B.S., M.S., Florida State University; pre-doctoral study, University of Florida.
GUY MANN HORTON, B.S., M.Ed Assistant Professor
of Journalism
B.S., M.Ed., East Texas State College; graduate study, University of Texas.
GEORGE GIBSON HURST, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S., Tulane University.
iGEORGE EUGENE IMBRAGUIIO. B.M., M.M. . .Assistant Professor of Music
B.M., M.M., Michigan State University; summer study, Aspen, Colorado; St. Cecilia
Conservatory, Rome, Italy; Florida State University; Michigan State University.
ALVIS CLAYTON JOHNSON, B.S., LL.B., M.A. . . .Director of Biloxi Resident
Center and Assistant Professor of Political Science
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; LL.B., University of Alabama; M.A.,
University of Mississippi.
MARION CLOWER JOHNSON, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Health and
Physical Education
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S., Louisiana State University.
SARAH STEVENSON JOHNSON, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of
Foreign Languages
B.A., M.A., University of South Carolina; study at Institute de Touraine, Tours,
France; Escuela Normal Superior, Bogota, Columbia; Purdue University; Sorbonne,
University of Paris.
SAMUEL BASCOM JONES, JR., B.S., M.S., Ph.D Assistant Professor
of Biology
B.S., M.S., Auburn University; Ph.D., University of Georgia.
WALLACE GRANT KAY, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Assistant Professor of
English and Literature
B.A., Southern Methodist University; M.A., Ph.D., Emory University.
JOHN MORGAN KING, JR., B.S., M.P.E Assistant Professor of Health,
Physical Education, and Recreation
B.S., Mississippi College; M.P.E., University of Florida; pre-doctoral study, Indiana
University.
KIE WOOK LEE, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of Economics
B.A., Seoul National University; M.A., doctoral study, Vanderbilt University.
%6
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
JAMES DOUGLAS LOWE, JR., B.S., M.A, Ph.D Assistant Professor
of Psychology
B.S., M.A., Ph.D., University of Alabama.
FROBEN IOZADA. B.A.. M.A Assistant Professor of Foreign Languages
B.A., Pan American College; M.A., University of Missouri.
1 MARIE LOUISE McADAMS, B.S., M.A Head Catalog Librarian
B.S., Middle Tennessee State College; M.A., George Peabody College.
MARY MARGARET McCARTHY, B.S., M.A Assistant Professor
of Home Economics
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi.
KENNETH GRAHAM McCARTY, JR., B.S., M.A Assistant Professor of
History
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study, Duke Univer-
sity.
DANIEL WILKINS McMURRY, A.B., M.A Assistant Professor of Sociology
A.B., M.A., pre-doctoral study, University of North Carolina.
JAMES MERWYN McQUISTON, JR., B.S Assistant Professor of Economics
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study. University of Vir-
ginia.
DON HAILEY MARTIN, B.S, M.S Assistant Professor
of Mathematics
B.S., Oklahoma Southeastern State College; M.S., Oklahoma State University.
JOHN PORTER MASSEY, Captain, U.S.A., B.S Assistant Professor of
Military Science
B.S., Middle Tennessee State College.
BARNEY RAY MEADERS, III, Major, U.S.A., B.S Assistant Professor of
of Military Science
B.S, University of Southern Mississippi.
RICHARD JUNIUS MENDENHALL, B.S, M.Ed Assistant Professor of
History, Biloxi Resident Center
B.S, Livingston State College; M.Ed, University of Southern Mississippi.
VERNON EUGENE MERRIFIELD, B.F.A, M.A Assistant Professor of Art
B.F.A, M.A, University of Alabama.
FRANCIS LEONARD MONACHINO, B.A, M.S Assistant Professor
of Music
B.A, Brooklyn College; graduate study, Mannes College; Tanglewood; Columbia
University; M.S, University of Southern Mississippi.
CAROLYN ROBERTS MORROW, B.A, M.A Assistant Professor of
Foreign Languages
B.A, Newcomb College; M.A, Tulane University; pre-doctoral study. University
of Pennsylvania and Tulane University.
JACK DOUGLAS MUNN, B.S, M.A Assistant Professor of Mathematics
B.S, University of Southern Mississippi; M.A, University of Alabama; graduate
study, Oklahoma State University.
SHIRLEY MURPHY, B.S, M.S Reference Librarian
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S, Louisiana State University.
FRANCES ROBERTA JELLINEK MYERS, B.S, M.A. .. Assistant Professor of
Health and Physical Education
B.S, Brooklyn College; M.A, University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral
study, Columbia University.
*EDITHA SCHLANSTEDT NEUMANN, B.A, M.S.W Assistant Professor of
Foreign Languages
B.A, University of Berlin; M.S.W, University of Pittsburgh.
FANNIE OZELL OWINGS. B.S, M.S.. .Assistant Professor of Home Economics
B.S, University of Southern Mississippi; M.S, University of Tennessee; graduate
study, University of Kentucky; Michigan State University.
CLIFTON OSBORN PADGETT, B.A, M.Ed, Assistant Professor
of Education
B.A, William Carey College; M.Ed, University of Southern University.
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
BARBARA ANN PARSONS, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of
Religion and Philosophy
B.A., Rosary College; M.A., St. Louis University; doctoral study, Tulane Uni-
versity.
PAUL WALLACE PEDDICORD, B.A., M.Ed., Ed.D Assistant Professor
of Educational Foundations
B.A., Furman University; M.Ed., University of Houston; Ed.D., Duke University.
MORTON HERBERT RABIN, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of Psychology
B.A., New York University; M.A., Columbia University; pre-doctoral study, Co-
lumbia University and Florida State University.
FRANCES ELIZABETH RECK, B.S., M.A Assistant Professor of
Business Education
B.S., Kansas State Teachers College; M.A., State University of Iowa; graduate
study, New York University; Gregg College; Indiana University; University of
Colorado.
ELIZABETH ROGERS REYNOLDS, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor of
English and Literature
B.A., Winthrop College; M.A., Columbia University; doctoral study, University of
South Carolina.
JOHN DICK REYNOLDS, B.S., M.Ed Assistant Professor of Biology
B.S., M.Ed., Temple University; doctoral study, University of South Carolina.
ROBERT LEWIS ROBINSON, A.B., M.A Assistant Professo- of History
A.B., M.A., University of Alabama; pre-doctoral study, Columbia University and
Duke University.
ROBERT PAUL RUSSUM. B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Mathematics
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S., Louisiana State University.
WILLIAM FEAGTN ST. CLAIR. B.S.. M.A Assistant Professor of Physics
B.S., University of Florida; M.A., University of Alabama; graduate study, Univer-
sity of Alabama.
JAMES ANDREW SCOGGINS, B.A, M.Ed Assistant Professor
of Secondary Education
B.A., Vanderbilt University; M.Ed., University of Southern Mississippi.
BILLY BORDEN SLAY, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Health and
Physical Education
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study, Louisiana State
University.
GEORGE ALTON SMITH, B.S., M.S Assistant Professor of Mathematics,
Biloxi Resident Center
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.S., Louisiana State University; pre-
doctoral study, Rice University.
ROBERT SAYLOR SNEAD, Captain, U.S. A., B.S Assistant Professor of
Military Science
B.S., Centenary College.
LEONARD DON STOCKER, A.B., M.A Assistant Professor of Music
A.B., University of Michigan; M.A., Columbia University.
PETER KONRAD STOCKS, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Assistant Professor of Biology
B.S., Millsaps College; M.S., University of Southern Mississippi; Ph.D., Louisiana
State University.
BUFORD BENNETT STRANGE, B.A., M.A Assistant Professor
of Radio and Television
B.A., Louisiana College; M.A., University of Southern Mississippi.
GLENN ROBERT SWETMAN, B.S., M.A Assistant Professor of English
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study, Tulane Uni-
versity.
SHELBY FRELAND THAMES, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Assistant Professor
of Chemistry
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi; Ph.D., University of Tennessee.
ORVILLE MALCOLM THOMAS, B.S., M.A. .. Assistant Professor of Industrial
Arts
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi; M.A., University of Alabama.
JAMES AIRD TOWNLEY, B.S., M.A Assistant Professor of Health
and Physical Education
B.S., M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; pre-doctoral study, Louisiana State
University.
*8
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
JOHN GEORGE TURNBULL, B.S., M.S., Ph.D Assistant Professor
of Biology
B.S.. Central State College; M.S., Ph.D., Louisiana State University.
ELIZABETH VARDAMAN, B.A., M.A., M.A. in L.S Periodicals Librarian
B.A., M.A., University of Mississippi: M.A. in L.S., George Peabody College.
DURWARD CLIFTON WARE. JR., B.A., M.Mus.. .Assistant Professor of Music
B.A., Millsaps College; M.Mus., University of Southern Mississippi.
CARRIE LEE WARREN, B.S., M.Ed Assistant Professor of Health and
Physical Education
B.S., Louisiana State University: M.Ed., University of Texas; pre-doctoral study,
University of North Carolina, University of Texas.
!TOMMY GENE WATSON. A.B.. M.A Assistant Professor of English and
Literature
A.B., Oklahoma Baptist University; M.A., University of Arkansas; pre-doctoral
study, University of Arkansas and Louisiana State University.
CARL EVERETT WILLER, A.B., M.A Assistant Professor of Education
A.B., Marshall College; M.A., Columbia University; pre-doctoral study, Univer-
sity of Florida.
BILL MARTIN WILLIAMS, B.S., M.A., Ph.D Assistant Professor of
Marketing
B.S., Auburn University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Oklahoma.
CLINTON LOWERY WILLIAMS, JR., Major, U.S.A., B.S. . .Assistant Professor
of Military Science
B.S., Mississippi State University.
RAYMOND GUINN YOUNG, B.M.Ed., M.M Assistant Professor of Music
Education
B.M.Ed., M.M., University of Michigan.
INSTRUCTORS
VIRGINIA CAMPBELL ALEXANDER, B.A. in P.Ed., M.Ed Instructor
in Health and Physical Education
B.A. in P.Ed., M.Ed., University of Texas.
JAMES VTNCENT BAKER. B.S.. M.S Instructor in Economics
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.S., Florida State University.
JANELLE BEAUBOEUF. B.A.. M.A Instructor in Public Address
B.A., Louisiana College; M.A., University of Alabama.
HYLER JEFFERY BRACEY. B.B.A.. M.B.A Instructor in Management
B.B.A., Lamar State College of Technology; M.B.A. , Louisiana State University.
ROSALIE BRAND, B.S Assistant Cataloger
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
LOIS TRUE BRELAND, B.S., M.S Instructor in English
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
2 BONNIE CARTER BRINEGAR, B.A Instructor in English
B.A., University of Mississippi; graduate study, University of Mississippi.
MARIANNE BROWN, B.S., M.A. .. Instructor in Health and Physical Education
B.S., Delta State College; M.A., University of Southern Mississippi; graduate
study, University of Alabama.
JOHN CECIL BURCH, B.A., M.Ed Instructor in Mathematics and
Counselor, Biloxi Resident Center
B.A., University of Minnesota; M.Ed., University of Southern Mississippi.
MARY HELEN CAMPBELL, B.S Instructor in Art
B.S., graduate study, Florida State University.
GALE SANDERS DICKERSON. B.S., M.S Instructor in Home Economics
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
RAYMOND VIVIAN DOWNEY, B.A., M.A Instructor in English
B.A., William Carey College; M.A., University of Southern Mississippi.
LINDA ROSE ELKINS, B.S Instructor in English and Literature
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
MARY HAMRICK ELLIS, A.B., M.A Instructor in Speech
A.B., University of Alabama; M.A., University of Southern Mississippi.
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
ALICE WILKINSON ESSARY, B.S, M.S Instructor in
Mathematics
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
PATRICIA HARRIS GARROW, B.A., M.A Instructor in
Mathematics
B.A., Meredith College; M.A., The University of North Carolina.
META LEWIS GRADY, B.A Instructor in Latin American Institute
B.A., Greensboro College.
LARRY HANSEL GRANTHAM Instructor in Latin
American Institute
RICHARD CORBETT GUESS, B.S., M.S Instructor in Management
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
EARNEST LAWRENCE HARRINGTON, B.S., M.Ed Track Coach, Trainer,
Equipment Manager, and Instructor in Health and Physical Education
B.S., M.Ed., University of Southern Mississippi.
JEAN LENOIR HEISS, B.A., M.A Instructor in Foreign Languages
B.A., Vassar College; M.A., University of California at Los Angeles.
CLAIRE HILDERBRAND, B.S Circulation Librarian
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
MARTHA FRANCES HILL, B.S Assistant Circulation Librarian
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
BRIAN GEORGE HOLDER, B.A Instructor in Geography
B.A., University of Liverpool.
VIRGINIA REDFORD HOPPER, A.B., M.A Instructor in Sociology
A.B., Oklahoma Baptist University; M.A., Texas Christian University.
EMMA JEAN HUDSON, B.M., M.A Instructor in Theatre
B.M., Northwestern University; M.A., University of Southern Mississippi.
OLA MAE HUTCHINSON, B.S Social Science Librarian
B.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
RAYMOND MILTON JOHNSON, JR., B.S., M.B.A. ...Instructor in Economics
B.S., M.B.A., University of Southern Mississippi.
DAVID SMYTHE LINDSAY, B.A., M.S Instructor in Political Science
B.A., Northwestern University; M.S., Florida State University.
JOSEF ELON McCLESKEY, B.S., M.S Instructor in Chemistry
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
JESSE OSCAR McKEE, B.S. in Ed., M.A Instructor in Geography
B.S. in Ed., Clarion State College; M.A., Michigan State University.
HARRY ROBERT MALLERY, B.S., M.S Instructor in Mathematics
B.S., Stephen F. Austin College; M.S., Louisiana State University.
PERRY LOU MILNER, B.S., M.S Instructor in English and Literature
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
JOHN McCALL NORSWORTHY, B.S., M.Ed Instructor in Psychology
B.S., M.Ed., Mississippi State University.
ANDREW JEREMY OLSEN, A.B., M.S.Ed Instructor in Science Education
A.B., Oglethorpe University; M.S.Ed., University of Georgia.
HENRY STANLEY PHILLIPS, JR., B.S., M.S Instructor in English and
Literature
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
ELNA JO CROSS PIERCE, B.S Instructor in Nursing Program,
Natchez Resident Center
B.S., Northwestern State College of Louisiana.
CARRIE LOUISE PORTER, A.B., M.A Instructor in English
A.B., Mississippi State College for Women; M.A., University of Alabama.
FLORA MAE POSEY, B.S.N.E., M.S.N Director of Nursing Program and
Instructor in Nursing, Natchez Resident Center
B.S.N.Ed., Incarnate Word College; M.S.N. , University of Texas.
JAMES ARTHUR ROBERTSON, JR., B.S., M.S.. .Instructor in Political Science
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
PATRICIA LOUISE TELLEJOHN, B.A., M.S Instructor in School for
B.A., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
3°
Deaf and Aphasic Children
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
EVELYN BOYD TEMPLE, B.S. .Instructor in Nursing, Natchez Resident Center
B.S., Louisiana College.
ANN JACQUELINE TROSPER, B.A., M.S Instructor in
Health and Physical Education
B.A., Southeastern Louisiana College; M.S., Louisiana State University.
MARY CAROLYN AULTMAN WHITFORD, B.S., M.S Instructor in
Business Education
B.S., M.S., University of Southern Mississippi.
CARL LESTER WILLIS, B.A Instructor in Journalism
B.A., Ouachita Baptist University; graduate study, University of Missouri.
IRMGARD MATHILDE ZEYSS Instructor in Foreign Language
Abitur, Bayreuth, Germany; Abschlussexamen, Dolmetscherschule, Coberg, Ger-
many.
lLeave of Absence 1965-66
2Leave of Absence Fall Quarter
3Leave of Absence Spring Quarter
4Appointed Winter Quarter
5 Resigned during academic year, 1965-1966.
GRADUATE FELLOWS
1965-66
JENNIFER KAY TRIPLETT ADAMS Library Science
WAYNE LOUIS BABIN Health and Physical Education
ELIZABETH JOAN BARICEV Communications
EDWIN JORDAN BASS Educational Administration
PEGGY ANNE BELL Theatre
ROBERT HAYWOOD BOURDENE Psychology
WILLIAM RANDY BOXX Management
MARGARET CELESTE BREAZEALE Mathematics
PATSY ANNE BREWER English
STANLEY HARVEY BRUMFIELD Guidance
BRENDA LEE BURCH Health and Physical Education
LUTHER LEE BURNS Geography
ROGER DALE CALCOTE Economics
WILLIAM HENRY CAMPBELL, JR English
MARY ANN CARMICHAEL Elementary Education
EDWIN RONALD CARRUTH Educational Administration
JOHN WILLIE CARTER, JR Biology
GEORGE ARCHIE CHANCELLOR, JR Psychology
WALTER LEON CHATHAM Elementary Education
LARRY CHRISTENSEN Psychology
DONNA LYNN CONERLY Business Education
JAMES LARRY CRAIN Biology
LOY DALE CRUSE Health and Physical Education
BONNIE JEAN DAVIS Guidance
IRENE DA VAULT DAVIS Music
NICHOLAS EDWARD D'ANDREA Geography
JOE CHAMBLISS DAVIS Economics
PERRY BROOKS DENNIS Music
SUZANNE TAYLOR DUGGER Foreign Languages
MARGARET CARTER DUNN History
PETER EASTON DURKEE Counseling
3 1
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
LAROY HOBSON EDWARDS .Chemistry
DONALD WAYNE EVANS English
JOHNNY WAYNE FREEMAN Finance
EDWIN DAVID FRYE English
JAMES TAMSETT GILBERT Health and Physical Education
LINDA KAYE GRANTHAM History
NORA CALHOUN GRAVES English
LOUISE HARVEY GRIFFITH Psychology
SUE MARLENE GUNN Home Economics
LARRY EUGENE GUNNIN Political Science
SARA LOUISE HENDERSON HAGENSON Elementary Education
GEORGE LEE HAWPE Political Science
JOE EARL HOLLO WAY Educational Administration
SHERMAN HONG Music Education
RAYMOND HOPPER Counseling
SHUN-CHIN HSU Communications
CHU-SHYEN HUANG Biology
HARRIET FU-MEI LUO HUANG Library Science
BILLY THAMES IRBY Health and Physical Education
MELVIN EUGENE JONES Political Science
PATSY DEAN KALEHOFF Theatre
SAEEDA KHAN Health and Physical Education
JAMES MARION KNIGHT Biology
SHIRLEY DALE LAIRD English
GERALDINE YARBOROUGH LAMBRIGHT Mathematics
JAMES WILLIAM LARSON, JR Health and Physical Education
CAROLYN McKEY LEWIS Business Education
TEH-CHYUAN LIANG Economics
KENNETH JOSEPH MAILETTE History
COMMIE PAUL MASSEY Guidance
ROBERT SAMUEL MEHRLEY Secondary Education
GERALD JOHN MILLER Biology
FRANK MOBLEY Educational Administration
WARNER OLAND MOORE. JR History
BEVERLY HILL MOURNING History
CHARLOTTE ALLEN MURFF Mathematics
BROOKS NEFF, JR Speech and Hearing
DWAINE DARROLD NELSON Music
WILLIAM HENRY NICHOLS Psychology
NOLAN NIX Elementary Education
SALLY MARTHA PATTERSON English
DAVID LEBARRON PAYNE , Library Science
PERCY MUNNERLYN PENTECOST Educational Administration
MARILYN ANN PETRIE Mathematics
MARTIN GAYNOR POWER Educational Administration
JUDITH NELL PRITCHETT Music
NORBERT ANDREW QUAVE Guidance
JAMES CONRAD ROBERSON Chemistry
NOBLE LAFAYETTE ROBERTS Biology
BETTYF SUE ROGERS Home Economics
MARY NELSON ROSS Foreign Languages
AUBREY CECIL SANFORD Management
MARY ELIZABETH SELLERS Business Education
JOAN MARIE SLAY Elementary Education
BROOKS EUGENE SMITH Finance
GRACE SMITH Home Economics
WILLIAM MORGAN SMITH Mathematics
DORA EDITH STEWART English
JAMES HERBERT STONE History
BILLY GUY STRAIN Guidance
Instructional and Administrative Staffs
JOHN WILLIAM STUBBS Economics
MILDRED ANN PARKER SWITZER Home Economics
OCTAVE JOSEPH TOURNILLON Health and Physical Education
CATHERINE DEAN VAUGHAN Elementary Education
DAVID EUGENE VINSON Health and Physical Education
JOHN WRIGHT WALKER English
FU-YAO WANG Secondary Education
WILLIAM BURTON WATSON Political Science
JEAN COLLEEN WEATHERSBY Biology
ROSE GAYLE WEST Chemistry
CHARLENE JONES WHITE ..Psychology
JACK LINDSAY WHITEHEAD, JR Communications
ARLON ARNOLD WIDDER Chemistry
MORRIS CURTIS WILLIAMS Communications
JERRY WAYNE WILSON Health and Physical Education
JOHN EVANS WOODS Biology
YU-CHU WU Finance
LEONARD JEROME YELINEK Communications
STAFF MEMBERS
JAMES ALTON BERRY, B.S Assistant Football Coach
KATHERINE INDIA BROWN, B.A., M.A Coordinator Armed Forces
Education
WALTER OLIVER CONN, B.S., M.S.. . .Director Student Aid and Scholarships
BETTY GILLIS COOLEY, B.S Cashier, Business Office
HORACE BYRD DICKERSON, B.S., M.S Assistant Dean of Men
LEE PAUL FLOYD, B.A Head Basketball Coach
BAKER MOONEY FERRELL Director of University Commons
JESSE AUSTIN GORE Manager, University Bookstore
BILLY LEON GREEN, B.S Supervisor of Data Processing
EDWIN WHITFIELD HALE . Assistant Football Coach
MARGARET BARKER HARTFIELD, B.S. .. Secretary, Dean of the University
WILLIAM JACKSON HUDDLESTON, B.A., M.D Director of Student
Health Services
ANNIE BELL JONES, R.N Supervisor, Student Health Services
CECIL MARSHALL KLUTTS, B.S Purchasing Agent
ALMA SAUCIER LADNER, B.S., M.A., M.Ed Assistant Director
of Correspondence
MAXIE TIMOTHY LAMBRIGHT, B.S Assistant Football Coach
JAMES GILBERT LANGDON Assistant Registrar
RUBY ERNESTINE LAWHON, B.S., M.A Assistant Dean of Women
GRACE LEWIS MOORE, B.S., M.Ed Credits Counselor, Registrar's Office
JESSIE HAGLER MORRISON, B.S Executive Secretary,
Office of the President
STANLEY PHILIP ORVIS, B.S Housing Supervisor
WILLIE VERNON OUBRE, B.S.. Director of Campus Security
MARY DONAVAN PARKER Coordinator of Veterans Affairs
KENNETH ELMO SMITH, B.B.A., M.S., C.P.A Chief Accountant
CELESTAIN JOSEPH PETER TAYLOR, B.S., M.S Assistant Athletic
Director and Head Baseball Coach
HARRY MILTON THOMAS, B.S., M.A. .. Supervisor of Buildings Maintenance
P. W. UNDERWOOD, B.S Assistant Football Coach
THAD VANN, B.S Head Football Coach
LATNEY CONRAD WELKER, B.S., M.A., Ed.D Director of Natchez
Resident Center
RHODA REYNOLDS WILLIAMS Director of Campus Post Office
33
GENERAL INFORMATION
Historical
Purposes
Application Procedures
Student Community
Student Expenses
Student Aid
Latin-American Institute
Alumni Association
Library
Placement Bureau
34
GENERAL INFORMATION
Historical
A great educational awakening in the South became apparent near the
beginning of the twentieth century. By 1905 the citizens of Mississippi were
demanding better educational facilities for their children. The obvious need
for better educated teachers for all the public schools of Mississippi and the
organized efforts of the State Teachers Association culminated during the
legislative session of 1910 in an enabling act establishing the Mississippi Normal
College. Since its opening in the fall of 1912, this institution has existed under
four names. In 1924 the name was changed to State Teachers College. In 1940
it became Mississippi Southern College. And on February 27, 1962, the institu-
tion was named the University of Southern Mississippi.
This victory of progressive and democratic leadership inspired the first Board
of Trustees to make broad and far reaching plans for the new institution. The
generosity of Forrest County and Hattiesburg in offering $260,000 in cash, 840
acres of land, and other valuable considerations for the privilege of having the
college located in Hattiesburg made it possible for the newly elected president,
Joseph Anderson Cook, who had been serving as superintendent of the public
schools of Columbus, Mississippi, and the Board to begin the construction of
buildings. Before the opening in the fall of 1912, five permanent buildings (all
of which have been renovated and are still in use) were completed: the presi-
dent's home, College Hall, two dormitories — Hattiesburg Hall for women and
Forrest County Hall for men, and an industrial cottage for girls (now the
Speech and Hearing Science Building) . Frame buildings, since replaced, were
constructed to house the dining hall and kitchen, power house, and barn.
As the University has grown in numbers, it has also expanded its physical
facilities. Between 1912 and the outbreak of World War II, the college added
to its physical plant another dormitory for women (Mississippi Hall), another
classroom building, a demonstration school, an administration building, an
auditorium, a dining hall, a home economics building, a library, and a stadium
dormitory, the last two completed in 1939. This was the physical plant that
was taxed to the limit when World War II veterans entered the college in 1946.
Construction since World War II totaling more than $12,000,000 has been com-
pleted, and there are now more than 50 permanent buildings on the campus.
An ambitious program of future physical expansion for the University is in
the planning stage for an anticipated student body of 15,000.
The progress of the University cannot be measured in terms of the ex-
pansion of physical plant alone. A student body of 230 eager young men and
women and a faculty of 18 were present on the day of the opening exercises,
September 18, 1912. However, for the Fall Quarter of 1965 there were over
7,000 students and a full-time faculty of 288. Except for the years of World
Wars I and II, the Korean War, and the depression of the Thirties, the school
has experienced an upward growth in numbers.
The first course of study, prescribed by legislative enactment, consisted
of a certificate course and a diploma course. The rapid development of high
schools called for a higher course of study at Mississippi Normal College, and
in 1922 the legislature authorized the college to grant degrees. By 1929 the
college, its name having been changed in 1924 to State Teachers College, had
dropped the diploma and certificate course. In 1929 the college was admitted
to the American Association of Teachers Colleges and accredited by the
Southern Association of Colleges and Secondary Schools. During the 1930's
new courses were added and existing courses were expanded and improved.
By World War II the college offered, in addition to its elementary and sec-
ondary education degree programs, the Bachelor of Music degree, the Bachelor
of Arts degree, pre-medical, pre-legal, and pre-pharmacy programs, and was
certified for vocational home economics training. In late 1939, the Hattiesburg
Chamber of Commerce adopted as its project the changing of the name from
State Teachers College to Mississippi Southern College. In the legislative
35
General Information
session of 1940 this purpose was achieved, and the institution became in name
what it had partially already become in fact: a multiple-purpose institution.
In 1947, the Board of Institutions of Higher Learning in Mississippi author-
ized the college to give one year of graduate work leading to the degree
Master of Arts in education. The work of the graduate school has been
expanded over the past decade. At present, the university offers the doctorate
in several fields and a master's degree in many of the subject matter fields
(see the Graduate Bulletin for specific degrees).
Research has been strengthened at the University of Southern Mississippi
in several ways: the number of doctoral degrees has been increased; the
University has established its own scholarly journal — the Southern Quarterly;
library research materials have been greatly increased; the Computer Center
has been equipped to expedite contracts and faculty research; and the Office
of Research and Projects has been established by the University to promote
research and to assist faculty members in their research activities. For further
information on the University's research program, see the Graduate Bulletin.
The expansion of the academic offerings of the institution necessitated
the re-evaluation of the administrative system of the university. This had
remained virtually unchanged since 1912. The new system, with the Univer-
sity organized into two colleges, four schools, and two divisions and these
subdivided into departments, and the addition of new departments, the em-
ployment of new faculty members with superior training, and the general
development of academic standards have all played a part in making the
University of Southern Mississippi the modern multiple-purpose institution
it is today.
The men most responsible for the growth of the University have been
those individuals entrusted by the Board of Trustees with the administration
of the institution as president. The university has had six presidents:
Joseph Anderson Cook, A.B., 1912-1928
Claude Bennett, A.B., A.M., 1928-1933
Jennings Burton George, B.S., M.A., Ph.D., 1933-1945
Robert Cecil Cook, B.S., M.A., Ed.D., 1945-1955
Richard Aubrey McLemore, A.B., M.A., Ph.D., Acting President
January 1 to September 1, 1955
William David McCain, B.S., M.A., Ph.D., 1955-
PURPOSES OF THE UNIVERSITY
The University of Southern Mississippi was founded for the purpose of
serving the psople of Mississippi. The University offers outstanding courses
in liberal arts, education, pre-professional fields, fine arts, and many practical
fields of knowledge. The faculty, library, laboratories, classrooms, special
clinics, and student welfare services are equal to those in other colleges and
universities in the United States.
Although the University is primarily concerned with resident teaching,
it reaches, through various extension and resident centers, workshops, and
the correspondence courses, citizens in all parts of Mississippi and in various
other parts of the world.
The University is proud of the friendly relationship between students and
faculty members, and an effort is made to work with students as individuals
in their educational, social, and religious development.
The purposes of the University as developed by the administration and the
faculty are as follows:
1. To have a highly trained faculty, an imaginative, sympathetic, and
understanding administration, an efficient and cooperative staff, loyal and active
alumni, adequate equipment, and high academic standards.
2. To educate in the acquiring of knowledge, skills, disciplines, moral and
ethical values and humanistic ideals, and in the attaining of a dignified, hon-
est, and alert citizenship.
Admission Requirements
3. To base education on a sound and thorough understanding of the tra-
ditional and liberal areas of human knowledge.
4. To provide, together with counseling and guidance, a well-rounded
program of activities for the purpose of developing in each student a well-
balanced personality.
5. To provide areas of development in professional and vocational educa-
tion in accordance with facilities of the University.
6. To develop in students the highest types of social graces.
7. To give each student an understanding of the nature and the funda-
mental problems of the physical world in which he lives and the moral and
intellectual knowledge that will enable him to adjust himself to, or change,
the environment in which he lives.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
Requirements for entering freshmen:
1. The applicant must be a graduate of an accredited secondary school,
must present sixteen acceptable units of secondary school credit, and must
present a minimum of twelve units in college preparatory subjects such as
English, foreign language, history and social studies, mathematics, and physical
or biological sciences. A score of at least 15 on an appropriate sub-test of the
American College Test may permit a waiver of the minimum requirement of
units in a subject area.
2. The applicant must have a composite standard score on the American
College Test of at least 15. No other test or tests may be accepted as a substitute
for the American College Test without permission of the Director of Admissions.
3. The academic record, character, and conditions of application of the
applicant must be in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Board of
Trustees of State Institutions of Higher Learning and with the laws of the
State of Mississippi. The applicant must have excellent moral character in
conformity with the generally accepted standards customarily in effect in the
University.
4. Special consideration may be given to applicants with fifteen acceptable
units of secondary school credit who, although they have not graduated from
high school, have extremely high scores on examinations determined by the
Director of Admissions.
5. An applicant who has not graduated from high school and who is at least
twenty years of age may be admitted on the basis of successful completion of
a general educational development test (high school level) if all other admission
criteria are met.
Requirements for transfer students:
(In the following, a "C" average shall mean a 2. average based on a four
point quality point system.)
1. The applicant must be eligible to return, in good standing, to the institu-
tion last attended. Applicants who have been suspended from the last college
attended are ineligible for admission to the University of Southern Mississippi.
2. Transfer applicants from other Mississippi colleges or universities must
present academic averages of at least "C" in order to enter in good standing.
Applicants with averages of less than "C" may be given consideration for
admission on academic probation if their ACT scores are satisfactory.
3. Transfer applicants from colleges or universities outside Mississippi must
present academic averages of at least "C" in order to be admitted.
4. All transfer applicants must present their American College Test scores.
5. Transfer students from other Mississippi institutions who are admitted
with an over-all academic average of less than "C" will be placed on academic
probation, and courses on which grades of "D" have been made will not be
accepted for transfer. AH courses attempted at r»rior institutions will be con-
sidered in determining the students over-all average.
37
General Information
Limitation on Transfer of Credits
Not more than 99 quarter hours (66 semester hours) may be transferred
from a junior college. If a transfer student has earned a total of 99 quarter
hours in combined junior and senior college or other credits, no additional
credit will be accepted from a junior college. No former students of the
University of Southern Mississippi will be allowed to transfer credits earned
at a junior college once they have earned a total of 99 quarter hours from all
sources. In the 192-quarter-hour minimum requirement for a baccalaureate
degree, at least 96 hours must be earned in a senior college.
A maximum of 96 quarter hours of credit earned through correspondence
courses, extension courses, and educational experiences in the armed forces
combined may be counted toward a degree at the University of Southern
Mississippi. No more than 48 quarter hours earned by correspondence and/or
extension may be used.
Limitation on Acceptance of Military Credit
1. No credit is awarded for the General Educational Development Tests,
College Level.
2. No credit is awarded for completion of non-enrolled courses through
the United States Armed Forces Institute. Only correspondence courses are
accepted through that source.
3. Credit for educational experiences in the armed forces may be awarded
on the basis of recommendations of the American Council on Education.
4. A maximum of 96 quarter hours from military schools may be used
toward a degree, provided the student has no correspondence or extension
credit.
Requirements for military personnel: the "Bootstrap" program:
Military personnel on active duty who attend the University on the "Boot-
strap" Program may complete degree requirements with 40 quarter hours of
work on the Hattiesburg campus, provided all other degree requirements have
been fulfilled. This amount of work may be done in two quarters (six calendar
months), but many students attend on nine-month or year programs. Grad-
uate students will, of course, have to attend for at least three quarters since
they may transfer only nine quarter hours from another institution.
In order to receive an official evaluation of credits to determine eligibility
for "Bootstrap" attendance, the following educational credentials must be for-
warded:
1. A properly executed military Form DD 295.
2. Official transcripts bearing the college seal from each institution pre-
viously attended.
3. Official transcripts of correspondence courses completed through the
United States Armed Forces Institute, Madison, Wisconsin.
4. Official high school transcript.
5. An application for admission should be submitted with the request for
evaluation.
All documents and correspondence should be directed to:
Miss Katherine Brown
Coordinator of Armed Forces Education
University of Southern Mississippi
Southern Station, Box 6, Hattiesburg, Mississippi
When eligibility for "Bootstrap" attendance has been determined, the stu-
dent is required to submit five recommendations and a medical examination
form before the letter of acceptance can be written.
X
3*
Application Procedures
Requirements for foreign students: regular University programs:
1. Foreign students without previous records at colleges or universities
within the United States must meet the requirements outlined above for ad-
mission as freshmen with the exception of the American College Test require-
ment.
2. Foreign students who have already attended colleges or universities
within the United States must meet the requirements outlined above for ad-
mission as transfer students.
3. All applicants who are not citizens of an English-speaking country
must furnish the Director of Admissions with a satisfactory score on the Test
of English As a Foreign Language (TOEFL). Information about this test can
be obtained from Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey 08540,
USA. Because it normally requires several months to process all necessary
documents, foreign students are urged to apply for admission as early as pos-
sible. A ten-dollar, non-refundable fee must accompany the application for
admission of each foreign student.
Requirements for foreign students: The Latin-American Institute:
Students interested in attending The Latin-American Institute at the Uni-
versity of Southern Mississippi for intensified studies in English should direct
all correspondence to:
Mr. Ralph M. Siverio, Director
The Latin-American Institute
University of Southern Mississippi
Southern Station, Box 65, Hattiesburg, Mississippi
Special, non-degree-seeking students in the regular University:
In rare instances where a student desires to take a limited amount of
course work for a special purpose and not for a degree, the Director of Admis-
sions might grant permission as a special student. Inquiries should be directed
to the Director of Admissions.
Correspondence Courses, Resident and Extension Centers:
Students interested in enrolling in correspondence courses or courses at
resident and extension centers should write the Dean of the Division of Con-
tinuing Education, Dr. P. C. Morgan, University of Southern Mississippi, South-
ern Station, Post Office Box 55, Hattiesburg, Mississippi.
APPLICATION PROCEDURES
In making application for admission to the regular University the following
procedures must be followed:
1. Write to the Director of Admissions, Southern Station, Box 11, Hatties-
burg, Mississippi, for undergraduate application materials.
2. Complete the application form, medical examination record, and obtain
the recommendation signatures on the form provided. Return these items to
the Director of Admissions before the deadline date of the quarter for which
you are applying.
3. Furnish your high school principal with the transcript request form in
order that he may release your hiffh school transcript to the Director of Admis-
sions (a partial transcript should be mailed showing your work completed
through the first semester of your senior high school year with a supplementary
transcript mailed after you have graduated). If you are applying for admission
as a transfer student you must reauest the registrar at each college or university
oreviously attended to furnish the Director of Admissions with a transcriot
of your credits. An official transcript must be submitted from each college or
university attended even though all of your credits may be posted to the
transcript at the last institution attended.
39
General Information
4. Scores from the American College Test must be received before action
can be taken on your application. The ACT information sheet supplied with
the application materials furnishes the dates and places of testing and test
registration instructions.
5. All credentials must be received by the Director of Admissions showing
a postmark no later than midnight of the final day for submitting applications.
The application deadline dates are listed in the Calendar at the front of this
bulletin.
6. The University of Southern Mississippi does not discriminate on
grounds of race, color, or national origin.
ORIENTATION AND COUNSELING SERVICES
Orientation and counseling services for students begin even before the
academic year begins with special summer sessions for those who expect to
entei- the University in the fall quarter. The summer programs give entering
students the opportunity, working informally with trained counselors, to see
the campus and meet many of the administrative officers and faculty, appraise
their own academic aptitudes and skills, explore their personal interests as
they relate to educational and vocational goals, learn about possible career-
related degree programs and majors, and plan their work and schedules for
the fall quarter. For information regarding these summer orientation and
counseling programs write to:
Director of Student Counseling
Southern Station, Box 75, Hattiesburg, Mississippi.
Orientation continues for new students, both freshman and transfer, with
a concentrated program immediately preceding fall quarter registration (see
the Calendar), when student leaders join the faculty in introducing new students
to campus life.
Academic Advisement: Freshman and sophomore students enrolled in the
Basic College are assigned academic advisers by the Dean of the Basic College.
These advisers work closely with the Director of Student Counseling. Students
pursuing pre-professional curricula have special advisers whose interests and
training equip them to give appropriate guidance in course selection. When
the student transfers from the Basic College to a degree-granting college,
school, or division his academic advisement becomes the responsibility of the
chairman of the department in which the student plans to major. The depart-
ment chairman may designate another member of the department faculty to
advise any particular student.
Office of Student Counseling: The Office of Student Counseling is ready to
assist any student in educational, vocational, and personal matters. This office
coordinates campus testing services and administers such diagnostic, psychologi-
cal, aptitude and vocational tests as may be needed for practical counseling.
This office also makes available to students a selected library of occupational,
educational, and personal-adjustment materials. Offices within the respons-
ibility of the Dean of Student Affairs, such as the Dean of Men and the Dean
of Women, work closely with the Office of Student Counseling where special-
ized assistance is required.
Remedial Services: When diagnostic testing and the student's academic
record indicate the need for remedial work, the University offers unusual
facilities for special help. Most of these special services are described under
the School of Education and Psychology.
THE STUDENT COMMU NITY:
CAMPUS LIFE AND ACTIVITIES
LIVING ACCOMMODATIONS
Students not living in their homes should arrange to live on the campus.
Reservations may be made by sending $15.00 to the Director of Housing. Students
who wish to room together should indicate such information on their reserva-
40
Housing
tion request. Room reservations are accepted subject to the approval of applica-
tion for admission to the University. Students already living in the dormitory
rooms will be given until May 1 to make reservations. After that date, space is
reserved in the order in which applications are received. Room assignments are
mailed about a month before the quarter begins. ROOM DEPOSIT WILL BE RE-
FUNDED IF RESERVATION IS CANCELED TEN DAYS PRIOR TO THE
OPENING OF THE QUARTER FOR WHICH THE RESERVATION IS MADE.
A student accepting a room in a residence hall will be financially obligated
in accordance with the housing contract. A refund of unused room rent will be
made only in accordance with the housing contract. Upon admission to the resi-
dence hall the student will contribute to the "Dorm Fund" which is used to
maintain a TV, pay for Homecoming decorations, courtesies, etc.
Rooms are equipped with the following furniture: single beds with com-
fortable innerspring mattresses, a dresser or a chest of drawers, chairs, and
study tables. Students must furnish all linens, bed coverings, pillows, and cur-
tains. All dormitories are air-conditioned or equipped with an air-ventilating
system. All University buildings (classroom, dormitory, administration, and
apartment) are subject to periodic safety inspections.
Lodging in the fraternity houses is available to fraternity members. Ar-
rangements are made directly with the presidents of the fraternities. The
fraternity presidents will furnish the Director of Housing with official lists of
students living in their houses each quarter.
Pine Haven Apartments, consisting of 296 one, two, and three-bedroom,
unfurnished units, are available on the campus for faculty and married students.
A $15.00 deposit is required at the time of application and is refundable if the
request is canceled thirty (30) days prior to the date for which the application
was made.
Two new off-campus dormitories are now open. Elam Arms, a dormitory
for men, is located on Hardy Street at the southern boundary of the campus
across from the Fine Arts Building. A dormitory for women, Hillcrest, is
located at the northern boundary of the campus alongside US Highway 49.
These two facilities represent the latest and finest developments in dormitory
construction and furnishings; they are approved by the University, and are
available to all students without regard to academic classification. Descriptive
brochures are available through the University Housing Office. These two
privately financed dormitories have their own dining facilities.
Freshmen are required to live on campus, or in the approved off-campus
dormitories, if they are not living at home or with relatives. Upperclass women
students are required to live either on-camous or in approved off-campus
dormitories. Sorority members are expected to live in the Panhellenic Dormitory.
Upperclass men students are required to live in on-campus dormitories, ap-
proved off-campus dormitories, fraternity houses, or approved private housing.
The University maintains a list of approved private housing; and it is the
responsibility of the student to determine that the facility he occupies is on the
University's approved list.
The above restrictions on housing are not applicable to married students or
graduate students.
Assistance in securing off-campus housing may be obtained through the
Housing Office. Behavior of students permitted to live off campus must be such
that they are acceptable citizens of the community.
The dormitory lobbies which serve as social and recreational centers are
supplemented by the R. C. Cook University Union Building. This building
contains a lounge, a gameroom, a ballroom, a television lounge, the University
photograph service, offices for religious organizations and student government,
and meeting rooms for other organizations, as well as five guest rooms, which are
rented at a nominal fee to parents and other visitors to the campus. Students use
the facilities of the University Union Building for games, music, enjoyment,
social and religious activities, and other cultural and recreational purposes.
4 t
General Information
Private dining rooms in the University Commons may be used by clubs and
organizations for banquets, dinners, and teas.
The University Commons serves well-planned, attractive meals at moderate
prices. Special diets may be arranged at a small extra charge.
HEALTH AND SAFETY SERVICES
The health and safety record of the University is an enviable one. The health
education program, which aims at teaching each person how to assume responsi-
bility for safeguarding his health, is supplemented by the health services
which the University offers.
A medical examination blank is given the student at the time he applies
for admission to the University. The student should have the medical examina-
tion done by his family physician and should return the completed medical
examination form to the University along with his application for admission. It
is urged that any defects noted in the examination be corrected prior to the
beginning of the session in which the student will enroll. The University re-
serves the right to require a medical examination of any student at any time.
No student's admission is complete without a medical examination.
The University Clinic is a well-equipped infirmary in which the ordinary
illnesses occurring during the University year, but not during the vacation or
recess periods, are cared for by the University physician and nurses. Students
with more serious illnesses or injuries, or those in need of immediate surgery,
are referred to the regular hospitals in Hattiesburg. Such serious illnesses, in-
juries, and operations, together with hospital and medical care in private hos-
pitals, can not be the responsibility of the University. The Clinic services are
available only to full-time students.
The University physician has regular office hours for free consultation with
students. A nurse is on duty twenty-four hours a day.
AUTOMOBILES ON CAMPUS
Students and employees of the University are required to register with the
Department of Safety automobiles which are operated on the campus. Tempo-
rary permits are issued when the automobile is to be on the campus less than
seven days. Parking zones have been established along with other regulations.
A pamphlet, which outlines Traffic and Parking Regulations, may be secured
from the Department of Safety. Fines are assessed for violation of regulations
and persistent violators are denied the privilege of operating an automobile on
campus. A policy showing minimum liability insurance (5-10-5) required by
Mississippi state law must be presented at the time of registration.
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
STUDENT GOVERNMENT
The functions of the Student Government Association composed of all
registered resident students at The University of Southern Mississippi are "to
insure a continuous exchange of ideas and opinions between the students and
the administration, to secure valuable training and experience in democratic
self-government, to assume the fullest powers and responsibilities of self-
government consistent with the constitution and laws of the State of Mississippi
and the policies of the president of this institution, to promote the general
student welfare, and to protect the herein enumerated rights of students."
There are three branches of student government: the legislative, the execu-
tive, and the iudicial. The executive officers and the members of the legislative
branch, the Student Senate, are elected by direct vote of the students. The
justices of the Student Court are appointed by the President of Student Gov-
ernment subject to approval by the Student Senate.
4X
Organizations
Many functions of student government are carried out by standing com-
mittees, chief of which are the Committee on Social Life, the Elections Com-
mittee, and the Executive Committee.
The local government unit in each dormitory is called the Dormitory Coun-
cil. Councils are coordinated by the Men's Affairs Board and Women's Affairs
Board. These units regulate all matters relating to dormitory life.
STUDENT PUBLICATIONS
THE STUDENT PRINTZ, winner of many national awards, is the Univer-
sity newspaper published semi-weekly by a staff of students under the direction
of faculty advisers. THE SOUTHERNER is a yearly publication, published by a
student staff under the direction of a faculty adviser. The DRAWL, a handbook
for students, is published by the Student Government Association. The TELE-
PHONE DIRECTORY, published by the University Union, a student staff, and
an adviser, gives a complete list of telephone numbers and mail addresses of
students, faculty, and staff of the University, together with a buying guide of
the Hattiesburg and Gulf Coast areas.
RELIGIOUS LIFE
The University of Southern Mississippi is a state supported school and is
entirely non-sectarian. Religious life is encouraged, and every effort is made to
cooperate with local churcnes. The Student Christian Federation unifies the
activities of all religious groups on the campus. Its executive council is composed
of two elected representatives of the student body, who serve as chairman and
vice chairman, five appointed officers, and a representative from each active
religious organization. The Student Christian Federation seeks to provide
channels for worship and religious development. It sponsors the all-campus
Religious Emphasis Programs, a Thanksgiving Service, an Easter Sunrise
Service, and an annual Christmas Tree Lighting.
The Wesley Foundation, the Baptist Student Union, the Westminster Fel-
lowship, the Newman Club, the Canterbury Club, the Martin Luther Fellow-
ship and the Christian Church Group are among the organized and active student
denominational groups.
The Danforth Chapel is a place of prayer and meditation for all.
ORGANIZATIONS
General Honor Societies — There are five general honor societies on the
campus. A general honor society is an association that receives into member-
ship individuals who have achieved high scholarship and who fulfill such
additional requirements of distinction in some broad field of education and
culture or in general leadership as the society has established. Pi Kappa Pi is
a national honorary society composed of men and women who have made grades
of A on seventy per cent of their work while earning ninety consecutive
quarter hours of credit. Membership in Pi Kappa Pi is the highest recognition
for scholarship accorded at the University. Omicron Delta Kappa is a national
honorary leadership society, membership in which is the highest recognition
accorded men students of the University. Phi Eta Sigma is a national society
which aims to encourage and reward high scholastic attainment among freshman
men. Phi Delta Rho is a local honorary leadershio society, membership in which
is the highest recognition accorded women students of the University. Alpha
Lambda Delta is a national society which aims to encourage and reward high
scholastic attainment among freshman women.
Academic Honor Societies — Other national honorary or professional organi-
zations having chapters on the campus include Alpha Epsilon Alpha (account-
ing), Alpha Epsilon Delta (pre-medical), Alpha Psi Omega (dramatics), Ameri-
43
General Information
can Chemical Society Student Affiliate, Beta Beta Beta (biology), Delta Sigma
Pi (business), Home Economics Club, Iota Lambda Sigma (industrial arts)
Kappa Delta Pi (education), Kappa Kappa Psi (band), Kappa Mu Epsilon
(mathematics) , Kappa Omicron Phi (home economics) , Kappa Pi (art) , Lambda
Iota Tau (literature), Mu Phi Epsilon (music), Phi Alpha Theta (history), PJii
Delta Kappa (education), Phi Mu Alpha Sinfonia (music), Pi Gamma Mu
(social studies), Pi Kappa Delta (forensics), Pi Omega Pi (business education),
Pi Sigma Epsilon (marketing), Sigma Alpha Eta (speech therapy), Tau Beta
Sigma (band), Omicron Delta Epsilon (economics), Psi Chi (psychology).
Other Honorary and Academic Organizations— Other organizations among
the students include Alpha Phi Omega, Circle K Club, Collegiate Civitan Club,
4-H Club, Geology Club, German Club, Graduate Club, International Relations
Club, Le Cercle Francais, "M" Club, Pan American Students Association,
Physics Club, Pi Tau Chi (religious honorary), Recreation Club, Scabbard and
Blade Society, Student National Education Association, Women's Physical Edu-
cation Club, Yellow jackets. The Druids Society is for sophomore women.
Dramatic, Musical and Other Performing Groups — The University's pre-
eminence in the fine arts fields of theatre and music is reflected in the prominent
role of student performing groups. The Debate Squad and the University's own
radio station also encourage student performance.
THE SOUTHERN PLAYERS, open to all students of the University, is the
campus dramatic organization which serves as a vehicle for Department of
Theatre productions.
THE CHORAL UNION, composed of students from the entire University,
meets one evening a week to perform the great works in choral literature, both
sacred and secular.
THE OPERA WORKSHOP, open to all students of the University, performs
many works of musico -dramatic interest during the year.
THE UNIVERSITY SINGERS, auditions for which are held during the first
week of each quarter, give numerous concerts and tours. There is usually a
waiting list of applicants for membership. Within the UNIVERSITY SINGERS
are a number of smaller ensembles, such as the Madrigal Singers and various
male and female groups.
The University's bands and orchestras have an outstanding record of service
to the University and the State.
THE CONCERT BAND, which gives several formal concerts each year, is
made up of selected student musicians.
THE DIXIE DARLINGS, drawn from the University's best girl dancers,
are as well known as the Marching Band to national television audiences.
THE HIGHLANDERS are a marching group of bagpipers, drummers,
singers, and dancers, who provide unique embellishment to programs both on
and off the campus.
THE MARCHING BAND, open to any regularly enrolled student, has en-
hanced the dignity and reputation of the University at many nationally televised
events.
THE R.O.T.C. BAND is an important part of the R.O.T.C. program.
THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN MISSISSIPPI SYMPHONY, open to
all students of the University and including members of the faculty also, gives
a number of concerts each year in addition to assisting with oratorios and operas.
THE VARSITY BAND serves as a laboratory band for student composers
and conductors.
THE WIND AND PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE retains the basic instrumenta-
tion of a symphonic band, although in almost every instance using only one
player per part.
44
Organizations
Scholarships in all these musical groups are available to talented students.
Auditions may be arranged through the Dean of the School of Fine Arts.
The University's Debate Squad, recognized as one of the nation's best, is
open to all students.
WMSU, the University's own radio station, is an affiliate of NBC. The award-
winning station encourages participation by any interested student regardless
of major.
Social Fraternities — Eight social fraternities hold membership in the In-
terfraternity Council of the University. They are Acacia, Alpha Tau Omega,
Kappa Alpha, Kappa Sigma, Pi Kappa Alpha, Phi Kappa Tau, Sigma
Alpha Epsilon, and Sigma Phi Epsilon. Each fraternity has a house on the
campus.
Social Sororities — Eight social sororities hold membership in the Pan-
hellenic Council of the University. They are Alpha Sigma Alpha, Chi Omega,
Delta Delta Delta, Delta Zeta, Kappa Delta, Phi Mu, Pi Beta Phi, and Sigma
Sigma Sigma.
ATHLETICS
The University of Southern Mississippi is a member of the National Colle-
giate Athletic Association.
Intercollegiate sports are football, basketball, baseball, tennis, and golf.
Seasonal intramural sports under the supervision of personnel from the
Department of Health, Physical Education, and Recreation give every student
an opportunity to take part in competition. Among the sports included on
the program are tennis, golf, water sports, touch football, basketball, softball,
table tennis, badminton, volleyball, horseshoes, handball, track, and swimming.
The University golf course, tennis courts, swimming pool, playgrounds, and
gymnasium facilities are available to all students.
R. C. COOK UNIVERSITY UNION
The center of student activities at the University of Southern Mississippi
is the R. C. Cook University Union, which houses many of the student organiza-
tion offices as well as offices of the Alumni Association.
Operating from the Union is the University Information Center, which
serves as a locating service for students twenty-four hours a day. The Union
building is open from 7:30 A.M. to 10:30 P.M. daily.
The Union provides for University students a complete program of activities
planned and promoted through the University Activities Council.
The University Activities Council is made up of representatives from each
campus organization. UAC activities include bi-weekly movies, dances, parties,
an annual Halloween Carnival, Welcome Dance, Charity Month, Campus Pac
Distribution, and the sponsorship of "big name" entertainment.
The University Union, with its air-conditioned facilities, also serves as a
conference and workshop center for the campus during the Summer Quarter.
45
General Information
STUDENT EXPENSES
A primary objective of the University is to hold to a minimum the expense
of its students. Changes in fees are made, whenever possible, to benefit the
students. Increases are made only when reauired for support of the institution
or improvement of the activity program of the students.
Announcements concerning fees and expenses are subject to change with-
out notice and may not be regarded as binding obligations of the University.
Fees and expenses are in the form of incidental fees, room and board, and
special fees.
INCIDENTAL FEE. This fee is used for general support of the University
and consists of charges for matriculation, library, textbook service, athletic
activities, health service, University Union, University newspaper, laboratory,
concert series, maintenance, etc. Athletic activities, health service and news-
paper are not included for students taking less than 12 hours.
Textbooks, except for textbooks in Foreign Language courses and certain
other courses, are provided on a loan basis to all undergraduate students.
Clinical and hospital services covered by the health service charge in-
cluded in the incidental fee are limited to cases of ordinary illness. Services
are provided within the limits of the professional, technical, and physical
resources of the clinic. The University does not assume responsibility in cases
of extended illness or for treatment of chronic diseases. Cases requiring
surgery must be handled by a physician and hospital of the student's choice.
ROOM AND BOARD. These fees are assessed for all students living in
University-controlled housing. The room and board fees are assessed for all
students living in fraternity houses. All students rooming in dormitories or
fraternity houses are required to take their meals in the University Commons.
A room deposit of $15.00 is payable in advance for the reservation of
space in the dormitories. This amount is held as a breakage deposit until a
student withdraws from the dormitory.
A student accepting dormitory space will be financially obligated in
accordance with the housing contract. A refund of the dormitory fee will
be made only in accordance with the housing contract.
No reduction in room and board expenses is made for absence of less
than two continuous weeks, and then only when the absence is necessary
and is reported to the business office in advance.
OTHER FEE INFORMATION. Fees of all students are due and payable
at time of registration; however, fees of students taking 12 quarter hours
or more may be paid one -half upon entrance and the balance one week
prior to the beginning of the second half of the quarter.
Transcripts of credits will not be issued for students whose accounts are
delinquent.
Students enrolled for more than 18 quarter hours will be assessed an
additional $8.00 per quarter hour for each hour in excess of 18.
Students who are permitted to register for correspondence courses in
residence will be charged a fee of $6.00 per quarter hour.
A fee of $2.00 is assessed each quarter to students taking 12 hours or
more for operation of the University Union. A $1.00 fee is added to the
incidental fee assessment of students taking less than 12 quarter hours.
Courses requiring special fees and music fees are shown in the Special
Fee listing (Table II).
A fee of $6.50 for the Southerner (University annual) is payable on
entrance the fall quarter by all undergraduate students taking 12 hours or
more.
NON-RESIDENT STATUS. The Board of Trustees of State Institutions
of Higher Learning of the State of Mississippi has adopted the following
regulations concerning non-resident status:
4 6
Student Expenses and Financial Aid
The application of a non-resident of the State of Mississippi may be
considered or not at the option of the executive head of the institution, as
has heretofore been the prerogative of each institution. For the purpose of
this by-law and all other purposes, the definitions and conditions governing
the resident status of applicants for admission to any of the institutions shall
be as follows:
a. Residence of a minor. The residence of a person less than twenty -one
(21) years of age is that of the father. After the death of the father, the
residence of the minor is that of the mother. If the parents are divorced, the
residence of the minor is that of the parent who was granted custody by the
court; or, if custody was not granted, the residence continues to be that of
the father. If both parents are dead, the residence of the minor is that of
the last surviving parent at the time of that parent's death, unless the minor
lives with a guardian of his person, in which case his residence becomes
that of the guardian.
b. Residence of an adult. The residence of an adult is that place where
he is domiciled; that is, the place where he actually physically resides with
the intention of remaining there indefinitely or of returning there permanently
when temporarily absent. He is a non-resident if he reaches adulthood while
residing in another state, even if he was born in Mississippi.
c. Removal of parents from Mississippi. If the parents of a minor who is
enrolled as a student in an institution of higher learning move their legal
residence to another state, the minor is immediately classified as a non-
resident student.
d. Twelve months of residence required. No student may be admitted to
any institution of higher learning as a resident of Mississippi unless his
residence, as defined hereinabove, has been in the State of Mississippi for a
continuous period of at least twelve months immediately preceding his ad-
mission.
e. Residence in an educational institution not counted. A person who has
entered the state of Mississippi from another state and enters an educational
institution within twelve months is considered a non-resident. For this reason,
any period of time when such a person is enrolled in any educational institu-
tion in Mississippi may not be counted as any part of the twelve (12) months
prerequisite to his admission to an institution of higher learning as a resident
student. Even though he may have been legally adopted by a resident of
Mississippi, may have been a qualified voter, or may otherwise have sought
to establish legal residence, such a person will still be considered as being a
non-resident of Mississippi if he has entered this state for the purpose of
enrolling in an educational institution.
f . Residence status of a married woman. A married woman may claim the
residence status of her husband; or she may claim independent residence status
under the same regulations, set forth above, as any other adult.
g. Children of parents who are employed by Institutions of Higher Learn-
ing. Children of parents who are members of the faculty or staff of any
institution under the jurisdiction of the Board of Trustees may be classified
as residents during the time that their parents are such members without re-
gard to the residence requirement of twelve (12) months, for the purpose of
attendance at institutions where their parents are faculty and staff members.
REFUND POLICY. A student who officially withdraws after enrollment
may obtain a refund in accordance with the following:
a. A refund of 90% of incidental and special fees paid will be made to a
student who withdraws within eight (8) days following the last calendar day
of registration.
b. A student taking 12 hours or more who withdraws for any reason
prior to midterm of any quarter but following eight (8) days after the last
calendar day of registration will be refunded 50% of the incidental and
special fees.
47
General Information
c. A student taking 12 hours or more who withdraws after midterm of any
quarter will not be entitled to a refund of fees.
d. A student taking less than 12 hours of course work will not be entitled
to a refund of fees after eight (8) days from the last calendar day of reg-
istration.
e. A student enrolled for evening classes will receive no refund unless
withdrawal is made prior to the second meeting of the class.
f. No adiustment of incidental and special fees will be made when courses
are dropped after eight (8) days from date of registration.
g. Room and board fees are refunded on the basis of full weeks remaining
in the quarter.
TABLE I
EXPENSES EACH QUARTER
STUDENT ENROLLED FOR MORE THAN TWELVE HOURS*
Fixed Fees
Incidental fee $ 93.00
Room rent — air-conditioned dormitory 69.00
Room rent — other dormitory 54.00
Board 75.00
Other Fees When Applicable
Non-resident fee —
Student enrolling prior to September 1, 1962 $ 83.33
Student enrolling after September 1, 1962 100.00
The Southerner (fall quarter only) 6.50
Post Office box, per quarter (when applicable) 1.00
STUDENT ENROLLED FOR LESS THAN TWELVE HOURS
Incidental fee each quarter hour** $ 8.00
Non-resident fee each quarter hour
Student enrolling prior to September 1, 1962 7.00
Student enrolling after September 1, 1962 8.50
Non-resident fee — P.L. 16, 894, and 87-815 veterans as follows:
Enrolled Enrolled
prior to after
9-1-62 9-1-62
Full load (over 12 hours) $ 83.33 $100.00
3/ 4 load (9-11 hours) 62.50 75.00
y 2 load (6-8 hours) 41.66 50.00
y 4 load (1-5 hours) 20.83 25.00
♦Students enrolled for more than 18 hours will be assessed $8.00 for each additional
quarter hour. (Students training under Veterans Administration programs on the un-
dergraduate level are required by the Veterans Administration to carry a minimum of
fourteen quarter hours for the entire quarter to receive full subsistence.)
**A fee of $1.00 a quarter is added for operation of the University Union when this
fee is assessed.
TABLE II
SPECIAL FEES AND EXPENSES
Departmental Fees:
Elementary Education 480, 482, each $ 20.00 per course
Home Economics Education 481, 482, 485, 486, each . . 10.00 per course
Special Education 480, 481, each 20.00 per course
Library Science 489 10.00 per course
Secondary Education 481A, B, G, H, I, J, K, L, M,
N, P, R, S, V, each 20.00 per course
48
Student Expenses and financial Aid
Music Fees — Private Lessons for other than full-time music majors:
1 quarter hour per instructor $ 19.00 per quarter
2 quarter hours per instructor 36.00 per quarter
3 quarter hours per instructor 53.00 per quarter
Each additional supervised lesson 17.00 per quarter
Orchestral or Band Instrument rental* 6.00 per quarter
Summer Conferences and Workshops:**
Administrators Workshop
Aviation Education Workshop
Library Science Workshop
Reading Conference
School Lunch Managers Workshop
Summer Music Camp
Reading Clinic, Individual Remedial Instructions:
Special Students (non-credit) $ 20.00 per 4-week period
Complete Reading Diagnosis 20.00 with written report
Re-evaluation 5.00
Speech and Hearing Clinic Services:
Audiometric pure tone test $ 5.00
Diagnostic hearing evaluation 10.00
Hearing aid evaluation 15.00
Hearing evaluation for medical-legal compensation claims 25.00
Diagnostic speech evaluation 10.00
Speech or Hearing Therapy fees per session 2.00
Therapy fees for University students per quarter 5.00
Examinations and Graduation:
Revalidation Examination $ 5.00 when applicable
Special Examination 3.00 when applicable
Graduation fee — Bachelor and Master $ 12.00 with application for degree
Graduation fee — Doctoral 80.00 with application for degree
Certificate 2.50 when applicable
National Teacher Examination
(Education majors) 11.00
Late application 14.00
Thesis binding, not to exceed 12.00 when applicable
Thesis preparation, not to exceed 75.00 when applicable
Continuing Education:
Resident Center 8.00 per quarter hour
Resident Center — laboratory fee 6.00 per course
Resident Center — typing fee 5.00 per course
Extension Center 8.00 per quarter hour
Correspondence Courses 6.00 per quarter hour
High School by correspondence 20.00 per half unit
Registration and Records:
American College Test 5.00 when applicable
Change of Schedule 5.00 when applicable
Audit Fee (Non-Credit)*** 4.00 per quarter hour
""This fee applies to music majors and minors as well as to other students.
**T he ^ fe J es , for the above conferences and workshops will be listed in the brochures
published for each conference. The conference and workshop fees do not include the
$8.00 per quarter hour assessment for incidental fee where college credit is desired, nor
do they include the conference charge for room and board.
*** Audit fee for an activity course is charged at the full rate of $8.00 per quarter hour
for the number of quarter hours applicable to the course.
49
General Information
Late Registration 10.00 full load
5.00 partial load
Application Fee for Foreign Students
(Non-refundable) 10.00 with application
Memorandum of credits .50 when applicable
Transcript of Credits 1.00 when applicable
R.O.T.C. deposit (Unused portion refundable upon
proper clearance) 10.00 upon entrance
fall quarter
Science Breakage 5.00 per card
Card is purchased in business office before attending first laboratory
meeting. Any balance on card upon completion of course is refundable.
STUDENT AID AND SCHOLARSHIPS
The following information is a summary of the student aid and scholarship
program. For further information and application forms, write to Director of
Student Aid and Scholarships, Box 7, Southern Station, Hattiesburg, Mississippi.
APPLICATIONS. All applicants for student aid of any type must have
been accepted for admission at the University before assistance can be granted.
This does not preclude the submission of an application for assistance at the
time application for admission to the University is made. Applications should
be made before June 1st with one exception. Entering freshmen must apply
by May 1.
WORK SCHOLARSHIPS. Work scholarships vary in value with the type
of work assigned. Students work from ten to fifteen hours per week. Awards
are made during the month of July.
WORK IN TOWN. Work in town is available to many students. Students
making application are referred as requests are received from employers.
MERIT SCHOLARSHIPS. Merit Scholarships, based on scholarly ability,
are available in all fields of study. They range in value from $100.00 to $500.00
for the nine months. Students who have demonstrated outstanding ability in
any particular field of study are encouraged to apply for one of these scholar-
ships.
REGIONAL MERIT SCHOLARSHIPS. Regional Merit Scholarships are
awarded to students of exceptional ability whose residence is outside the State
of Mississippi. These scholarships are valued at $300.00 for the nine months.
SERVICE SCHOLARSHIPS. Service Scholarships are based on skill and
ability. These scholarships are available in Band and Music as well as in
Athletics and range in value from $100.00 to over $500.00 for the nine months.
LOAN PROGRAMS. Many loan programs, both short-term and long-term,
are available to the student who desires to make use of them. The University
administers several long-term funds such as the National Defense Student
Loan Fund and the United Student Aid Funds Loan Program. Information
concerning privately administered programs may be obtained by writing the
Director of Student Aid and Scholarships.
UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN MISSISSIPPI FOUNDATION
The University of Southern Mississippi Foundation is a Mississippi cor-
poration whose sole purpose is to receive and manage gifts, contributions, and
donations to the University of Southern Mississippi for educational purposes.
It provides a centralized receptacle for receiving gifts of any nature to the
University, handling these in a manner prescribed by the donor or in accord-
ance with good business judgment and making the gifts work for the growth
and development of Southern. The Foundation is managed by a Board of Di-
rectors composed of former students and friends of the University.
5°
Student Expenses and Financial Aid
The Foundation Charter was so drawn that assistance could be given to any
area of development at Southern so long as it is used for educational purposes.
Some of the long-range plans include: sponsoring research, sponsoring faculty
chairs, supplementing fpoultv salaries, aiding the library, providing special
equipment, making possible achievement awards for faculty and students, pro-
viding fellowships and scholarships, and contributing to the building of the
physical plant.
During the earlv years of the Foundation, emphasis will be placed on se-
curing scholarship funds. This is con c idered to be one of the greatest needs at
the present time. The Foundation solicits the funds, but the awards are made
by the University Scholarship Committee.
SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE THROUGH THE FOUNDATION
Kathy Brown — Sponsored by Pen and Sword, certain priorities.
Bush Dairy, Inc. — South Mississippi students, economic need, Business or Home
Economics.
Century Club — scholarships for athletics.
Coast Federal Savings and Loan Association, Gulfport — Gulfport area student
Business
Crown Zellerbach Foundation — merit to Junior or Senior students.
Distinguished Professor Award — Presented in the name of the Distinguished
Professor of the Year in the same discipline.
Doyle Coats — Sponsored by the Marion County Alumni Chapter for a capable
and deserving Marion County student.
W. R. Fairchild Construction Company — capable and deserving student from
Covington or Forrest County.
First Federal Savings and Loan Association, Hattiesburg — Economics or Fi-
nance.
First National Bank of Laurel — awarded to a resident of Covington, Jasper,
Jones, Perry, Smith, or Wayne County.
Crystelle Ford — Sponsored by the Marion County Alumni Chapter for a capable
and deserving Marion County student.
Forrest County Alumni Chapter — Forrest County Students.
Bertha M. Fritzsche Graduate Fellowship — Outstanding student in Home Eco-
nomics.
Francis O. Fox — need and promise of success with preference to Jones County
students.
General Merit — any student is eligible on merit basis — several given.
Lester Haddox — worthy and promising student from Marion, Amite, Lincoln,
Pike, or Walthall County.
Hattiesburg Sales Executive Club — economic need, academic record, marketing
major
Hattiesburg Federal Savings and Loan Association — capable and deserving stu-
dent, given in memory of deceased directors.
Hercules Employees — capable and needy student.
W. B. Harlan Memorial — economic need, male student — Business Administra-
tion.
Alma Hickman — capable and needy student.
1956 Summer Class Heritage — capable and needy student.
1957 Spring Class Heritage — capable and needy student.
1958 Class Endowment — capable and needy student.
5 1
General Information
1959 Class Endowment — capable and needy student.
1960 Clas<= Endowment — capable and needy student.
1961 Class Endowment — capable and needy student.
1962 Claps Endowment — capable and needy student.
Scholarship Fund of the Sixties — capable and needy student.
Jones County Alumni Chapter — capable and deserving Jones County students
— preference given to Junior or Senior students.
Lamar County Alumni Chapter — capable and needy Lamar County student.
Sam Miller — capable and deserving student
Movie Star Corporation — capable and deserving student.
Music Merit — music majors on merit basis.
"M" Club Alumni Loan — loans for capable and needy children of former letter
winners at Southern.
Marvin D. Owen Memorial Scholarship — capable and deserving student.
Paint Research Institute — graduate fellowship in Chemistry.
Pan American Tung Research and Development League — graduate fellowships
in Chemistry.
Peck Oil Company — capable and deserving Forrest County student.
Pi Omega Pi — outstanding student in Business Education.
Positive Posture — sponsored by the Mississippi Malt Beverage Company for
two students from certain counties and cities of Mississippi.
Edward George Schmidt — Junior or Senior marketing major.
W. W. Stout Memorial— Creative student majoring in English.
Trojan Powder Company — graduate fellowships in Chemistry.
Visco Division, Nalco Chemical Company — economic need, Chemistry major
— four offered.
Paul Waldoff Memorial — Mississippian — economic need, Mathematics major.
Winn-Dixie Stores Foundation — Junior or Senior, residence and other require-
ments.
Yellowjackets — USM — entering freshmen, academic promise, five offered.
EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES
A number of students are employed by the University in secretarial and
clerical work and as laboratory assistants, library assistants, and assistants to
the dormitory hostesses. The purpose of this employment is primarily to assist
the student in earning a small part of his school expenses. Inquiries concerning
these work assignments should be addressed to the Director of Student Aid
and Scholarships. The University also maintains a service to assist students in
finding part-time employment in and near Hattiesburg. Students should re-
member, however, that their first business is to benefit by their University
programs. Usually a student who spends several hours a day earning money
must reduce his study load. Students should not expect to be able to earn a
considerable part of their expenses and at the same time carry a full academic
load. No student should plan a program that allows fewer than thirty hours
a week for study.
THE LATIN-AMERICAN INSTITUTE
The Latin-American Institute, which has operated successfully under Uni-
versity sponsorship since its founding here in 1947 by the late Colonel Melvin
G. Nydegger, is a vital part of the University. Each quarter, the Institute
offers a ten-week orientation course to non-English-speaking people, with
classes in the culture and customs of the United States, and in the English
language, including conversation, grammar, and composition. These courses
are attended by business and professional people and students from Latin
America and other countries who are accepted as international guests of the
University.
5*
Alumni Association
Students enrolled in The Latin-American Institute accept over 300 hours
of instruction during the ten -week period, using the latest teaching methods
and materials including teaching machines and programmed texts, tapes, audio-
visual aids, etc.
An examination to test the foreign student's proficiency in English is of-
fered through the Institute at specified dates during the year. Any foreign
student may take this examination by applying to the Institute two weeks in
advance of the specified date. There is a charge of one dollar each time the
examination is taken, but students enrolled in the Institute may take the
examination free for the first time.
Students interested in Inter-American affairs will find many opportuni-
ties for profitable study at the University of Southern Mississippi, with the
added advantage of the chance to mix with Latin-American students and prac-
tice speaking Spanish or Portugese. For further information, write to the Di-
rector, The Latin-American Institute.
UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN MISSISSIPPI ALUMNI ASSOCIATION
The Alumni Association has been in existence since 1917. During the early
years its chief function was related to placement service. Beginning with the
session of 1945-46, the organization experienced a rebirth. Recognizing the fact
that a working alumni association is vital to the development of the institu-
tion, the Executive Committee began the organization of alumni groups in the
various counties of the state. On July 1, 1953, a full-time executive secretary
was employed.
The Association publishes the ALUMNI NEWS magazine four times a
year. Active members of the Association receive all issues while four issues of
SOUTHERN NEWS AND VIEWS are mailed to all persons on record in the
Alumni Office. Graduates and former students are urged to become active
members of the organization and help support the program of activities that
is designed to assist the University in its growth and development.
The Alumni Association sponsored the drive to raise the funds necessary
for the construction of the R. C, Cook University Union Building. These funds
were secured from alumni, faculty, students, friends, and the other people of
Forrest County and the state.
Two meetings of the general association are held each fiscal year, the first
at the annual homecoming in the fall and the second at the Mississippi Educa-
tion convention in Jackson.
At the 1954 Homecoming meeting, the association voted to observe March 30
as University of Southern Mississippi Day. Former students of the University
are urged to get together on this date when two or more reside in the same
area. Organized chapters elect officers at this meeting. March 30 was selected
from the important dates in the history of the school because it was on this
day in 1910 that the Mississippi Legislature enacted legislation establishing the
institution.
The Alumni Association helped set up the University of Southern Missis-
sippi Foundation which is the receptacle for all gifts to Southern, which gifts
are, in turn, channeled into scholarships for the students.
LIBRARY
The new Joe Cook Memorial Library is a modern, two story building com-
pletely fire-proof and air-conditioned. Of modular construction, it is arranged
in four large divisional areas, each division containing its own current and
bound periodicals, classified books and other materials in the subject field.
Book stacks to accommodate 200,000 volumes and reading areas for 700 stu-
dents are intermingled throughout the library, with the book stacks open to
all. Special features are the study carrels, exhibit areas, a micro-reading area,
53
General Information
typing room, bibliography room, and a rare book room. The Library Science
Department is housed on the second floor of the building, as are the rooms con-
taining Mississippiana and archives. The new library was occupied at the be-
ginning of the Fall Quarter of 1960.
The library is open from Monday through Friday from 7:45 A.M. to 10:00
P.M., Saturday from 8:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M., and Sunday 6:00 P.M. to 9:00 P.M.
THE SAM WOODS COLLECTION
The Sam Woods Collection, a gift of the late Sam E. Woods, alumnus of
the University and a former consul general of Switzerland, is comprised of
paintings, large Flemish tapestries, antique furniture, and rare books. In the
collection are 230 paintings, including the Holy Family by Amigoni from the
Stennis Collection, a Murillo copy of the Holy Family from the Prado Gallery,
and many Rembrandt and Durer etchings and woodcuts, as well as oils and
water colors by contemporary German artists. They have been hung in the
president's home, the library, and other main buildings throughout the campus.
This collection of paintings is probably the largest in the state. Much of the
furniture is of the Renaissance period.
The very valuable collection of more than 1100 early printed and fine press
books includes several rare Bibles which have hand -carved bindings and
which are illustrated by Durer and other artists. The collection also includes
several atlases of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. Of special interest
are approximately fifty beautifully illuminated pages from incunabula, as well
as globes made before 1800 and maps of America and other countries made be-
fore 1700. This collection is housed in the Sam Woods Room in the library.
PLACEMENT BUREAU
The function of the Placement Bureau is dual in nature. It provides as-
sistance to graduating seniors, graduate students, and former students in ob-
taining suitable employment, and to employers in recruiting qualified employ-
ees. The services are provided at no cost to the student or to the employer.
Throughout the year, current listings of employment opportunities, both
in state and out of state, in teaching, business, industry, and government are
made available to the students. Also, on-campus interviews are scheduled
with personnel representatives from schools, businesses, industries, and gov-
ernmental agencies. Students registered with the Bureau are notified of these
interview schedules, and all who are interested are given the opportunity for
individual interviews.
All seniors should register with the Placement Bureau and establish a con-
fidential placement credential folder during the last quarter of their junior
year, or the first quarter of their senior year. These placement credentials are
very valuable to on-campus recruiters, and to those who telephone or write
for information about prospective employees. After graduation and/or when
the registrant has found suitable employment, the placement file is stored,
and may be quite helpful in later years if a registrant wishes to change em-
ployment or enter graduate school.
The Director of Placement is directly responsible to the office of the Presi-
dent of the University in the administration of the Bureau.
54
ACADEMIC ORGANIZATION
AND REQUIREMENTS
Organization Chart
Organization for Instruction
General Academic Regulations
Degree Requirements
55
Academic Organization
Organization Chart
56
Academic Requirements
A. ORGANIZATION FOR INSTRUCTION
The University of Southern Mississippi for purposes of undergraduate in-
struction is organized into the Basic College, the College of Arts and Sciences,
The School of Business Administration, the School of Education and Psy-
chology, the School of Fine Arts, the Division of Continuing Education, and
the Division of Home Economics. Except for the Basic College and the Division
of Continuing Education these are all degree-granting colleges, schools, and
divisions.
The entering freshman is admitted into the Basic College and remains
there until he is able to meet requirements for admission into one of the de-
gree-granting colleges, schools, or divisions. While in the Basic College, which
normally covers the freshman and sophomore years, the student takes courses
required in the common core curriculum (see Basic College) or an appropriate
pre -professional program. In addition, he may take some courses required by
the particular college, school, or division from which he plans to graduate. He
may also have room in his freshman and sophomore schedule to begin course
work toward a major or minor.
Transfer students may be admitted directly into the upper-level, degree-
granting college, school, or division provided they transfer the particular cur-
ricular prerequisites; otherwise, the transfer student is admitted to the Basic
College until he can meet requirements for admission to a degree-granting
college, school, or division.
The University of the Southern Mississippi grants the following baccalau-
reate degrees:
from the College of Arts and Sciences: (Possible majors are noted
under D below, and under
the Bachelor of Arts each department in the Col-
the Bachelor of Science leges, Schools, and Divisions
Section of this catalog.)
from the School of Business Administration: (Possible majors are noted
under D below, and under
the Bachelor of Science in each department in the Col-
Business Administration leges, Schools, and Divisions
Section of this catalog.)
from the School of Education and Psychology:
the Bachelor of Science "Professional" or teaching degree in
Elementary Education
Secondary Education (The student majors in a teaching area and
minors in secondary education.)
Special Areas
the Bachelor of Science non- teaching degree, with majors in
Architectural Drafting Psychology
Corrective Therapy Recreation
Industrial Arts Offioe Management
Library Science Executive Secretarial Studies
the Bachelor of Arts non-teaching degree, with majors in
Library Science Psychology
Note: The organization chart facing this page shows how the University is organized
into the various colleges, schools, and divisions. Three changes have been made
in the organization of the academic sector since the chart was drawn. The De-
partment of Office Administration, formerly under the School of Business Educa-
tion, has been moved to the School of Education and Psychology and retitled the
Department of Business Education. Under the College of Arts and Sciences, the
two "earth sciences" of Geography and Geology have been combined under one
administration with the title of Department of Geography and Geology. The De-
partment of Computer Science and Statistics has been added to the College of
Arts and Sciences.
57
Academic Requirements
from the School of Fine Arts:
the Bachelor of Fine Arts, with majors in Commercial Art; Drawing and
Painting; Theatre; Three Dimensional Design.
the Bachelor of Music, with majors in
Church Music
Music History and Literature
Organ
Piano
String Instruments
Theory and Composition
Voice
Wind Instruments
the Bachelor of Music Education, with majors in
General Supervision: voice or piano
Instrumental Supervision
the Bachelor of Arts with majors in Art or Theatre
from the Division of Home Economics:
the Bachelor of Science
(Possible majors are noted
under D below, and under
each department in the Col-
leges, Schools, and Divisions
Section of this catalog.)
To be eligible for any of these baccalaureate degrees, the student must
complete:
1. The Basic College core curriculum
2. Any additional curricular requirements of the particular college, school,
or division in which he will graduate
3. Requirements for a major or majors and a minor (if a minor is required)
4. Any other requirement specific for the chosen degree, or the major or minor
Specific requirements for major and minors are outlined under each de-
partment in the Colleges, Schools, and Divisions Section of this catalog.
Academic Programs Currently Offered
The baccalaureate or undergraduate degree may currently be earned in
any of the following areas of specialization. Graduate or post-baccalaureate
degree programs are detailed in the Graduate Bulletin.
College of Arts and Sciences
Audiology
Biology
Botany
Chemistry
Communications
Economics
English
Foreign Trade
French
Geography
Geology
German
History
Journalism
School of Business Administration
Accounting
Economics
Finance
General Business
Language Disorders
Mathematics
Microbiology
Philosophy
Physics
Political Science
Public Address
Radio -Tele vision
Religion and Philosophy
Sociology
Spanish
Speech and Hearing Sciences
Speech Pathology
Zoology
Industrial Management
Marketing
Personnel Management
5»
Academic Requirements
Industrial Arts
Language Disorders
Library Science
Office Management
Psychology
Recreation
Secondary Education
Special Education
Speech Pathology
Organ
Piano
String Instruments
Theatre
Theory-Composition
Voice
Wind Instruments
Three Dimensional Design
School of Education and Psychology
Architectural Drafting
Audiology
Business Education
Corrective Therapy
Elementary Education
Executive Secretarial Studies
General Science Education
General Speech Education
Health and Physical Education
School of Fine Arts
Applied Music
Art
Church Music
Commercial Art
Drawing and Painting
General Music Education
Instrumental Music Education
Music History and Literature
Division of Home Economics
Child Development
Clothing and Textiles
Clothing Merchandising
Food and Nutrition
General Home Economics
Home Economics Extension Service
Home Economics in Equipment
Institution Management — Commercial
Institution Management-— Dietetics
Teaching Home Economics Education
Obviously, many of these majors involve the closest cooperation among
the University's academic departments. A more detailed analysis of degree
programs, "majors" and "minors," is found under Section D of this part of
the catalog.
B. GENERAL ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
1. Quarter System: The University of Southern Mississippi is on the quar-
ter system which means that in one academic year, which begins with the
fall quarter and ends with the summer quarter, a student may earn four
quarters of credits. A normal quarter is eleven weeks in length and a quarter
hour (credit) represents one 60-minute class period per week (laboratory
periods are normally 120 minutes). To transpose semester hours to quarter
hours multiply the semester hours by one and one -half. Thus a three semester
hour course transfers as four and one-half quarter hours.
2. Penalties for Late Registration: Registration will continue after the close
of the scheduled registration period (see Calendar) for six class days. Beginning
at 8:00 A.M. on the seventh day of scheduled class work all registration will
cease for that quarter.
A late registration fee will be charged to all students registering after the
scheduled registration period. The fee is ten dollars ($10.00) for a load of nine
(9) quarter hours or more, and five dollars ($5.00) for a load of less than nine
hours.
The course load for which one can register will be reduced to twelve (12)
quarter hours beginning with the fourth day of scheduled class work. An ex-
59
Academic Requirements
ception to this regulation may be made by the appropriate dean. Students
registering for the second term of a quarter can not register for a full load
after the second day of the new term.
3. Change of Registration: A student who finds that he it not prepared for
a course for which he is registered may be allowed to withdraw from the
course on the recommendation of his adviser with the approval of the appropriate
academic dean. A student will not be permitted to withdraw from a course
after ten (10) class days. A fee of five dollars ($5.00) is charged for a change
in registration after the regular scheduled registration period (see Calendar).
4. Load of Work: The normal student load is twelve to eighteen quarter
hours. Students on the Dean's List or President's List will be permitted to
take twenty- one quarter hours during the next quarter of attendance.
Seniors may take twenty quarter hours during any one of their last three
quarters provided they made no grade lower than C during the previous
quarter.
Students who have maintained a place on the Dean's List or President's
List for each of the two preceding quarters of their residence may take up
to twenty-five (25) quarter hours of work during their next quarter of at-
tendance.
5. Absences: Students are expected to attend all classes each time the
classes meet. When it is necessary that a student be absent from a class, courtesy
requires an explanation to the instructor in charge. Some faculty members allow
no cuts (unexcused absences from class) while others may allow as many as
four in a four-hour course. In the event of sickness or other reasons beyond
the control of the student, a total of thirteen (13) absences in a four-hour course,
or the proportionate number of absences in a one, two, three, or five-hour
course may be allowed provided all work is made up. No credit may be re-
ceived in a course where the number of absences (regardless of the reason)
exceeds thirteen, or the equivalent as shown above. When students are absent
to represent the University, their professors are so notified by the Dean of the
University. When students are absent because of sickness or other acceptable
reason, their professors are so notified by the Dean of Men or the Dean of
Women. An absence on a day immediately preceding or following an official
holiday is considered as two absences.
6. Examinations: Examinations will be held on the last three days of each
quarter (see Calendar).
During each of the two terms of the summer quarter, the last regularly
scheduled meeting of a class will be used for examination purposes for that
term's courses.
No final examinations are permitted prior to the scheduled examination
period (see Calendar).
A student who is absent from the examination without valid reason an-
proved by the Dean of the University forfeits credit for the quarter. Students
will be charged a fee of $3.00 for special examinations unless excused by the
appropriate dean.
7. Grading System:
A — indicates very superior work and carries 4 quality points per quarter hour.
B — indicates excellent work and carries 3 quality points per quarter hour.
C — indicates average work and carries 2 quality points per quarter hour.
D — indicates inferior to average work and carries 1 quality point per quarter
hour.
E — indicates failure with condition. An E becomes an F if the condition is not
removed within the next twelve months, or. if the student is not in residence
during all of the next twelve months, within the next auarter of attendance
after the expiration of the 12-month period. An E grade can not be raised
higher than a D.
60
Academic Requirements
F — indicates failure without condition and carries no quality points. Quality
point averages are based on the number of hours undertaken rather than
the number of hours passed (except in the case of a course taken a second
time) in determining whether a student meets minimum standards. A student
dropping a course after the tenth day of scheduled classes will receive a
grade of F. A grade of F may not be removed by taking a correspondence
course without the approval of the dean of the appropriate school.
I — indicates an incomplete record. An I becomes an F if the work is not com-
pleted within the next twelve months, or, if the student is not in residence
during all of the next twelve month, within the next quarter of attendance
after the expiration of the twelve -month period. A grade of I may not be re-
moved by taking a correspondence course without the approval of the dean
of the appropriate school.
G — indicates withdrawal from a course passing. No student will be allowed to
withdraw from a course after ten scheduled class days except under unusual
circumstances approved by the appropriate dean.
H — indicates withdrawal from a course failing.
Y — indicates acceleration, because of proficiency, to a more advanced course.
P — indicates a passing grade in non-credit courses.
Note: A faculty regulation provides that except in cases of obvious clerical
error, a grade of A, B, C, D, or F may not be changed without permission given
by the faculty in regular meeting.
Dean's List: Students will be placed on the Dean's list if they have main-
tained a quality point ratio of 3.25 or above on an academic load of fifteen
quarter hours or more, provided they have no grade of D or below. Being on
tiie Dean's List carries with it certain privileges.
President's List: Students will be placed on the President's List if they
have earned a quality point ratio of 4.0 (all "A's") on a load of fifteen quarter
hours or more. Being on the President's List carries with it certain privileges.
8. Scholarship Standards: It is necessary that students maintain a reasonable
academic record. The following are the minimum scholastic standards for con-
tinuance as students at the University:
a. A student taking twelve hours or more must pass at least eight hours
and earn at least sixteen quality points. A student taking from eight to eleven
hours must pass at least one-half of his course load and earn as many quality
points as hours undertaken.
b. The first time a student does not meet the aforementioned standard,
he will be placed on academic probation. A student already on probation will be
suspended from the University for the next succeeding quarter if he does
not meet the above minimum scholastic standard. However, a student suspended
at the end of the spring quarter is suspended for the following fall quarter.
Students thus suspended following the spring quarter may earn reinstatement
for the fall quarter if they attend the summer quarter at the University of
Southern Mississippi and complete at least fifteen hours with a "C" average
or better.
c. A student receiving all 'TV' is subject to automatic suspension whether
or not he has previously been on probation. On withdrawing from the Uni-
versity, a student receiving "HV on more than one-half of the hours under-
taken is likewise subject to automatic suspension.
d. A student may remove himself from academic probation by:
(1) earning at least a "C" average on fifteen consecutive hours and (2) achiev-
ing an over-all "C" average on all work he has undertaken at the University of
Southern Mississippi. It should be emphasized that he must achieve both (1)
and (2).
e. A student suspended the second time for poor scholarship may not apply
for readmission until the expiration of at least one calendar year and presenta-
tion of a satisfactory record of work in an accredited college or university, or
6x
Academic Requirements
employment, or military service. No student may be readmitted after three
suspensions for poor scholarship.
9. Memorandum of Credits: A memorandum of credits is a statement avail-
able from the Office of the Registrar showing the courses completed and credits
earned bv the student as of the date of the memorandum. Memoranda are fifty
cents each, except that upon request of the student one cony of the cumulative
record will be supplied to the University of Southern Mississippi Placement
Bureau without charge.
10. Classification of Undergraduates: A student is ranked as a:
Freshman when he has less than 40 quarter hours of earned credit
Sophomore when he has as many as 40 hours and less than 90 hours
Junior when he has as many as 90 hours and less than 132 hours
Senior when he has 132 or more quarter hours of earned credit
Special student when he is not working toward a degree.
11. Course Numbering: Freshman courses are numbered from 100 to 199;
sophomore courses from 200 to 299; upper division courses from 300 to 499;
graduate courses 500 and above. Courses carrying numbers below 100 are non-
credit courses. Undergraduate courses approved for possible graduate credit
will carry the prefix G. Courses taken by extension will carry the prefix E;
and by correspondence, C.
Freshman and sophomore students are not ordinarily permitted to register
for upper division courses.
12. Course Sequences and Related Sequences: Certain 100 and 200-level
courses may not be taken for credit by a student after he has completed higher
level courses in the same subject area. Also, certain sequences of courses may
not be taken for credit after a student has completed parallel courses which are
similar in subject matter. Specific applications of this policy are indicated in
the numbered course descriptions in the Colleges, Schools and Division Sec-
tion of this catalog. Selection of the courses, as well as exceptions to the
policy, are left to the department chairmen.
C. GENERAL DEGREE REQUIREMENTS
1. Choice of Catalog: Graduation requirements must be met under a catalog
which is not more than six years old at the time of the student's graduation
and which carries announcements for a year during which the student earned
some credit at the University of Southern Mississippi. A transfer student from
a Mississippi junior college may graduate under a catalog which was in force
during the time he attended a Mississippi junior college provided the catalog
is not more than six years old at the time of the student's graduation.
2. Hour Requirements: An applicant for a degree must complete 192 quarter
hours, including core requirements and major and minor requirements. Nc
more than six quarter hours of practical music (chorus, band, or orchestra) may
be counted toward this total except by students who are majoring in music.
Not more than twelve quarter hours in physical education activity courses,
and not more than four quarter hours credit in any one varsity sport may be
used in meeting total hour requirements for a degree. Of the total of 192
quarter hours, 96 must be earned in a senior college.
3. Quality Point Requirement: A student must earn a quality point ratio of
at least 2.0 (an average grade of "C") based on all courses undertaken at the
University of Southern Mississiopi. Grades in correspondence courses, extension
courses, and off-campus workshops do not carry quality points. In the case of
off-campus workshops this regulation became effective as of September, 1950.
4. Hour and Quality Point Requirements for Pre-Professional Degrees:
University of Southern Mississippi students may be allowed to complete degree
requirements for the Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Arts degrees in pro-
6x
Academic Requirements
fessional schools of medicine, medical technology, dentistry, or law on the fol-
lowing conditions:
(a) that 140 hours of credit and 280 quality points shall have been com-
pleted, with a minimum of three quarters and 48 quarter hours of
residence at the University of Southern Mississippi.
(b) that all core requirements for the degree shall have been completed.
(c) that credit and quality points shall be transferred back to the University
of Southern Mississippi from the school of medicine, dentistry, or law
to complete requirements for the degree. A minimum of one year's
work must be transferred. In the case of medical technicians, a certificate
of graduation from a recognized school of medical technology must be
presented. In any case a minimum of 192 quarter hours must be com-
pleted before the degree can be awarded.
(d) that the program leading to the decree shall be completed within two
calendar years of the termination of the last quarter of residence at the
Universitv of Southern Mississippi, except that technicians will be
allowed three calendar years after the last quarter of residence for the
completion of the degree program.
5. Residence Hour Reauirement: Limitation on Corresnondence Courses:
To become eligible for a deffree at the University of Southern Mississippi, a
student must meet the following residence requirements:
(a) He must earn at least 48 auarter hours of credit in residence on the
Hattiesburg camous of the University of Southern Mississippi.
(b) He must do the last quarter of work (sixteen quarter hours) on the
Hattiesburg campus. Any exception to this regulation must be recom-
mended by the dean or division chairman of the college, school, or
division in which the student is graduating, and must be approved
by the Dean of the University.
(c) He must earn at the University of Southern Mississippi at least twelve
quarter hours of credit in his major field.
(d) Military personnel on active duty who are assigned to the University
of Southern Mississiopi on temporary duty under "Operation Bootstrap"
may be permitted to qualify for graduation by completing a minimum
of 40 quarter hours in residence, provided all other degree requirements
are met.
A long-standing regulation provides that students will not be permitted to
do correspondence study while in residence. An exception to this rule may be
made for seniors. This can only be done with the approval of the appropriate
dean or division chairman and the Dean of the University. If a student takes
a corresnondence course during his last quarter of attendance, he may not
register for a correspondence course after he leaves the campus with the expec-
tation of completing requirements for his degree.
6. Basic College Core Requirements: The purpose of the Basic College
core curriculum, is two-fold: to give all University students a common cul-
tural experience; and to extend this shared experience over a wide enough
range of skills and maior disciplines so that the individual student may gain
a better perspective of his own special abilities and interests.
It is the purpose of the degree programs in the upper-level colleges, schools,
and divisions then to build upon the common core experience in guiding
students toward majors and minors which will reflect their individual capacities
and life aims.
The core requirement of the Basic College, common to all degree programs,
is itemized in the Basic College Section of this catalog.
Two elements of the core must be emphasized here:
Physical Education: Freshman and sophomore students are required to take
one non-credit physical education activity course during each quarter of the
«3
Academic Requirements
freshman and sophomore years (i.e., one course per quarter for six quarters)
unless excused from the requirement by the University physician or the Dean
of the Basic College. Only one non- credit physical education activity course
may be taken in any one quarter.
Military Science: Physically qualified male students entering as freshmen
are required to complete at least two years (six quarters) of Military Science.
They must accomplish this Military Science requirement each quarter in
sequence, beginning with the first quarter in residence, until the requirement
is completed.
7. Exemption from Core Requirements: Students may be exempted from
any part of the core requirements for any degree on the basis of satisfactory
attainment as demonstrated by previous academic record. The granting of
exemption does not involve the bestowal of credit; neither does it reduce the
total number of hours to be earned for a degree. Its only effect is to increase
the number of electives which the student may include in his degree program.
8. Transfer from Basic College to Upper-Level College, School, or Division:
Beginning with the 1962-63 academic year, all undergraduates entering the
University below junior class status are assigned to the Basic College. In cases
of transfer students having junior status or higher as determined by the Admis-
sions Office, the Director of Admissions will assign the student directly to the
appropriate college, school, or division on the understanding that deficiences
must be made up on a schedule determined by the college, school, or division
concerned. In all other cases the student should consult the office of the dean of
the school in which he wishes to enroll as to the appropriate time for transfer-
ring from the Basic College.
No student may remain in the Basic College after he has earned a
total of 132 quarter hours of credit. If a transfer has not been made from the
Basic College when the student earns 132 hours, he will be dropped from the
University. Reinstatement to the University can be earned only by admission
to a degree -granting college, school, or division.
The student will initiate a transfer from the Basic College by filling out
transfer application forms from the degree-granting college, school, or division
of his major choice. If a student is refused admission to a degree -granting
college, school, or division, he may appeal his case to the Dean of the University.
Once a student is admitted to a degree-granting college, school, or division,
he should report to the chairman of his major department for academic advise-
ment. The department chairman is responsible for all advisement in his depart-
ment, but he may designate a member of his department faculty to advise any
particular student. The student must carry his copy of the approved transfer
application, and the adviser will have the departmental copy. In the advisement
process, the work plans section of the transfer application should be completed
on both the departmental copy and the student copy. This will constitute the
student's degree program; and he should be expected to follow it thereafter
unless changes are agreed to later by the student and the adviser. Any such
changes should be entered on both the departmental copy and the student's
copy of the degree program.
When the student is ready to file the degree application — which should be
done three quarters before degree requirements are completed, (see paragraph
number 15 below) — the material in the transfer application will supply most of
the information needed to complete the degree application. The degree applica-
tion must be signed by the department chairman.
9. Change of College, School, or Division: Students wishing to transfer from
one college, school, or division of the University to another must make applica-
tion to and be approved by the dean or division chairman of the college, school,
or division into which they wish to transfer.
10. College, School, and Division Degree Requirements: In addition to the
Basic College common core requirement, each degree-granting college, school,
64
Academic Requirements
or division may have its own requirements for a particular degree. These
requirements are designed to give the student the necessary preparation for
completing a major in the particular college, school, or division. The additional
upper-level requirements currently in force are itemized in the Colleges,
Schools, and Divisions Section.
11. Courses Numbered 300 and Above: To become eligible for any bac-
calaureate degree, a student is required to complete a minimum of sixty-eight
(68) quarter hours in courses numbered 300 or above.
12. English Proficiency: To become eligible for any baccalaureate degree, a
student must pass a qualifying examination in English proficiency after be-
coming a junior. The examination is given on Thursday of the seventh week of
each quarter; and it is to the student's advantage to take the examination
during the first quarter of attendance after he becomes a junior.
13. Quality Point Requirement for the Major and Minor: A student must
have a quality point average of at least 2.0 (a "C") in the major field and in
the minor field on courses taken at the University of Southern Mississippi.
A transfer student's work done in the major and minor fields in another
institution must average at least 2.0 to be applicable toward the major and
minor requirements at the University of Southern Mississippi. If the transferred
work does not average at least a "C", the student must remove any deficiencies
in that part of the major and minor credit being transferred. Transferred
deficiencies may be removed by: (a) repeating at the University of Southern
Mississippi a sufficient number of courses on which grades of "D" were trans-
ferred and thereby raising the grades in those courses to the level required
for a "C" average, or (b) striking from the transferred transcript courses in the
major or minor field with grades of "D." and taking additional courses in the
major or minor at the upper division level to meet the University's degree
requirement.
14. Change of Major within a College, School, or Division: Any student
wishing to change his major within a college, school, or division must secure the
approval of the dean or division chairman.
15. Application for Degree: A student is expected to file an application for
a degree at least three quarters before degree requirements are completed. This
application filed with the Registrar will show the work completed by the student
and the courses planned for the ensuing quarters. Filing three quarters in
advance of the proposed graduation date will allow time for checking the
application (see paragraph number eight above) ,and also allow the student time
for making up any deficiencies found in the degree program. After the applica-
tion has been approved by the Registrar's Office, it becomes the student's official
degree program.
No anolication for degree will be accented until the degree fee of twelve
dollars ($12.00) has been paid at the Office of the Financial Secretary.
16. Approval of Faculty: The names of all applicants for degrees are sub-
mitted to a vote of the faculty. If this vote is favorable, the President of the
University is authorized by the Board of Trustees to grant the degree.
17. Degrees with Honors: Students with exceptional academic records may
be awarded degrees with honors or with highest honors. The residence require-
ment for such degrees i<* not less than five auarters on the Hattiesburg camous
with a load of not less than twelve quarter hours in each quarter, and totaling
not less than eightv quarter hours. In computing this residence requirement, one
six-week term will be counted as a half quarter when the load is six hours or
more. A degree with honors will be granted to a student who maintains a quality-
point average of 3.5 or more. A degree with highest honors will be granted to a
student who maintains a quality-point average of 3.8 or more.
18. Second Baccalaureate Degree: The University of Southern Mississippi
will grant p candidate a second baccalaureate degree based unon requirements
of an applicable catalog, provided the program for the second degree includes at
«5
Academic Requirements
least 48 quarter hours with at least 96 quality points. The 48 quarter hours
must be related to a specific major separate from the first degree major; and
the 48 hours must be completed after the first degree requirements are met.
D. SPECIFIC DEGREE REQUIREMENTS DETERMINED
BY CHOICE OF SPECIALIZATION
In the baccalaureate degree's combination of breadth with depth, the major
and minor fields are the concentrated areas of study in which the student
achieves some depth of scholarship or specialization to complement the core
requirement's breadth.
Following this general pattern of designating a "major" from an area of
special interest, the student normally will choose his degree program and major
as follows:
COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES
A student seeking the Bachelor of Science degree in the College of Arts
and Sciences will select a major from among the following fields.
Biology
Botany
Microbiology
Zoology
Chemistry
Communications
Journalism
Public Address
Radio -Television
English (45 hours required)
French
German
Spanish
Geography
Geology
History
Mathematics
Physics
Political Science
Philosophy
Religion and Philosophy
Sociology
Speech and Hearing Sciences
Audiology
Language Disorders
Speech Pathology
The student seeking the Bachelor of Arts degree in the College of Arts and
Sciences will select a major from any of the foregoing fields, or from Economics
or Foreign Trade. For the difference between B.A. and B.S. core requirements.
ses the Colleges, Schools, and Divisions Section.
SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
The student seeking the Bachelor of Science in Business Administration
degree in the School of Business Administration will select a major from among
the following fields:
Accounting Marketing
Economics Industrial Management
Finance Personnel Management
General Business
SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS
The student seeking the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree in the School of Fine
Arts will select his major from Commercial Art, Drawing and Painting, Theatre,
or Three Dimensional Design.
The student seeking the Bachelor of Arts degree will select as his major
either Art or Theatre. The student who wants to teach art in public schools
should major in Art and minor in Education (see note under Art Education in
the School of Education and Psychology).
The student seeking the Bachelor of Music degree will select his major from
among the following:
Organ Voice
Church Music Piano
Music History and Literature String Instruments
Theory and Composition Wind Instruments
66
Academic Requirements
The student seeking the Bachelor of Music Education degree will select his
major from either:
General Supervision: voice or piano emphasis, or
Instrumental Supervision
DIVISION OF HOME ECONOMICS
The student seeking the Bachelor of Science degree in the Division of Home
Economics will select a major from among the following areas of specialization:
General Home Economics Institution Management — Dietetics
Child Development Institution Management — Commercial
Clothing Merchandising Teaching Home Economics Education
Clothing and Textiles Home Economics Extension Service
Food and Nutrition Home Economics in Equipment
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION AND PSYCHOLOGY
The School of Education and Psychology degree programs are a bit more
complex than those of other colleges and schools, since the teacher education
curricula embrace "professional," or methods, as well as "subject," or content,
courses.
The School of Education and Psychology awards the Bachelor of Arts degree
(normally a non-teaching degree) with majors in:
Library Science or
Psychology
The School of Education and Psychology also awards two types of Bachelor
of Science degree: teaching, and non-teaching.
B.S. (non-teaching)
The Bachelor of Science non-teaching degree in the School of Education
and Psychology may be secured with a major in any one of the following fields:
Architectural Drafting Psychology
Corrective Therapy Recreation
Industrial Arts Office Management
Library Science Executive Secretarial Studies
B.S. (teaching)
The Bachelor of Science professional teaching degree is awarded only in
the School of Education and Psychology. This B.S. teaching degree falls into
one of three general categories: Elementary Education, Secondary Education,
or Special Areas Education. Certification requirements for public school
teachers make necessary certain hour totals and course content for the majors
and minors in each of these categories.
For example, the student preparing to teach in elementary schools, grades
one through eight, will major in Elementary Education for his B.S. teaching
degree. No academic minor is required.
The B.S. teaching degree in Secondary Education, grades seven through
twelve, requires a minor in professional education courses, with a major selected
from one of the following fields (required hours are indicated where the total
requirement is more than 36).
Biology
Business Education (40-48 hours)
Chemistry
Economics*
English (45 hours)
French
General Science**
General Speech
Geography*
German
History*
67
Academic Requirements
Home Economics (52 hours)** Political Science*
Industrial Arts (44 hours) Sociology*
Mathematics Spanish
Physics
*Students majoring in economics, geography, history, political science, or sociology and
minoring in secondary education must include in their degree programs the following
courses: world history — 8 quarter hours; American history — 8 quarter hours; Mississippi
history — 4 quarter hours; economics — 4 quarter hours; political science — 4 quarter hours;
geography — 4 quarter hours.
**Home Economics majors will enroll in the Division of Home Economics, but will
also apply to the School of Education and Psychology for approval of their secondary
education teaching program.
The Special Areas in which teacher-education programs are available,
grades one through twelve, are:
School of Fine Arts
Art Education
Music Education
School of Education and Psychology
Audiology***
Health and Physical Education (22 hours Health, 22 hours Physical
Education)
Language Disorders*** Special Education
Library Science Speech Pathology***
***Curricula for the Audiology, Language Disorders, and Speech Pathology majors
will be found in the Department of Speech and Hearing Sciences of the College of Arts
and Sciences. Any student preparing to become a Special Areas teacher in one of these
major fields will enroll in the School of Education and Psychology, and will then be as-
signed to the Department of Speech and Hearing Sciences for courses in the major. The
teaching degree will be awarded by the School of Education and Psychology.
Public school teachers may also be certified in the special areas of music
education or art education (see under School of Fine Arts above). The certifica-
tion requirement for art education is a 44-hour major in art, with a minor in
professional education.
MINOR:
In addition to the major, each student, where the degree program so requires,
must also choose a minor (or else a second major). He should select his minor in
consultation with his academic adviser. A minimum of twenty-eight (28) quarter
hours is needed for the minor, with the quality point requirement as noted in
paragraph C-13 above.
With certain exceptions, any of the areas of specialization or majors indi-
cated above may be selected for the minor. In choosing a minor, however, the
student should be guided by the following policies:
A. A student working for a non-teaching degree must establish a minor
(28 hours) chosen from among the fields listed above as possible majors with two
exceptions:
(1) A student may establish a minor for the non-teaching degree in general
science by offering 36 hours from two or more appropriate fields (biology,
chemistry, geology, mathematics, and physics), provided he offers at
least 12 hours from each field he chooses to include.
(2) To establish a minor in any field, a student must earn at least twelve
(12) hours above the core requirements in that field.
B. A student working for a teaching degree in secondary education neces-
sarily establishes a minor in secondary education.
Since many high schools in Mississippi require teachers to teach in more
than one field, it is recommended that students working for secondary education
certification plan their electives so as to meet certification requirements in some
subject field in addition to their major.
In addition to the areas of specialization indicated above, the University
offers a minor in dance to exceptionally well qualified students (see Department
of Health, Physical Education, and Recreation under School of Education and
Psychology).
6S
COLLEGES, SCHOOLS,
AND DIVISIONS
The Basic College
The College of Arts and Sciences
School of Business Administration
School of Education and Psychology
School of Fine Arts
Division of Continuing Education
Division of Home Economics
6 9
THE BASIC COLLEGE (CORE AND
PRE-PROFESSIONAL CURRICULA)
SIDNEY E. L. WEATHERFORD, JR., DEAN
The Basic College administers the student's academic program until he
transfers to a degree -granting college, school, or division. Since this transfer
normally occurs at the junior year, and must occur by the senior year, the
Basic College is the primary advisement and administrative unit for freshman
and sophomore students, and for those pre -professional students who plan
to transfer to a professional school for their subsequent specialized degree.
The primary objective of the Basic College is "general" education, which is
pursued by means of a core curriculum required of all baccalaureate degree-
seeking candidates. As explained earlier:
The purpose of the Basic College core curriculum, therefore, is two-
fold: to give all University students a common cultural experience;
and to extend this experience over a wide enough range of skills and
major disciplines so that the individual student may gain a better per-
spective of his own special abilities and interests.
The Basic College Core Curriculum
NOTE: Students transferring from colleges which operate on the semester system
may satisfy the core requirements by counting one academic year (two
semesters) to be the equivalent of three quarters at USM. Thus, two semesters
of freshman English will transfer as three of the five quarters of English re-
quired in the core, even though the hours transferred may not total 12.
The Basic College core curriculum begins with twenty required hours
(normally five quarters) of English, of which twelve must be English composition
(Eng. 101, 102, and 103). The other eight hours of English required in the core
may be in literature, or a combination of literature and advanced composition,
as explained in the recapitulation and notes below.
The core also requires eight hours of World History (HIS 101 and 102).
The Science requirement in the core is either 12 or 16 hours, depending on
the degree program being pursued, as explained in the recapitulation and notes
below.
Four hours of Mathematics are also required in the Basic College core.
The 12-hour Social Science requirement in the core includes a four-hour
course in American Government (Political Science 101) required of all degree-
seeking students, plus eight hours which may be selected from introductory
courses in Economics, Geography, Psychology, or Sociology (see recapitulation
below.)
In addition to these basic courses in major areas, the core requires twelve
hours which may be selected from Personal Health (Health 179); the Enjoyment
of Music (MUS 165); Art Appreciation (ART 120); Theatre 103; Introduction to
Philosophy (PHI 101) or Logic (PHI 210); and Oral Communication (Public
Address 101).
Freshman and sophomore students, both men and women, must take six
quarters of non-credit physical education courses (one course each quarter for
six quarters) as part of the Basic College core curriculum, unless medically
excused.
Freshman and sophomore male students must take the required sequence
of six quarters of Military Science as part of the Basic College core (see Depart-
ment of Military Science under College of Arts and Sciences) .
Recapitulation and notes:
THE BASIC COLLEGE CORE CURRICULUM
Hours
English 101, 102, 103, 201, *202 or 433 or 332 20
History 101, 102 8
Science (Students interested in the Bachelor of Science Degree in the Col-
lege of Arts and Sciences must take laboratory science. Those preparing
to teach must take eight (8) hours of biological science and eight (8)
hours of physical science which may be in Fundamentals of Science) 12-16
7°
The Basic College
Mathematics 4
Social Science — Political Science 101 4
Elect one course from two of the following fields for eight hours:
Economics 201 or 251 8
Geography 103
Psychology 201
Sociology 103 or 201
Other Courses
Elect one course from three of the following fields for twelve hours: . . 12
Music 165 or Art 120 or Theatre 103
Philosophy 101 or 210, Health 179
Public Address 101
**Physical Education — Six quarters — (non- credit)
Military Science for Men 6
Total for Women 68 or 72
Total for Men 74 or 78
Please note that, in addition to the Basic College core curriculum outlined
above, a degree -granting college, school, or division will have additional require-
ments for admission into that college, school, or division. These additional re-
quirements are described in the introduction to each college, school, or division
in this section of the catalog.
♦Students preparing to teach are recommended to take English 330 in lieu of English
202. Students taking a Bachelor of .Science Degree in the College of Arts and Sciences
are recommended to take English 332 in lieu of English 202.
**The students participating in Varsity Athletics, the Marching Band, the Dixie Darlings,
and the Pom Pon may substitute this for non-credit Physical Education during one
quarter each year of participation.
Pre-Professional Curricula
In addition to its own degree programs, the University of Southern Missis-
sippi provides pre-professional training for students who plan later to enter the
fields of medicine, dentistry, medical technology, nursing, pharmacy, optometry,
law, and engineering. Recommended pre-professional curricula are outlined
below. Pre-professional programs may also be arranged with individual students
through their academic advisers in such fields as architecture, forestry, social
work, veterinary medicine, or the ministry.
RECOMMENDED PRE-MEDICAL AND PRE-DENTAL PROGRAM
Advisers: C. R. Brent, Cliburn, Harrises, Payne, B.C. Smith
The pre-medical and pre-dental curriculum is planned to meet the needs of
the student wishing to enter an approved school of medicine or dentistry. The
student should seek the counsel of his advisers in selecting courses that will
meet the specific requirements of the medical or dental school which he in-
tends to enter. This is especially true of science, social science, and language
requirements.
It should be remembered that the keen competition for admission to med-
ical and dental schools makes it imperative that the student plan his curricu-
lum carefully and maintain a superior scholastic standing. A three-year pre-
medical and pre-dental program is outlined below, but if the student wishes
to receive a bachelor's degree before transferring to professional school, a
four-year curriculum may be worked out with the advisers. A student accepted
in medical or dental school after the junior year may be awarded a bachelor's
degree by the University of Southern Mississippi upon completion of the first
year of medical or dental school if the core curriculum requirements outlined
elsewhere in this catalog are met.
RECOMMENDED PRE-MEDICAL AND PRE-DENTAL PROGRAM
Freshman Year Hours
Biology 101, 102, 103 12
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 15
English 101, 102, 103 12
The Basic College
Mathematics 101, 102, 103 12
Physical Education (3 Quarters) (Non-credit)
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 3
Sophomore Year
Biology 301, 302, 401 12
English 201, 202, or 433 8
Political Science 101 4
History 101, 102 8
Physics 101, 102, 103 12
Sociology 103 4
Physical Education (3 Quarters) (Non-credit)
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 3
Junior Year*
Chemistry 204, 205, 206 15
Chemistry 370 4
Chemistry 371, 372 (Recommended but not required) 8
Economics 200 or 251 4
Music 165 or Art 120 4
Philosophy 210 or 101 . 4
Psychology 201 4
Public Address 101 4
*Any student desiring to receive the Bachelor of Arts degree instead of continuing in
the Pre-medical-Pre-dental Program should replace 12 hours of the junior year program
with 12 hours of a foreign language. (German 101, 102, 103 recommended.)
Senior Year
Foreign Language 12
Electives in 300 or 400 courses 24
Courses replaced by foreign language during junior year 12
RECOMMENDED PROGRAM IN MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY
Advisers: C. R. Brent, Cliburn, Harrises, Payne, B. C. Smith
The following three-year program is planned to meet the needs of those
specializing in medical technology. The student who completes additional work
at a recognized school of medical technology may be eligible for a Bachelor of
Science degree at the University of Southern Mississippi
Freshman year Hours
English 101, 102, 103 12
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 15
Biology 101, 102, 103 12
Mathematics 101, 102, 103 12
Physical Education (3 Quarters) (Non-credit)
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 3
Sophomore year
Biology 228, 229, 339 12
Chemistry 304, 305 8
English 201 4
Political Science 101 4
Public Address 101 4
History 101, 102 8
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 3
Junior year
English 202 or 433 4
Biology 305, 346, 424 12
Biology 340, 344 8
Sociology 103 4
7*
The Basic College
Economics 200 4
Philosophy 210 or 101 4
Music 165 or Art 120 4
Physical Education (3 Quarters) (Non- credit)
Psychology 201 4
RECOMMENDED PRE-PHARMACY PROGRAM
Advisers: C. R. Brent, Cliburn, Harrises, Payne, B. C. Smith
The requirement for admission to most schools of pharmacy is two years
of pre -pharmacy training. The student should obtain a copy of the catalog of
the school of pharmacy which he plans to attend and with his academic adviser
adjust his course of study to meet his individual needs.
First Pre-pharmacy Year Hours
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 15
English 101, 102, 103 12
Mathematics (Algebra and Trigonometry) 101, 102, 103 12
Biology 101, 102, 103 12
Electives 4
Second Pre-pharmacy Year
Chemistry 301, 302, 303 15
Physics 101, 102, 103 12
Economics 251, 252 8
Botany 104, 214 8
Electives* 12
♦Electives should be selected from one or more of the following fields of study: English
literature, foreign languages, history, mathematics, philosophy, political science, psy-
chology, sociology, speech.
RECOMMENDED PRE-OPTOMETRY PROGRAM
Advisers: C. R. Brent, Cliburn, Harrises, Payne, B. C. Smith
Most schools of optometry require at least two years of pre -optometry
courses as a prerequisite.
First Pre- optometry year Hours
English 101, 102, 103 12
Mathematics 101, 102, 103 12
Biology 101, 102, 103 12
History 101, 102 8
Sociology 103 4
Philosophy 210 4
Physical Education (3 Quarters) (Non-credit)
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 3
Second Pre-optometry Year Hours
Physics 101, 102, 103 12
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 15
Psychology 201 4
Public Address 101 4
English 201, 332 8
Political Science 4
Economics 200 4
Music 165 or Art 120 4
Physical Education (3 Quarters) (Non-credit)
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 3
PRE-NURSING PROGRAM
Advisers: C. R. Brent, Cliburn, Harrises, Payne, B. C. Smith
Students interested in the Pre-Nursing Program should confer with the
advisers since requirements vary with different schools of nursing. Stu-
dents interested in entering the Natchez nursing program should consult the
Continuing Education Section of this catalog.
73
The Basic College
RECOMMENDED PRE-LAW PROGRAM
Adviser: Dr. Wilber
The requirements for admission to accredited law schools vary. Some
schools require only three years of pre-law study, but many require comple-
tion of degree programs. The pre-law student should obtain a catalog of the
law school where he intends to study, and use it in planning his program. Law
schools expect the pre-law student to emphasize content subjects rather than
skill subjects. All schools require that their students be able to express them-
selves well in written composition, so a student who is weak in composition
should take extra courses.
The program at the University of Southern Mississippi is divided into two
parts, and the pre-law student should select one.
A. The student may earn a regular baccalaureate degree from the Uni-
versity of Southern Mississippi.
B. The student may earn a degree from the College of Arts and Sciences
by completing three years of pre-law study and transferring back a
year of work from the law school after it is completed. Under this
program the following requirements must be met:
1) A mininium of 140 hours with 280 quality points in pre-law courses
must have been completed, with at least four quarters of residence
at the University of Southern Mississippi.
2) All core requirements must have been met for the College of Arts
and Sciences.
3) At least one year of law school work must be transferred back,
the marks for which must average "C" or better. The combined
total of hours at the University of Southern Mississippi and those
transferred back from law school must equal 192 or more. The
work from the law school must be transferred back within two
years of leaving the University of Southern Mississippi.
The student's attention is invited to the following courses that might be
especially helpful in preparing for law school:
Accounting; 201, 202, 203.
Finance 310, 311.
History 411, 469, and 470.
Political Science 307, 412, 434, and 485.
PA 101
The student should notice that most law schools now require an applicant
for admission to have taken satisfactorily the Law School Admission Test.
Some schools want this to be taken nine months before entering law school.
The pre-law adviser can inform a student of the dates and places where this
test is given, but the student must arrange for taking it well in advance.
RECOMMENDED PRE -ENGINEERING PROGRAM
Advisers: Munn, St. Clair
The following curricula are set up to meet the requirements for admission
to most engineering schools. The student should note that in each of the pre-
engineering programs, there are several electives allowed. A catalog from the
selected engineering school should be consulted before the elective courses are
chosen. Courses that are acceptable at many engineering schools are English
201 and 202; Economics 200 and 251; Public Address 101; Philosophy 300, 303,
and 401; Sociology 103; and Psychology 201.
74
The Basic College
FRESHMAN YEAR PROGRAM FOR ALL ENGINEERS
Fall Qtr. Hrs.
Math 171 4
English 101 4
Chemistry 101 5
Ind. Arts 121 3
ROTC 1
Winter Qtr. Hrs.
Math 276 4
Chemistry 102 5
English 102 4
Ind. Arts 122 3
ROTC 1
Spring Qtr. Hrs.
Math 277 4
Chemistry 103 5
English 103 4
Pol. Sci. 101 4
ROTC 1
PE
PE
PE
17 17
CIVIL ENGINEERING PROGRAM— SECOND YEAR
18
Fall Qtr.
Hrs. Winter Qtr.
Hrs. Spring Qtr.
Elective 4
Math 278 4
Physics 201 4
Ind. Arts 325 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
Math 279 4
Physics 202 4
History 101 4
Elective 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
Hrs.
Math 305 4
Physics 203 4
Geology 101 4
History 102 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING PROGRAM— SECOND YEAR
Fal Qtr. Hrs. Winter Qtr. Hrs. Spring Qtr.
History 101 4
Math 278 4
Physics 201 4
Chemistry 201 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
Math 279 4
Physics 202 4
Chemistry 202 4
History 102 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
Hrs.
Math 305 4
Physics 203 4
Chemistry 203 4
Ind. Arts 325 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PROGRAM-
SECOND YEAR
Fal Qtr. Hrs.
Elective 4
Math 278 4
Physics 201 4
Ind. Arts 136 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
Winter Qtr. Hrs.
Math 279 4
Physics 202 4
History 101 4
Elective 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
Spring Qtr. Hrs.
Math 305 4
Physics 203 4
History 102 4
Ind. Arts 325 4
ROTC 1
PE
17
75
COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES
Claude E. Fike, Dean
PURPOSE
It is the purpose of the College of Arts and Sciences to provide a broad
cultural and educational experience, specialized disciplines in major and minor
fields, and pre -professional programs. Consult the Graduate Bulletin for post-
baccalaureate programs.
A student wishing to enter the College of Arts and Sciences must complete
the core requirements in the Basic College with an over-all "C" average, and then
make application for transfer to the College of Arts and Sciences. He will then be
assigned to the departmental chairman of his major field for academic advise-
ment. The student should note the specific B.A. or B.S. degree requirements of
the College of Arts and Sciences as given below in order to complete as many of
the required courses as possible in the Basic College prior to transfer. The courses
below must be taken either in the Basic College or after transfer to the College
of Arts and Sciences.
For the Bachelor of Arts Degree:
English 202 and 203 or 306
12* or 24 hours of foreign language (must be in the same language)
4 hours from each of the following five fields of study:
(Total: 20 hrs.) Preferably, these courses should be
Economics 200 or 251 taken in the Basic College, but may be
Geography 103 completed after the student is ad-
Philosophy 101 mitted to the College of Arts and
Psychology 201 Sciences.
Sociology 103 or 201
8 hours from two of the following three fields of study:
Music 165
Art 120
Public Address 101 or 111
12 hours of science: either the Fundamentals of Science, or in a laboratory
science. This is not an additional school requirement but indicates a
choice
♦Pertains to students who have completed at least two years of a foreign language in
high school, whose placement test results indicate that they are adequately prepared to
begin the second year of the same language, and who complete the second year of this
same language.
For the Bachelor of Science Degree
English 202 or 433 or 332
12 hours of foreign language (must be in the same language) may be re-
quired at the option of the major department.
8 hours of mathematics (total required: 12 hours, including 4 in the Basic
College core)
12 hours of laboratory science. B.S. degree students should elect 12 hours
of laboratory science in the Basic College prior to admission to the
College of Arts and Sciences, giving them a total of 24 hours of science
requirements for the B.S. degree.
Philosophy 101 or 210
4 hours from three of the following four fields of study:
(Total: 12 hrs.) Preferably, these courses should be
Geography 103 taken in the Basic College, but may
Economics be completed after the student is ad-
Psychology 201 mitted to the College of Arts and
Sociology 103 or 201 Sciences.
Biology
ORGANIZATION
The College of Arts and Sciences is organized into seventeen departments:
Biology, Chemistry, Communication, Computer Science and Statistics, Eco-
nomics (for Bachelor of Arts degree), English and Literature, Foreign Lan-
guages, Geography and Geology, History, Mathematics, Military Science,
Physics and Astronomy, Political Science, Religion and Philosophy, Science
Education, Sociology, and Speech and Hearing Sciences. The Department of
Computer Science offers only an undergraduate minor. The Department of
Military Science has no academic major or minor. Other departments offer
both majors and minors. The College shares with the School of Education
and Psychology joint responsibility for the Department of Science Education,
embracing a sequence of courses titled Fundamentals of Science.
HONORS PROGRAM
Stanley Parry, Director
The College of Arts and Sciences administers a University-wide Honors
Program for the top fifteen students in each class, selected on the basis of
previous academic records, recommendations, ACT scores, and personal inter-
views. The program is supervised by the Honors Council. Special classes are
offered by separate disciplines for this program and an inter-disciplinary
seminar is given each quarter under the supervision of the director.
Honors Colloquium 101, 102, 103, 201, 202, 203. One hour each.
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY (BIO)
J. F. Walker, Chairman
Abbott, Cliburn, Fish, Gunter, Harrises, Jones,
Reynolds, B. Smith, Stocks, Turnbull
The Department endeavors to prepare students to become research biolo-
gists, marine biologists, biology teachers, and workers for state game-fish
commissions and national parks. The Department also offers courses in biology
to meet all requirements of pre -professional training in the specialized fields
of medicine, dentistry, nursing, medical technology, pharmacy, veterinary
science, entomology, and marine biology.
Requirements for Major
A student majoring in Biology may elect one of several alternative plans.
He may elect either the B.A. program, the B.S. Professional (for teachers),
B.S. Non -professional, M.S. in teaching of biology, M.S. in combined sciences,
and the Ph.D. For the Master's and Ph.D. degrees consult the Graduate
Bulletin. A student's choice of a degree program should be determined in
consultation with his adviser and in keeping with the type of profession or
vocation which he plans to enter.
A. Curriculum — College Core
In meeting core curricula requirements for any of the undergraduate
degrees listed above, the student majoring in Biology should elect a full year
of chemistry and a full year of physics in lieu of the minimum core require-
ments for the physical sciences.
B. Curriculum for Prospective Biology Teachers in the Secondary Schools
Majors in Biology who are candidates for the B.S. Teaching degree are
advised to select 44 quarter hours from the following three groups of courses:
1. Biology 101, 102, 103, and 104—16 hours
2. Biology 301, 302, 411, and 412—16 hours
3. Biology 401, 339 or 400, and 360 or 452—12 hours
C. Curriculum for the B.S. or B.A. Non-Teaching Degree
1. General Requirements:
77
College of Arts and Sciences
All majors in biology, except those taking the B.S. Teaching degree, must
take a minimum of 48 hours in the Department of Biology. Twenty-four of
the 48 must be in courses numbered 300 or above. All majors are required
to take Biology 101, 102, 103 or 104, and Biology 401. In addition to the
foregoing, those who major in Biology and Marine Biology must take Biology
301 and 302, those who major in Botany must take Biology 411 and 412, those
who major in Microbiology must take Biology 339 and 340, and those who
major in Biology must take Biology 400, 301 and 302 or Biology 411 and 412
in lieu of Biology 301 and 302.
2. Requirements for Specialized Programs:
The pre-professional requirements for the specialized fields of medicine,
nursing, and medical technology are listed on preceding pages in the Basic
College Section of this catalog.
The specialized programs in Botany, Zoology, and Microbiology are as
follows:
Botany
A minimum of 48 hours that will include Biology 101, 102, 103, 321, 401,
411, 417, plus an additional 12 hours in advanced botany selected with the
approval of the major professor from the botany courses listed on the following
pages.
Zoology
A minimum of 48 hours selected with consent of the major professor
from the following: Biology 101, 102, 103, 301, 302, 400, 401, 418, 419, 421, 422,
424, 452 (or 353), 481, 482, and 484. Biology 301-302 and 401 are required.
Microbiology
A minimum of 48 hours which must include Biology 101, 102, 103 or 104,
339, 340, 400, and 401, plus an additional twenty hours of courses in bac-
teriology or other approved courses in the area of microbiology, selected in
conference with the major professor from courses listed in the following
pages of courses in biology.
Detailed outlines of specialized programs with majors in biology are
as follows:
Curriculum Leading to
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE
Recommended for
MAJOR IN BIOLOGY
and
MINOR IN BOTANY
(For freshman and sophomore years, see Basic College core curricula)
Junior Year
Fall Hrs. Winter Hrs.
Biology 305 or 421 ... 4 Biology 422 or 424 ... 4
Biology 411 4 Biology 412 4
Biology 400 4 Elective 8
Elective 4
Spring Hrs.
Biology 401 4
Biology 417 4
Biology 410 4
Elective 4
16
16
16
Fall Hrs.
Biology 339 4
Biology 425 or 481 ... 4
Elective 8
Senior Year
Winter Hrs.
Biology 412 4
Biology 482 4
Elective 8
Spring Hrs.
Biology 411 4
Biology 340 4
Elective 8
16
16
16
7»
Biology
Curriculum Leading to
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE
Recommended for
BIOLOGY MAJOR
CHEMISTRY, GEOLOGY, OR PHYSICS MINOR
(For freshman and sophomore years, see Basic College core curricula)
Fall Hrs.
Biology 4
Chem., Geol., or
Physics 4
Biology 339 4
Junior Year
Winter Hrs.
Biology 4
Chem., Geol.,
or Physics 4
Psychology 4
Spring Hrs.
Biology 401 4
Chem., Geol.,
or Physics 4
Elective 8
Elective
4 Elective 4
16 16
Summer — 6 weeks at Gulf Coast Research Laboratory —
Biology 431 or 454—9 hrs.
Fall Hrs.
Chem., Geol., or
Physics 4
Philosophy 101 4
Elective 8
Senior Year
Winter Hrs.
Chem., Geol.,
or Physics; 4
Philosophy 301 4
Elective 8
Spring
Chem., GeoL
or Physics
Elective
16
Hrs.
4
12
16
16
16
PRE-BIOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY
Freshman Year
Biology 101, 102, 103
General Biology- '
15 quarter hours
Biology 104
Intro, to Botany,
4 quarter hours
General Inorganic Chemistry 101,
102, 103
15 quarter hours
English 101, 102, 103
(12 quarter hours)
History 101, 102
(Core requirements,
8 quarter hours)
Physical Education
(3 quarters)
Military Science (3 quarters
required for men)
I*
Sophomore Year
Psychology 201
(Core requirement, 4 hours)
Chemistry 204, 205, 206
15 quarter hours, qual. and quan.
Health 179
4 quarter hours
Military Science 3 quarters
(required for men)
Junior
Biology 400 (Protozoology)
(4 quarter hours)
Biology 401 (Genetics, 4 hours)
Foreign Language (12 quarter hours)
Electives (4 quarter hours)
Biology 419— Field Zoology
Biology 201- 302 (comparative
Anatomy, 8 quarter hours)
English (Literature) 201, 202
(Core requirements, 8 hours)
Math 101, 102, 103 (12 quarter hours)
(two quarters of algebra, one of
trigonometry)
PE (3 quarters)
Year
Physics 101, 102, 103 (12 hours)
Social Studies (8 quarter hours)
(Core requirements may be selected
from any of the following depart-
ments: Sociology, Economics, Gov-
ernment, or Geography)
79
College of Arts and Sciences
Senior Year
Biology 481, 482 (Ecology, 8 hours) Public Address 101
Electives (20 quarter hours) (Core, 4 quarter hours)
(Second year French, German, etc., Biology 484 (Limnology, 4 hours)
highly recommended) Chemistry 204, 205, 2u6 (Organic)
(15 quarter hours)
In addition to the core requirements, certification requirements and the
departmental requirements, the student, must complete requirements for a
minor in a related field. Courses not used to fulfill any of these requirements
are free electives and may be taken in any department of the University. The
minor field courses should be selected after consultation with the major
professor.
The requirements for the M.S. in the teaching of biology are listed in the
Graduate Bulletin. Students may also take the M.S. in biology with a minor in
geology, physics, chemistry, health, or psychology. Each student before register-
ing for any graduate work must first of all confer with his major professor and
obtain approval of his entire graduate program.
GULF COAST RESEARCH LABORATORY
The University of Southern Mississippi is closely allied with the Gulf
Coast Research Laboratory at Ocean Springs. Staff members and biology majors
in both the graduate and undergraduate schools have been active participants
in the work at the Gulf Coast Research Laboratory. It is strongly recommended
that all graduate majors in biology take at least a six -weeks program in
marine biology as offered at the Laboratory. The following undergraduate
courses are to be had only at the Gulf Coast Research Laboratory: Biology
454-G454, 431-G431, 429-G429.
BIOLOGY
GENERAL COURSES (BIO)
101 — Biology I. Four hours.
Two theory periods and two two -hours laboratory periods each week.
This course and Biology 102 which follows constitute the general core
requirements in biological sciences for the B.S. professional degree.
A treatment of the protoplasmic concept, cell theory, tissue, etc., and the
beginning of a survey of animal phyla.
102 — Biology II. Four hours.
Two theory periods and two two -hour laboratory periods each week.
A continuation of Biology 101, completing the survey of animal kingdom
and beginning study of systems.
103 — Biology III. Four hours.
Two theory periods and two two-hour laboratory periods each week.
Prerequisite: Biology 101 (or 104).
The circulatory, respiratory, excretory, reproductive, endocrine, and nerv-
ous systems; fundamental principles of genetics and evolution. Vertebrates
studied in laboratory.
485-G485 — History of Biology. Four hours.
For seniors and graduate students only.
Lectures and readings concerning the development and organization of the
biological sciences; the development of biological principles and theories will
be emphasized.
8o
Biology
ZOOLOGY
301 — Campartive Anatomy I. Four hours.
Two theory periods and two two-hour laboratory periods each week.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, and 103. Biology majors are not allowed
credit for this course unless Biology 302 is completed.
302 — Comparative Anatomy II. Four hours.
Two theory periods and two two -hour laboratory periods each week.
Prerequisite: Zoology 301.
A continuation of Biology 301, laboratory work devoted to study of the
turtle and cat.
305 — Microtechnique. Four hours.
One hour lecture and six hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, and 103. Open to juniors and seniors, and
others by special permission.
Techniques for preparing whole mounts and tissue slides.
360 — Field Zoology: Herpetology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and hour hours laboratory per week.
Identification, preservation, and collection of all local species of amphibians,
and reptiles. Discussions of southeastern United States zoogeography, and
faunal problems. Field trips when possible.
400-G400 — Protozoology. Four hours.
Two theory periods, and two two-hour laboratory periods each week.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, and 103.
Studies are made of parasitic and free-living protozoa concerning their
anatomy and life histories. Vital stains and permanent mounts are utilized;
students prepare some permanent mounts.
401-G401 — Genetics. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, and 103.
The fundamental principles of heredity.
414-G414 — Cellular Physiology I. Four hours.
Two hours lecture per week plus one four -hour laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: 12 hours of biology, 12 hours inorganic chemistry and either
8 hours of organic chemistry or 8 hours of analytical chemistry, plus 8 hours
of mathematics.
A functional study of the inorganic, organic, and physical aspects of living
organisms with emphasis on the cell.
415-G415— Cellular Physiology II. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Biology 414-G414.
A continuation of Biology 414-G414.
421 -G421— Embryology I. Four hours.
Two theory periods and two two -hour laboratory periods each week.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, 103, 301, and 302.
Embryology of vertebrates, especially the frog. Maturation, fertilization,
cleavage, origin and development of germ layers, histogenesis, and organo-
genesis. Strongly recommended for majors.
422-G422— Embryology II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Embryology 421.
81
College of Arts and Sciences
A continuation of Embryology 421. The embryological development of ver-
tebrates, especially the chicken and the pig. Histogenesis and organogenesis of
the chicken, the pig, and man.
424-G424— Histology. Four hours.
Three lecture periods and one two -hour laboratory period each week.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, and 103.
Microscopic anatomy for general students. Recommended for hospital tech-
nicians, nurses, and biology majors.
427-G427 — Biogeography. Two hours.
Two lectures per week.
A descriptive and analytical study of the distribution of plants and animals.
433-G433— Medical Entomology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: 12 quarter hours of zoology.
The study of the various species of arthropods of medical importance.
435-G435— Mammalogy. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory and field work per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 301, 302 recommended.
Morphology, taxonomy, life history, distribution, evolution, and adaptations
of mammals.
437-G437— Ornithology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory and field work per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 301, 302 recommended.
Morphology, taxonomy, life history, distribution, evolution, and adaptations
of birds.
448-G448 — Comparative Animal Physiology I. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: 16 hours of biology, 12 hours of chemistry, and 8 hours of
mathematics.
A study of the physiological activities of different kinds: of animals by
comparing physiological and biochemical systems. Topics will be selected for
detailed consideration in lectures with outside reading and class discussion.
449-G449 — Comparative Animal Physiology II. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Biology 448-G448.
A continuation of Biology 448-G448.
450-G450 — Principles of Nomenclature. Two hours.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, 103, and Biology 360 or Biology 466.
452-G452— Entomology. Four hours.
Four hours laboratory and two hours lecture per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, and 103.
A study of the principal groups of insects. Life habits, structural adapta-
tions, life histories, natural habitats, classifications and the economic impor-
tance of certain species.
463-G463 — Arthropodology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory and field work per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 433-G433.
The study of terrestrial and fresh water arthropods other than insects,
including their collection, preservation, and identification.
468- G468— Parasitology I. Four hours.
Four hours laboratory and two hours lecture per week.
8x
Biology
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, 103.
The epidemiology, morphology, and importance of animal parasites, with
emphasis on those affecting man.
469-G469— Parasitology II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 468 or G468 or consent of instructor.
A continuation of 468.
481-G481— Ecology I. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory or field work per week.
Prerequisite: 24 hours of biology including a course in botany, 12 hours of
chemistry, college algebra.
Interrelations between organisms and their environment. Biogeochemical
cycles and nutrient distribution. Limiting factors, productivity and energy
transfer in food chains. Ecological succession.
482-G482— Ecology II. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory or field work per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 481.
Ecological effects of temperatures, light, rainfall, salinity. Relationship of
respiration and osmoregulation to environmental factors. Population growth
form.
483-G483— Ecology III. Four hours.
One hour lecture and a minimum of six hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Ecology 482 and senior standing, except by special permission.
Special field and laboratory problems in beginning ecological research
under direction.
484-G484 — Limnology. Four hours.
Lectures, laboratories, and field trips.
Prerequisites: Biology 102, 481, and 482 strongly recommended. Junior
standing and permission.
A study of the physical, chemical, and biological conditions in lakes, ponds,
and streams.
492— Biological Problems I, II, III. Two hours each. I"
Given only by special arrangement.
A course in special techniques, designed for majors with a need for certain
basic biological techniques as tools for future research.
COURSES SPECIALLY RECOMMENDED FOR MARINE BIOLOGY MAJORS
See listing of courses given at Gulf Coast Research Laboratory.
418-G418 — Field Zoology: Macroscopic Invertebrates. Four hours.
One hour lecture and six hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 101, 102, 103.
Collection, preservation, identification, and general biology of local, macro-
scopic, marine, fresh- water and terrestrial invertebrates. Field work as needed.
419-G419 — Field Zoology: Microscopic Invertebrates. Four hours.
One hour lecture and six hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 101, 102, 103.
Collection, preservation, identification, and general biology of local, macro-
scopic, marine, fresh- water and terrestrial invertebrates.
466-G466— Ichthyology. Four hours.
Four hours laboratory and two hours lecture per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, 103.
83
College of Arts and Sciences
'
Collection, preservation and identification of local species of fishes and fish-
like vertebrates, with primary emphasis on fresh water forms. Field work when
possible.
479-G479 — Introduction to Biological Oceanography. 2 hours.
Prerequisites: 481 or G481 or 482 or G482.
Introductory study of fundamentals of oceanography to acquaint the stu-
dent with major ocean basins and their characteristic topography. Physical and
chemical characteristics of sea water will be examined from biological view-
point. The course is intended as prerequisite for Biology 515. Restricted to
seniors and graduate students.
BOTANY
104 — General Botany. Four hours.
Anatomy, physiology, and reproduction of major plant groups and their
taxonomy.
409-G409 — Introductory Phycology. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Botany 104 or General Bacteriology.
Consideration of the algae, nature, position, classification, and importance.
Laboratory devoted to general procedures of cultivation, identification, and
morphology.
410-G410 — Introductory Morphology of Plants. Four hours.
Three hours lecture and two hours laboratory.
Prerequisite: Advanced standing in botany.
Laboratory devoted to study of extant and fossil vascular plants.
411-G411— Plant Ecology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Advanced standing in Botany.
Relationship of plants to their environment.
412-G412— Plant Physiology I. Four hours.
Two theory and two laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisite: General botany (Botany 104 or its equivalent). General chem-
istry and organic chemistry recommended.
Studies of basic physiological processes of green plants: greenhouse labora-
tory work.
413-G413— Plant Physiology II. Four hours.
Prerequisites: 104, 412. General chemistry and organic chemistry recom-
mended.
Studies of basic physiological processes of green plants: greenhouse labora-
tory work.
417-G417 — Taxonomy of Higher Plants. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Botany 104.
A study of classification of both wild and cultivated seed plants.
423-G423— Plant Anatomy. Four hours.
A study of the anatomy of recent and fossil plants.
425-G425 — Introductory Mycology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisite: General Bacteriology or Botany 104.
Laboratory devoted to general procedures of cultivation and identification.
438-G438— Botany I. Four hours.
Two theory periods and two two-hour laboratory periods each week.
A study of gross and microscopic structures, physiology, life cycles, and
economic significance of the Thallophytes.
84
Biology
439-G439— Botany II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Botany 438.
A study of the Bryophytes and Pteridophytes.
BACTERIOLOGY
339 — General Bacteriology I. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, 103 or 104. Organic chemistry recom-
mended.
Introduction to basic principles of bacteriology.
340 — General Bacteriology II. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: General Bacteriology I, one year of inorganic chemistry.
Organic chemistry recommended.
A continuation of 339.
403-G403— Food Bacteriology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and two two -hour laboratories.
Prerequisites: Biology 339, 340, organic chemistry or consent of instructor.
Microorganisms important in food: preservation and spoilage of food: food
in relationship to diseases.
405-G405— Public Health Bacteriology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisite: Biology 339 and 340.
Schemes for isolation and identification of major groups.
406-G406— Virology. Four hours.
Prerequisites: 339 and 340 and organic chemistry.
A study of representative bacterial plant and animal viruses with major
emphasis on bacteriophages.
420-G42O— Soil Bacteriology. Four hours. |{
Two hours lecture and two two-hour laboratories.
Prerequisites: Biology 339, 340, organic chemistry or consent of instructor.
Study of soil microflora, emphasis or Nitrogen- Carbon cycle in environ-
ment.
441-G441 — Water and Sewage. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and two two-hour laboratories.
Prerequisites: Biology 339, 340, organic chemistry or consent of instructor.
Control of purity water supply: sources and types of pollution and control
of sewage disposal.
444-G444 — Bacteriology. Four hours.
Four hours laboratory and two hours lecture.
Prerequisites: 339, 340 and organic chemistry.
Special emphasis on advanced techniques in bacteriology.
471-G471 — Immunology and Serology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Advanced standing in microbiology.
Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods.
Studies of infection, resistance, types of immunity, hypersensitivity, and
major techniques of diagnostic immunological reactions.
ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY
228 — Human Anatomy. Four hours.
85
College of Arts and Sciences
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, and 103.
Three lectures per week; one two-hour laboratory period.
Introductory course in human anatomy. Carries no credit for biology majors.
229 — Physiology. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, 102, 103, 228, general chemistry recommended.
Three lectures and one two -hour laboratory period.
Principles of human physiology. Credit for majors by special permission.
MARINE BIOLOGY
THE FOLLOWING COURSES ARE TAUGHT AT THE GULF COAST
RESEARCH LABORATORY IN OCEAN SPRINGS BY THE GULF
COAST RESEARCH LABORATORY STAFF
429-G429 — Marine Botany. Four and one -half hours.
Prerequisites: General botany, plant taxonomy, and Biology 339.
A survey, based upon local examples, of the principal groups of marine
algae, treating their structure, reproduction, distribution and general biology;
including a survey of the common maritime flowering plants, their identifica-
tion and ecology.
431-G431— Marine Vertebrate Zoology. Nine hours.
Prerequisite: 12 hours in biology, including comparative anatomy.
A formal lecture and laboratory survey of all marine chordates, including
the lower subphyla, the fishes, reptiles, mammals, and shore birds.
454-G454 — Marine Invertebrate Zoology. Nine hours.
A study of the structure, natural habitats, classification and economic im-
portance of invertebrate species native to the waters of the Mississippi Sound
and around the outlying islands.
488 — Marine Zoology for Teachers. Six hours.
Prerequisite: 12 quarter hours of biology. No credit toward a major or
minor in biology.
Designed for teachers of biological science in elementary and secondary
schools to become acquainted with marine life in the Gulf of Mexico. Trips to
shrimping grounds, oyster reefs, and sea food processing plants will be made.
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY (CHE)
C. E. Lane, Jr., Chairman
C. Brent, Coe, Haken, Hurst, Long, McCleskey, Newsom, Payne, Thames
A student planning to major in Chemistry may elect either the B.S. or the
B.A. degree. For information concerning the Master's degree and the Doctor of
Philosophy degree, see the Graduate Bulletin. A major in chemistry will in-
clude not less than 48 quarter hours of chemistry.
The Department of Chemistry is accredited by the Division of Chemical
Education of the American Chemical Society. A chemistry major may now
graduate as a chemist certified by the American Chemical Society. In order to
obtain this certified degree the following curriculum is prescribed.
Freshman Year
English 101, 102, 103
Chemistry 101, 102, 103
Mathematics 101, 102, 103
History 101, 102
Political Science 101
Physical Education (Non-credit)
86
Chemistry
Sophomore Year
English 201, 202 or 433; Soc. Sci. 4 hrs.
Chemistry 204, 205, 206
Mathematics 171, 276, 277
Physics 201, 202, 203
Physical Education (Non-credit)
Junior Year
Chemistry 304, 305, 405
Chemistry 401, 402, 403
Mathematics 278, 279, 305
German 121, 122, 123
Senior Year
Chemistry 431, 432 or 406, 496 or 425
German 221, 222; Art 120 or Music 165
Soc. Sci. 8 hrs.; Public Address 179
Philosophy 210
Recommended Physics 371 or 471, 381 or 472
SECONDARY EDUCATION
A major in chemistry for secondary education will include not less than 36
hours and must consist of:
Chemistry 101, 102, 103
Chemistry 204, 205, 206
Chemistry 304, 305
Other courses may not be substituted.
CHEMISTRY COURSES (CHE)
In the sequence of courses the immediate lower number is prerequisite for
the following course. Example: Chemistry 101 is prerequisite to 102 and 102
to 103.
101, 102, 103— General Chemistry. Five hours each.
Four theory periods and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Algebra, or Mathematics 101 and 102 taken concurrently with
Chemistry 101 and 102.
A course in general inorganic chemistry stressing fundamental principles
and a comparative study of the elements. Emphasis upon fundamental laws,
theories, and application.
121, 122, 123— General Chemistry. Four hours each.
Three theory periods and one double laboratory period per week.
A course in general inorganic chemistry stressing a general understanding
of chemistry and the chemical industry. This sequence is not to be taken by
chemistry majors and will not be accepted in that program, except when this
series is transferred from another college or university and is approved by the
chairman of the department.
204, 205, 206— Organic Chemistry. Five hours each.
Three theory and two three -hour laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 103 or 123.
A course intended to give the student a knowledge of the fundamental
principles of the compounds of carbon. Reactions of organic compounds, their
derivatives, their nomenclature, classification, relationships and general appli-
cations. Required of chemistry majors.
251 — Organic Chemistry. Four hours.
Three theory periods and one double laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 103 or 123.
»7
College of Arts and Sciences
A short course in organic chemistry designed for students majoring in
home economics. Aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons; the applications of
organic chemistry to the home.
252 — Food Chemistry. Four hours.
Three theory periods and one double laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 251.
A brief course in the composition and properties of foods; proteins, carbo-
hydrates, fats, and salts. For Home Economics students.
253 — Physiological Chemistry. Four hours.
Three theory and one double laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 252.
A course designed for home economics students, with emphasis on a study
of the chemistry of the human body.
304, 305 — Analytical Chemistry. Four hours each.
One theory period and three double laboratory periods per week. One hour
recitation.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 103 or 123, preferably 103, concurrently with 401
and 402.
A course intended to give a knowledge of chemical equilibrium and the
theories of quantitative analysis and a study of the techniques necessary in
making gravimetric and volumetric determinations with an introduction to
instrumental analysis.
370 — Pre -Medical Quantitative Analysis. Four hours.
Two theory periods. Six hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 206.
Not to be taken by chemistry majors.
371, 372— Physical Chemistry for Pre -Medical and Biological Sciences Stu-
dents. Four hours each.
Three theory periods and one double laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 103, Chemistry 305 or 370.
Those topics of physical chemistry of immediate application to the prob-
lems of pre -medical and biological work form the basis of this course, the gas
laws, kinetics, equilibrium and free energy, electro-chemistry, pH, buffers,
surface phenomena, colloids, and membrane phenomena.
Not to be taken by chemistry majors.
401-G401, 402-G402, 403 -G403— Physical Chemistry. Four hours each.
Three hours theory and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 276 and Chemistry 206.
A mathematical treatment of the laws governing chemical and physical
changes. A study of the fundamental principles of chemistry and physics in
their relation to each other.
404-G404— Chemical Literature. One hours.
One lecture per week.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.
The selection and use of the reference materials of chemistry; periodicals,
journals, texts, patents, and other sources of information.
405-G405 — Instrumental Analysis. Five hours.
Three hours lecture and four hours laboratory or library per week.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 206, 305, 402.
A course in the theory and use of analytical instruments such as colori-
meters, polarimeters, ultraviolet, visible and infrared spectrophotometers, gas
chromatographs, etc.
88
Communication
406-G406 — Qualitative Organic Analysis. Five hours.
Two hours lecture and eight hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 206.
Emphasis on the systematic identification of pure organic chemicals and
the analysis of mixtures.
425-G425 — Survey of Biochemistry. Five hours.
Three hours lecture, four hours laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: 206.
431, 432 — Inorganic Chemistry. Four hours each.
Three hours lecture plus one three-hour laboratory period.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 403.
Theoretical aspects of valency, stereo chemistry, oxidation potentials, acid-
base theories, nonaqueous solvents, coordination compounds, and nuclear chem-
istry.
474-G474 — History of Chemistry. Four hours.
Four hour theory per week.
Prerequisite: Senior College standing.
496 — Special Projects I. 1 to 4 hours.
Prerequisite: Calculus, Chemistry 206, 403, 405.
Available to chemistry majors during their last two quarters of residence,
upon recommendation of the faculty of the Department of Chemistry. A course
in library and laboratory research on a problem chosen in consultation with
the adviser.
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATION
Ben A. Chappell, Chairman
Beauboeuf, Buckley, Ellis, George, Horton, Strange, Tucker, Willis
The Department offers majors in the following areas of study: Communica-
tion, Public Address, Journalism, Radio -Television, and General Speech Educa-
tion. All majors and minors are urged to contact the Department Chairman, or
appropriate subdivision director, for assistance in planning their degree pro-
grams. Any changes must have the written consent of the Department Chair-
man.
All majors are required to participate in at least one of the three activities
within the Department: debate, radio, or journalism.
Majors and minors are responsible for fulfilling the Basic College core and
College of Arts and Sciences' requirements in addition to the specific require-
ments listed in the appropriate sections below.
Communication
Students majoring in Communication are required to complete 48 hours.
Majors should follow the prescribed program listed below.
Students desiring a minor in Communication should work out a program
in conjunction with the Department and their major field adviser. A suggested
program would include: PA 200, 430, 447; JOU 421, 422, 423; RTV 121, 422, 445.
Major requirements:
PA 200, 341, 430, 447 16
JOU 311, 421, 422, 423 16
RTV 422, 445 8
Departmental electives 8
8 9
College of Arts and Sciences
Minor requirements:
An academic minor selected with the Department's approval from one of
the following areas: marketing; general business; mathematics; psychology;
English; social sciences: history, sociology, geography, political science. Students
desiring other minor programs may so petition to the Department Chairman.
Public Relations Minor
Students outside the Department may secure a minor in Public Relations
with the following recommended program:
PA 200, 350, 430, 447 16
JOU 421, 422, 423 12
28
PUBLIC ADDRESS
Students majoring in Public Address are required to complete 40 hours.
Required courses include: 101, 230, 341, and 361. Other courses are to be se-
lected with the approval of the Director of Public Address. Course programs
will be tailored to individual needs or to specified vocational preparation.
Students minoring in Public Address are required to complete 28 hours, of
which PA 101, 230, and 341 are required. All minor programs are to be selected
with the approval of the Director of Public Address.
Public Address majors may elect minor programs in any area approved by
the University. Recommended minors include: psychology, marketing, manage-
ment, political science, history, sociology, or mathematics.
PUBLIC ADDRESS COURSES (PA)
101 — Oral Communication. Four hours.
Fundamentals of speaking and listening. Emphasis on research, organiza-
tion, and presentation of ideas.
Ill — Argumentation and Debate. Four hours.
Analysis of the principles of argumentation with emphasis on the prepara-
tion of cases on national problems, issue development, and refutation. Will
satisfy core requirements.
200 — Survey of Mass Communication. Four hours.
Introduction to public address, radio-television, and journalism as commu-
nication media; emphasizes common methodology of symbol transference.
201 — Parliamentary Procedure. Two hours.
230 — Voice and Diction. Four hours.
A course designed to improve delivery. Exercises in pronunciation, enun-
ciation, volume control and removal of regional diction errors.
250 — Advanced Oral Communication. Four hours.
Prerequisite: PA 101 or consent of instructor.
Advanced performance course to provide proficiency in research, oral com-
position, delivery, and audience adaptation. Designed for students desiring
specialized training in oral communication of ideas.
310 — Forensics. One hour. (May be repeated for six hours credit.)
Intercollegiate forensic activity. Only two hours can be counted toward
meeting Public Address degree requirements,
341 — Persuasion. Four hours.
Humor, personality, motivation, reasoning, and evidence in their relation-
ship to opinion and attitude change. Study of research in persuasion in adver-
tising, social psychology, public opinion and propaganda, and rhetoric. Practical
problems in the design and presentation of persuasive messages.
9°
Communication
350 — Mass Media and Public Opinion. Four hours.
An analysis of the interdependent relationships between the structures,
techniques, and purposes of the mass media and public opinion. Also investi-
gates the influence of the media on social issues, cultural values, and consumer
preferences.
361 — Discussion and Group Leadership. Four hours.
Methods from dynamic interaction, sociometry, sociodrama, and other
aspects of group work as related to communication in small management, busi-
ness and professional, and community service groups; development of leader-
ship ability and integration in groups.
370 — Speech Composition. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Designed for the improvement of oral and written style; performance as
well as theory.
430-G430 — Business and Industrial Communication. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Survey of problems and principles of communication within business and
industrial organizations and professional associations.
432-G432 — Symbolic Function in Persuasion. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Synthesis of communication methodologies from general semantics, field
theory and cybernetics; application to interdisciplinary problems.
438-G438 — Theories of Speech Behavior. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Interrelationships of psychology and communications, including Communi-
cation theory, Information Theory, and psycholinguistics.
441-G441 — Advanced Persuasion. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor or PA 341.
447-G447 — Theories of Mass Communication. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor or PA 200.
Analysis of similarities and differences of process, elements, and effects
among interpersonal, newspaper, radio, and television; emphasis on construc-
tion and analysis of communication models.
451-G451— Ethos. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor or PA 341, PA 441.
Effect of the communicator's personality on the reception and acceptance
of persuasive messages.
453-G453 Campaign Speaking. Four hours.
A study of voter-candidate relationship and issue development. Taught
during fall quarter of election years only, state or national.
461-G461 — Advanced Discussion. Four hours.
Prerequisite: PA 361.
Application of recent research in areas such as group dynamics to the
problem -solving group; emphasis on group leadership.
JOURNALISM
Students majoring in Journalism are required to complete 40 hours. Re-
quired courses include: 102, 103, 300, 330, and 401. Majors may elect to spe-
cialize in news-editorial, public relations, or advertising.
A minor program in journalism consists of a minimum of 28 hours. Courses
should be approved by the Director of Journalism.
9 1
College of Arts and Sciences
All majors and minors are required to do practical work on the Student
Printz. Others are invited to participate in the publication of the paper.
JOU 102 and 103 are prerequisites for all advanced courses unless waived
by the Director of Journalism.
JOURNALISM COURSES (JOU)
101 — Introduction to Journalism. Two hours.
History, organization, techniques, and responsibilities of the media of mass
communication, with emphasis on the newspaper. A first course for those stu-
dents who have had little or no journalistic experience at the high school level.
102 — Beginning Reporting. Four hours.
The study of gathering news and writing simple news stories. Study of
leads, story structure, rewrites, follow-up assignments, polishing stories.
103 — Intermediate Reporting. Four hours.
Writing of complex and special story types: speeches, conventions, inter-
views, law courts, business, government, politics, criticism, features, society,
sports, and others.
300 — Journalism Laboratory. One hour. (May be repeated).
Practical analysis of each issue of the Student Printz. Only four hours may
be applied toward fulfilling major requirements; only two hours toward ful-
filling minor requirements.
301 — Copy Reading. Four hours.
Introduction to copy reading, headline writing and make-up. Intensive
practice in the principles and techniques of copy reading.
302 — Advanced Editing. Four hours.
Intensive practice in preparing all types of news copy for publication.
303— Newspaper Design and Make-up. Four hours.
Prerequisite: JOU 301.
A study of the principles and mechanics of make-up, including a brief
history of printing and a study.
311 — Feature Writing I. Four hours.
Procedure and practice in gathering material for the writing of feature
stories. Prerequisite: 102 or consent of instructor.
312 — Feature Writing II. Four hours.
A more intensive writing course with the focus upon the preparation of
feature stories for magazines.
330 — Press Photography. Four hours.
The relationship of news photography in journalism; the use of simpler
cameras, and the developing and printing of pictures. Elements of writing cut-
lines and captions.
332 — Advanced Press Photography. Four hours.
Advanced developing and printing of photographs. Contemporary problems
in photojournalism. Pictures for wire transmission. Discussion of latest tech-
niques, including color.
341, 342, 343 — Newspaper Advertising I, II, III. Four hours each quarter.
Principles and functions of advertising with emphasis on selling and pro-
motion, preparation of advertising copy and layouts for newspaper.
355 — Editorial Writing. Four hours.
Procedures and techniques of writing editorials with emphasis upon atti-
tudes, policies, and style.
400 — History of Journalism. Four hours.
Communication
Development of the newspaper in the United States from 1690 to present.
The relationship of social, political, and economic factors to the evolution of
the American press.
401 — Law of the Press. Four hours.
A study of the precedents and present laws governing the press, radio,
advertising and photography. Libel, privilege, right of privacy and constitu-
tional guarantees.
402 — Advanced Reporting. Four hours>
A study of interpretative reporting. Completing the account, explanations,
predictions, providing perspective. Current news problems.
403 — Specialized Reporting. Four hours.
Governmental affairs get major emphasis. Labor, science, business, agricul-
ture, social problems, sports, society and home economics are also covered.
421 -G421— Public Relations. Four hours.
Total relationship of the institution to its audiences. Origin and develop-
ment of public relations.
422-G422— Publicity Methods. Four hours.
An analysis of the media of communication and their relation to publicity.
Mechanics of news releases, press conferences, photographs. Publicity function
in the public relations department.
423-G423— Public Relations Practices. Four hours.
Internal and external publications in industry and institutions. Contem-
porary problems of public relations. Prerequisite: JOU 421.
455 — Newspaper Organization and Management. Four hours.
Focuses on the managerial aspects of newspaper production.
RADIO-TELEVISION
Students majoring in Radio-Television are required to complete 40 hours.
Required courses include: 121. 320, 321, 324, 424. 445. Other required courses
include Public Address 101 and 230, and Journalism 102. Other RTV courses are
to be selected with the approval of the Director of Radio-Television.
Students minoring in Radio-Television are required to complete 28 hours,
of which RTV 121 is required. All minor programs are to be selected with the
approval of the Director of Radio -Television.
Radio-Television majors may elect minor programs in any area approved
by the University. Recommended minors include: public address, journalism,
general business, marketing, history, psychology, or political science.
RTV 121. or its equivalent, is a prerequisite for all advanced courses in
Radio-Television.
RADIO-TELEVISION COURSES (RTV)
121 — Introduction to Radio-TV. Four hours.
A survey of broadcasting. Students will participate in the operation of
WMSU.
320 — Radio Laboratory. One hours. (May be repeated).
Operation of the campus radio station, WMSU. Practical work in all areas
of station operation. Only four hours may be used to fulfill degree require-
ments for majors. Four additional hours will count as electives. Prerequisite:
Consent of the instructor.
321 — Radio and Television Announcing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 121.
324— Radio and TV News. Four hours.
93
College of Arts and Sciences
Pictorial and audio reporting of current events.
326— TV Production. Four hours.
A course designed to give the advanced broadcasting student an introduc-
tion into the area of video. Class meets at WDAM-TV.
350 — Programming Techniques. Four hours.
Theory and practice of effective commercial and educational radio-televi-
sion programming. Prerequisite: 121, 321.
360 — Special Techniques in Production. Four hours.
Open to non-majors and non-minors. Analysis of programming in special
areas; education, religion, public service, and politics.
422 — Radio and Television Advertising and Writing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 121.
424-G424 — Radio and Television Law. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
426-G426 — Radio Station Management. Four hours.
Prerequisites: 12 hours of RTV courses above 121.
445-G445 — Audience Analysis. Four hours.
Characteristics of audiences, measurement of attitudes and a study of polling
devices and methodologies.
450 — Advanced Television Production. Four hours.
Student participation in producing a weekly television series.
Prerequisite: 326.
460 — Problems in Broadcast Management. Four hours.
Analysis of functional relationships in broadcasting with emphasis on union
agreements, community service and the financial structure of broadcasting
stations.
492 — Special Problems in Radio-Television. One to four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Research on specific problems.
General Speech Education
Students desiring to teach speech on the secondary level are required to
take 36 hours in the Department of Communication, a 28 -hour minor in the
Department of Theatre, and fulfill the appropriate Secondary Education re-
quirements listed in that section of the bulletin.
Students should plan their program in cooperation with the department
chairmen of these three areas.
Major requirements:
PA 101, 111, 230, 341, 361 20
Public Address electives 12
RTV 121 , 4
36
Minor requirements:
THE 111, 201, 202, 203, 302, 413, 418 28
SED requirements as listed in the current bulletin.
94
Computer Science
DEPARTMENT OF
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND STATISTICS (CSS)
Barker, Green, Russum
The Computer Science and Statistics Department is designed to meet the
great demand for trained personnel in data processing, electronic computers,
and statistics in business, space and missile programs, government, and the
academic world. Current course offerings provide for an academic minor at
the undergraduate level.
COMPUTER SCIENCE COURSES (CSS)
200— Statistical Methods I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 112 or 102.
Sampling and sampling distributions: normal distributions; F, T, Chi-
square tests; confidence limits; analysis of variations.
201— Statistical Methods II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: CSS 200.
Correlations, regression, analysis of covariance, polynomial curve fitting,
least squares.
210 — Introduction to Programming Laboratory. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 102 or 112.
The use of problem oriented languages and peripheal equipment. Pro-
gramming of problems and use of the computer.
300 — Introduction to Linear Programming Techniques. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 171 and CSS 200.
Vectors and Euclidean spaces: linear transformations; convex sets and
hyperplanes; theory of simplex method; the transportation problem.
310 — Digital Computer Programming. Four hours.
Prerequisite: CSS 200.
A study of the theory and applications of programming languages for
digital computers. Programming with basic language of binary and binary
coded decimal computers, symbolic and compiler programming languages.
400 — Numerical Analysis I. Four hours. (Also listed as Mathematics 406 and
cannot be taken for credit but once.)
Prerequisite: Calculus — Mathematics 278.
Finite -difference interpolation; numerical differentiation and integration;
methods of solving linear and non-linear equations and systems of such equa-
tions, matrix computations.
401 — Numerical Analysis II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Differential Equations — Mathematics 305.
Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations and systems of such
equations both initial and boundry value.
402 — Numerical Analysis III. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Numerical Analysis II — CSS 401.
Parabolic, elleptic and hyperbolic partial differential equations; the eigen-
value problem; stability.
410 — Construction of Compilers. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Digital Computer Programming — CSS 310.
A study of single and multipass compilers with emphasis on the use of
Polish notation; macros; writing of relocatible subroutines; Fortran IE and IV
compilers.
420-G420 — Theory of Approximations. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Numerical Analysis III — CSS 402.
Interpolation; reminder theory; convergence theorems; uniform approxima-
tions; orthogonal polynomials and economization of power series.
95
Collesre of Arts and Sciences
430-G430 — Advanced Digital Commiter Programming. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Digital Computer Programming — CSS 310.
Advanced Programming techniques using machine and symbolic languages;
selected automatic languages such as ALGOL, COBOL, IPL*V and SIMSCRIPT.
DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS (BA)
Louis Dixon, Acting Chairman
Baker, Greene, Johnson, Lee, McQuiston
The economics program is designed to provide students with the specialized
tools and knowledge required to analyze the important economic issues in
human society. The curriculum affords the opportunity to achieve intelligent
citizenship, private employment, governmental employment, and preparation
for graduate study.
Economics is an ideal minor and is highly complementary to a major in any
social science field. The recommended minor includes Economics 252, 330, 340,
345, 440, 470, and one elective in economics,
A student majoring in Economics or Foreign Trade and working toward
the B.A. degree must complete the requirements as outlined below. These in-
clude the Basic College core, the College of Arts and Sciences requirements,
the Economics Department requirements, and the minor area requirements.
Economics course descriptions are found under the Department offerings
listed in the School of Business Administration section of this catalog.
SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE
Freshman Year
Hours
English 101, 102, 103— Freshman Composition 12
History 101, 102— World Civilization 8
Political Science 101 — American Government 4
Mathematics 101, 102— College Algebra or MAT 100, 112 8
Science 12
Military Science for men 3
Physical Education (non-credit)
Basic College Elective (for non-military science students) 4
47-48
Sophomore Year
Philosophy 210 or 101 4
English 201, 202, 203 12
Public Address 101, 111; Music 165,
Art 120 (elect two courses from two fields) 8
Economics 251, 252 8
Geography 103, or Psychology 201 or Sociology 103 or 201 4
Foreign Language 12
Military Science for Men 3
Physical Education (non-credit)
Basic College elective (for non-military science students) 4
51-52
Departmental Requirements
Major in Economics 36
Economics 310 — Economic History of the U. S 4
Economics 330 — Money and Banking 4
Economics 340 — Price Theory 4
Economics 345 — Income Theory 4
Economics 405 — Quantitative Analysis in Economics, I 4
9 6
English
Economics 406— Quantitative Analysis in Economics, II 4
Economics 435 — International Trade Theory 4
Economics 440 — Economic Growth 4
Economics 470 — Comparative Economic Systems 4
♦Minor requirements and electives** 56-58
Hours
*A minor of at least 28 hours may be selected from any department in the University in
which a major is offered. Free electives may be taken in any department of the Univer-
sity.
**Students considering graduate work in economics should consult frequently with de-
partment advisers, and are urged to take some mathematics courses beyond the minimum
core requirements.
Major in Foreign Trade 68
Accounting 201, 202, 203— Principles of Accounting 12
Finance 310, 311 — Business Law 8
Political Science 457 or 458 — International Politics or
International Organization 4
History or Geography (elective at 300-400 level) 4
Economics 330— Money and Banking 4
Economics 340 — Price Theory 4
Economics 345 — Income Theory 4
Economics 435 — International Trade Theory 4
Economics 436 — International Economics Relations 4
Economics 470 — Comparative Economic Systems 4
Economics (Elective) * 4
Foreign Language (three courses in addition to the
B.A. Language requirement) 12
Electives 24-26
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH AND LITERATURE (ENG)
Charles Moorman, Chairman
Adams, Bahr, Breland, Brinegar, M. Brown, R. Brown, Downey, Elkins,
Eubanks, Garrow, Kay, McRaven, Milner, Orange, Payne, Phillips,
Porter, Reynolds, Sims, Swetman, Watson, Webb, Whittington
Requirements for Major
A student majoring in English may elect one of several alternative plans.
He may work toward the B.A., the B.S. teaching, or the B.S. non-teaching de-
gree. For information concerning Master or Ph.D. degrees, consult the Graduate
Bulletin. The student's choice of program should be determined by his plans
for the future and in close conjunction with his adviser.
A. Curriculum — Core and College Requirements
The student must select the appropriate core and additional college courses
required for his degree as listed on preceding pages of this catalog.
B. Curriculum — B.S. Teaching Degree Requirements
In addition to the departmental requirements listed under C below and
the general requirements for a Class A teaching certificate, the English major
working toward the B.S. teaching degree must satisfy the following special
requirements for a Class A teaching certificate: American literature, four hours
(preferably English 300); English literature, four hours (preferably English
304, 305, or 306); Shakespeare, four hours (English 423 or 425); and advanced
grammar, four hours (English 433).
C. Curriculum — Departmental Requirements
The student wishing to major in English, regardless of his degree plan,
must take 45 hours in the Department of English, of which 24 hours must be in
courses numbered 300 or above. Required of all majors are English 101. 102,
103, 201, 202, 300, 304, 305, and 306. English 101, 102, 103, and 8 hours of sopho-
97
College of Arts and Sciences
more literature are prerequisites for any English courses numbered 300 or
above.
D. Curriculum — Minor and Electives
In addition to the core and college requirements, the certification require-
ments (where applicable), and the departmental requirements, the student
majoring in English must also complete the requirements for a minor. The
English major wishing to qualify as a part-time librarian will need 16 hours of
library science— LS 302, 303, 315, 316. Courses not used to fulfill any of these
requirements are free electives and may be taken in any department of the
University.
Requirements for Minors
The student minoring in English must take 32 hours in the Department of
English, of which 12 hours must be in courses numbered 300 or above. Recom-
mended for the minor are English 101, 102, 103, 201, 202, and 12 hours from
English 300, 304, 305, and 306.
ENGLISH COURSES (ENG)
23 — Writing Laboratory. No credit.
101, 102, 103— English Composition I, II, III. Four hours each. Each of the
three courses is a prerequisite for the next.
201, 202, 203— Introduction to Literature I, II, III. Four hours each. English
101, 102, and 103 are prerequisites for this sophomore series.
300 — American Literature I. Four hours.
301 — American Literature II. Four hours.
304 — English Literature from Chaucer to the Restoration. Four hours.
305 — Seventeenth- and Eighteenth- Century English. Four hours.
306 — Nineteenth- and Twentieth -Century English Literature. Four hours.
332 — Advanced Expository Prose. Four hours.
338-339— Creative Writing. Eight hours. 4-4.
Admission by permission of the instructor.
346 — The Literature of the Bible. Four hours.
406-G406 — History of the English Language. Four hours.
408-G408— The Structure of Modern English. Four hours.
410-G410— Colonial and Revolutionary American Literature, 1640-1820.
Four hours.
414-G414 — The American Literary Renaissance, 1820-1870. Four hours.
416-G416— The Rise of Realism in American Literature, 1870-1920.
Four hours.
418-G41 8— American Literature Between the World Wars, 1920-1940.
Four hours.
423-G423 — Shakespeare's Comedies and Tragicomedies. Four hours.
425-G425 — Shakespeare's Histories and Tragedies. Four hours.
427-G427— The English Novel. Four hours.
430-G430, 431-G431, 432-G432— Tutorial in Comparative Literature.
Twelve hours. 4-4-4.
433-G433, 434-G434— Advanced Grammar and Rhetoric. Eight hours. 4-4.
English 433 (formerly 330) places emphasis upon mastery of the fundamentals
of grammar to achieve effective instruction at the secondary school level. It is
a prerequisite for 434-G434, which emphasizes recent non-traditional trends in
the teaching of grammar and composition.
435-G435, 436-G436— Nineteenth- Century Poetry and Prose. Eight hours.
4-4.
443-G443 — Reading from World Literature I. Four hours.
444-G444 — Reading from World Literature n. Four hours.
445-G445 — Literary Criticism. Four hours.
447-G447— Major Writers of Eighteenth Century. Four hours.
9 s
Foreign Language
451-G451 — Restoration and Eighteenth- Centnry Drama. Four hours.
473-G473 — Analysis of Poetry. Four hours.
474-G474 — The Modern European Novel. Four hours.
479-G479— Development of English Drama to 1642. Four hours.
480-G480— Modern Poetry. Four hours.
483-G483— Modern Drama. Four hours.
485-G485— Literature of the South. Four hours.
486-G486 — Seventeenth- Century Prose and Poetry. Four hours.
487-G487— Milton. Four hours.
488-G488— Chaucer. Four hours.
489-G489— Literature and the Arts. Four hours.
Prerequisite: At least one English course numbered 300 or above in a pre-
vious quarter, or consent of the instructor.
DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES
Thomas T. Chisholm, Chairman
Claudel, Heiss, Johnson, Lozada, Morrow, Neumann, Scheel, Secondini, Zeyss
Foreign Languages Majors and Minors: Candidates for either the Bachelor
of Arts or the Bachelor of Science degree may choose a major or minor in
French, German, or Spanish. The requirement for a major, in terms of hours,
is 24 quarter hours in courses numbered above 300. Two college years (24
hours) or its equivalent in high school and college courses is the prerequisite
to beginning study at the level of the major or minor. The requirement for a
minor is 12 hours above 300, with a minimum total of 28 hours.
Suggested Curriculum for Bachelor of Arts Degree
with a Major in French, German, or Spanish
Freshman and Sophomore Years
Hours
Courses listed in B.A. Core
The first two years of major language* 24
Junior and Senior Years
Language to complete major** 12 to 24
Minor and electives 44 to 56
*Students who have had two years of a language in high school will take a placement
test in order to determine the level at which they will begin their language study in
the University.
**The phonetics course is required for French and Spanish majors.
Suggested Curriculum for Bachelor of Science Degree
with a Major in French, German, or Spanish
Freshman and Sophomore Years
Courses listed in B.S. Core
The first two years of major language* 24
Junior and Senior Years
Language to complete major** 12 to 24
Education 120, 313, 4511, 469, 4811 28
Psychology 319, 332 8
99
College of Arts and Sciences
Fine arts 4
Electives 30 to 42
♦Students who have had two years of a language in high school will take a placement
test in order to determine the level at which they will begin their language study in
the University.
**The phonetics course is required for French and Spanish majors.
Related Majors: The major in foreign trade (see Economics, B.A.) includes
a study of the Spanish language and of Latin-American literature and culture
and automatically gives the student a second major in Spanish. Credit in French
is accepted for Latin-American students who major in foreign trade.
Language Laboratory: Language courses on the first and second year levels
will meet five hours per week: four hours regular class sessions and one hour
in the laboratory.
Registration for Courses: It is understood that a student, whether studying
a foreign language as a part of his core curriculum, as a requirement in a re-
lated major, or as a major or minor in itself, will begin the language in the
University at the level of his achievement at the time of entrance (to be de-
termined by a placement test). If he should be placed in a language course
above the beginning level, he will not receive University hours of credit for
the courses not studied in the University.
Credit Transferred from Foreign Schools: Students wishing to transfer
language credit from institutions outside the United States may be required
to undergo examination to determine how to equate such credit and to estab-
lish the level at which study might be resumed here.
Class Attendance: Because of the special nature of teaching and learning
a foreign language, a maximum amount of "contact time" is essential. Foreign
language students, therefore, are expected to attend all classes except those
from which they are excused to reason of illness, administrative sanction,
or the judgment of the instructor. The student is responsible for the home-
work assigned regardless of his reason for missing a class.
FOREIGN LANGUAGE COURSES
FRENCH (FRE)
Chisholm, Claudel, Johnson, Morrow, Zeyss
101, 102, 103— First Year French. Four hours each.
201, 202, 203— Second Year French. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: 103, or the equivalent, and consent of the instructor.
305, 306, 307 — Introduction to French Literature. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: 203, or the equivalent.
341 — Beginning Conversation French. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 203, or 103 and consent of the instructor.
342 — Advanced Conversation and Phonetics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 203.
343 — Advanced Grammar and Composition. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 203.
405, G405 — French Classicism. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 307.
406, G406 — French Romanticism. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 307.
407, G407 — French Realism and Naturalism. Four hours. ics should elect physics as a minor and complete mathematics
through differential equations; those students who plan to specialize in min-
eralogy, petrology, or geochemistry are urged to choose chemistry as a minor;
those planning to specialize in paleontology or palynology should elect biology
as a minor.
GEOLOGY MAJOR
The following courses are required for the major: Hours
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 (or 121, 122, 123) 15
Mathematics through analytical geometry 12-16
Physics 101, 102, 103 (or 201, 202, 203) 15
Geology 101, 103, 260, 302, 303, 310, 314, 330, 401, or 420, plus
8 quarter hours chosen from other departmental offerings 44
Geology 480 (Summer Field Camp) 9
At the discretion of the Department nine specified quarter hours from
geology, mathematics, physics, chemistry, or biology may be substituted for
Geology 480. Normally this substitution is permitted only for women students
and physically handicapped students.
104
Geography and Geology
The Department has a cooperative arrangement with the Gulf Coast Re-
search Laboratory. Certain courses in marine sedimentation may be taken
at the Laboratory; these are generally taught in the summer.
GEOLOGY MINOR
The minor should include the following geology courses: 101, 103, 260, 302,
303, and an additional 8 quarter hours chosen from geology courses numbered
above 300 for a total of 28 quarter hours.
PROGRAM OF STUDY
Freshman and Sophomore Years
Complete core requirements which should include a year of Hours
chemistry and mathematics through Math 275
Geology 101, 103, 260 12
Junior Year
Physics 101, 102, 103 (or 201, 202, 203) 12
Geology 310, 314, 330, and 401 16
Minor and electives 20
Summer field camp 9
Total 57
Senior Year
Geology 302, 303, 420 12
Geology electives 8
Minor and electives 28
Total 48
SECONDARY EDUCATION
The Department of Geology offers a major designed for the student who
seeks certification in those states which teach earth science in their secondary
schools. The geology courses in the curriculum are 101, 103, 260, 302, 303, 310,
or 314, 401, or 420, and two 4-hour courses chosen from the other departmental
offerings. The students should also have a year of chemistry or physics, mathe-
matics through trigonometry, and a year of astronomy. It is expected that the
student choosing this major will not continue on to graduate school in the field
of geology.
GEOLOGY COURSES (GLY)
101 — Physical Geology. Four hours.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory.
An introduction to earth science, including the physical processes respon-
sible for shaping the major features of the landscape; laboratory study of com-
mon minerals and rocks and various geologic processes. A half-day field trip
may be required.
103 — Historical Geology. Four hours.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory; field trip required.
Prerequisite: Geology 101.
A study of earth history as revealed in the character and fossil content of
rocks.
105
College of Arts and Sciences
105 — Introduction to the Geology of the Southeastern States. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory; field trips.
Prerequisites: Geology 101, 103.
An introduction to the geology of the southeastern states; field trips to
study stratigraphy of eastern Mississippi and western Alabama.
260 — Introduction to Minerals and Rocks. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisite: Geology 101.
Sight recognition of the more common minerals with intensive study of the
diagnostic rock-forming minerals; elementary crystallography; introduction to
rocks.
302 — Invertebrate Paleontology. Four hours.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisite: Geology 103 and permission of instructor.
Invertebrate fossils from the Protozoa through Mollusca with attention to
taxonomy, morphological features, geologic distribution, and paleoecology of
the important ordinal groups.
303 — Invertebrate Paleontology. Four hours.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisite: Geology 302.
Invertebrate fossils from the Annelida through the Conodontophoridia.
310 — Mineralogy. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 260 and either Chemistry 103 or Chemistry 123. The
chemistry may be taken concurrently.
Physical, descriptive, chemical, and determinative mineralogy.
311 — Mineralogy. Four hours.
Three hours lecture and two hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Mineralogy 310 and Math 103.
Introduction to optical mineralogy.
314 — Petrology. Four hours.
Three hours lecture and two hours laboratory.
Prerequisite: Geology 260; Geology 310 recommended.
A study of the origin, description, and classification of igneous, sedimen-
tary, and metamorphic rocks.
330 — Structural Geology. Four hours.
Three hours lecture and two hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 103 and Mathematics 103.
Principles of rock deformation.
401 — Principles of Stratigraphy. Four hours.
Four hours lecture.
Prerequisites: Geologv 103. 260, 330.
402-G402 — Stratigraphy of North America I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Geology 401.
Stratigraphy of the Precambrian and Paleozoic eras.
403 -G403— Stratigraphy of North America II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Geology 401.
Stratigraphy of the Mesozoic and Cenozoic eras.
420-G420^SedimentoIogy. Four hours.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 101, 103, and 260.
Study of sedimentary materials, their formation, transportation, deposition,
and lithification; field trips.
106
History
422-G422— Petroleum Geology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 260 and 330 and permission of instructor.
The origin, occurrence, and accumulation of oil and natural gas.
445-G445 — Economic Geology. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and two hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 310, 314, and 330.
Principles of ore deposits; introduction to fuels and non -metallic mineral
deposits.
452-G452 — Physical Marine Geology. IY2 hours per week, but not to exceed
6 weeks or 9 quarter hours. Gulf Coast Research Laboratory.
Prerequisite: Geology 103, 310, and 420.
A general introduction to the physical processes at work on the shores of
Mississippi Sound with emphasis on the erosional and depositional effects of
waves and currents at different stages of tide.
453-G453 — Chemical Marine Geology, 1% hours per week, but not to ex-
ceed 6 weeks or 9 quarter hours. Gulf Coast Research Laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 103, 310, 420, and Chemistry 201 and 203.
Supervised research in the chemistry of the waters and sediments of Mis-
sissippi Sound. {
454-G454 — Problems in Marine Sedimentation. 1V 2 hours per week, but not
to exceed 6 weeks or 9 quarter hours. Gulf Coast Research Laboratory.
Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.
Supervised study of selected aspects of marine sedimentation along the
Gulf Coast.
461-G461 — Petrography. Four hours.
Two hours lecture and four hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 311 and 314.
Systematic study of rocks by means of the polarizing microscope.
468-G468 — Micropaleontology. Four hours.
One hour lecture and six hours laboratory. ||
Prerequisites: Geology 302 and 303. .|
Taxonomy, morphology, and stratigraphic use of Foraminifera. ™
469-G469 — Micropaleontology. Four hours.
One hour lecture and six hours laboratory.
Prerequisites: Geology 302 and 303.
Taxonomy, morphology, and stratigraphic use of Ostracoda.
480 — Geology Summer Field Camp. Nine hours.
iy 2 hours credit per week in the field.
Prerequisites: Geology 101, 103, 260, and 330.
Geologic field methods, collection of field data, and compilation of geo-
logical reports.
485 — Problems in Geology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Senior standing and permission of the department head.
Independent study or research designed for the needs of individual stu-
dents.
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY (HIS)
J. Treadweli Davis, Chairman
Brent, Fike, Gonzales, R. Harper, T. Harper, Jackson, McCarty, Moseley,
Robinson, Scarborough
The Department of History participates in programs leading to the degrees
of the B.A., the B.S., the M.A., the M.S., and the Ph.D. For the Masters and
107
College of Arts and Sciences
Ph.D. degrees please consult the Graduate Bulletin.
Major Requirements
A baccalaureate student majoring in history may elect one of three degree
plans: the BA.; the B.S. Non-Teaching; or the B.S. Teaching degree with a
license in social studies for secondary schools. His choice of degree program
should be determined by his plans for the future and in close conjunction with
his adviser.
A. Curriculum — Basic College Core
The student working toward any degree must include in his curriculum
the required core subjects.
B. Curriculum — Professional Requirements
The History major working toward the B.S. Teaching degree with a
secondary school license in social studies must include in his program (1) the
education courses required for the Class A teaching certificate (Education will
normally be the minor for a History major seeking a teacher's license); and
(2) the following social studies courses, either as core or as electives: Eco-
nomics 200 (or 2al and 252), Geography 370, Political Science 101 (required as
core), History 367, and Sociology 103 or 201.
C. Curriculum — Departmental Requirements
The student majoring in History, regardless of his degree plan, mus.t take
History 101, 102, 251, and 252. History 101 and 102 will not count toward the
36 hours required for a major or toward the 28 hours required for a minor.
Minor Requirements
The student minoring in History must take 28 hours in history courses
numbered above 102. History 101 and 102 are prerequisites for advanced courses
in European History; History 251 and 252 are prerequisites for advanced courses
in U.S. History.
Requirements to teach social studies as a second field
Students wishing to teach social studies in secondary schools as a second
field (most high schools in Mississippi desire teachers certified to teach in more
than one field) should take the following courses, either as core or as electives:
History 101, 102, 251, 252 and 367 20
Secondary Education 451L 4
Political Science 101 (core requirement) 4
Economics 200 (or 251 and 252) 4 or 8
Sociology 103 or 201 4
Geography 370 4
Social studies electives 8 or 4
This list is designed to cover the principal social studies fields a high school
teacher might be called upon to teach. It does not meet requirements for a
minor, however, since a minor requires 28 hours in the same subject.
HISTORY COURSES (HIS)
Students should not enroll in advanced history courses without having
taken the appropriate European or American survey courses: History 101 and
102, or History 251 and 252.
Three hundred level courses should usually precede four hundred level
courses. In no case should a student take a three hundred level course after
having taken a four hundred level course in that specific field.
Economics 310 and Religion 205, 401, and 402 may be elected as History if
approved by the student's adviser.
101— World Civilization to 1648 A.D. Four hours.
102— World Civilization Since 1648 A.D. Four hours.
251— U.S. to 1865. Four hours.
252— U.S. Since 1865. Four hours.
301 — Greek Culture. Four hours.
108
History
303 — Roman Culture. Four hours.
305 — The Early Middle Ages. Four hours.
306— The High Middle Ages. Four hours.
307 — Renaissance. Four hours.
309 — Reformation. Four hours.
311— Europe 1648-1789. Four hours.
320— Early English History. Four hours
322 — Modern English History. Four hours.
330 — Colonial Latin America. Four hours.
332 — Modern Latin America. Four hours.
340 — British Commonwealth. Four hours.
346— Far East Since 1853. Four hours.
348— Africa Since 1800. Four hours.
351 — Colonial America, 1607-1754. Four hours.
353— Revolutionary Era, 1754-1789. Four hours.
355 — Age of Hamilton, Jefferson and Jackson, 1789-1840. Four hours.
357— The Sectional Controversy and the Civil War, 1840-1865. Four hours.
358 — Reconstruction and the Emergence of Modern America, 1865-1898.
Four hours.
359 — The Progressive Era, World War I, Prosperity and Depression, 1898-
1933. Four hours.
361— The New Deal, World War n and Post War America, 1933-present.
Four hours.
367 — Mississippi History. Four hours.
401-G401— Russia to 1917. Four hours
403— G403— Russia Since 1917. Four hours.
405-G405— The Cold War Issues. Four hours.
411-G411 — English Constitutional History. Four hours.
413-G413— Western Intellectual History. Four hours.
421-G421— Athens, Fifth and Fourth Centuries B.C. Four hours.
423-G423— Rome, First Century B.C. and First Century A.D. Four hours. fli
425-G425 — Europe in the Twelfth and Thirteenth Centuries. Four hours. gj
430 -G430— Modern Germany. Four hours.
432-G432 — French Revolution and Napoleon. Four hours.
433-G433— Europe, 1815-1870. Four hours.
434-G434— Europe, 1870-1918, Four hours.
435-G435— Europe, 1918-1939. Four hours.
436-G436— Europe Since 1939. Four hours.
441-G441 — Nineteenth Century Britain. Four hours.
442-G442 — Twentieth Century Britain. Four hours
444-G444— Expansion of Europe, 1450-1815. Four hours.
446-G446 — Expansion of Europe, 1815-present. Four hours.
451-G451— U.S. Intellectual and Social History to 1865. Four hours.
453-G453— U.S. Intellectual and Social History Since 1865. Four hours.
455-G455— The Old South. Four hours.
457-G457— The New South. Four hours.
459-G459 — History of Mexico. Four hours.
465-G465— The Caribbean. Four hours
467-G467-^Argentina, Brazil, and Chile. Four hours.
469-G469— United States Constitutional History to 1861. Four hours.
470-G470— United States Constitutional History Since 1861. Four hours.
475-G475— United States Foreign Relations to 1898. Four hours.
477-G477— United States Foreign Relations Since 1898. Four hours.
480-G480— U.S. Military History. Four hours.
484-G484 — American Political Leaders. Four hours.
109
College of Arts and Sciences
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS (MAT)
Ed Kelly, Jr., Chairman
Crocker, Essary, Felder, Garrow, Martin, Munn, Nicholson, Russum,
Gaston Smith, George Smith, Van Hook, Webster
The Department of Mathematics offers a major and minor for students who
are candidates for the Bachelor of Arts or the Bachelor of Science, the Master
of Arts or the Master of Science degrees. Also, graduate study beyond the Mas-
ter's degree is available, anticipating the granting of the Ph.D. degree in the
near future. For information concerning the Master's degrees and graduate
study beyond the Master's degree, consult the Graduate Bulletin. The courses
required for a baccalaureate major are listed below by sets in order to facili-
tate the proper selection of course sequences.
(a) Mathematics 276, 277, 278, 279
(b) Mathematics 305, 326, 341
(c) Mathematics 401, 406, 407, 411, 415, 416, 418, 420, 423, 424, 425,
426, 431, 435, 441, 442, 443, 461, 462, 471, 472, 473, 484, 485
Requirements for Majors: Hrs.
(1) All courses in set (a) 16
(2) Two courses from set (b) 8
(3) Five courses from set (c) 20
Total 44
Recommendations for Minors: Hrs.
(1) All courses in set (a) 16
(2) Three courses from sets (b) or (c) 12
Total 28
The curriculum of the Department of Mathematics is designed to meet the
following objectives
(i) prepare students for industrial or commercial employment,
(ii) prepare students to teach secondary school mathematics,
(iii) prepare students for graduate study in mathematics.
The following courses are strongly recommended for:
(1) Prospective Elementary School Teachers: 100, 318, 321, 338, 341. If other
courses are desired, 101, 102, 103.
(2) Prospective Teachers of Secondary School Mathematics: The State cer-
tification requirement* in mathematics for a Class A certificate are:
24 semester or 36 quarter hours to include the following:
(i) 15 semester or 24 quarter hours to include algebra, trigonom-
etry, analytical geometry and calculus,
(ii) 9 semester or 12 auarter hours to include at least two of the
following areas: abstract algebra, modern geometry, founda-
tions of mathematics, probability and statistics.
Course? recommended for (ii) are: 326. 341, 401, 407, 420, 423, 471. If other
mathematics courses are desired, the student should take courses that will
prepare him to do graduate work in mathematics.
(3) Mathematics Majors who plan graduate study: 423, 424, 426. 431 441,
442, 443
(4) Mathematics Majors preparing for industrial employment: 406, 411.
415. 416, 418, 420, 425. 4^5. 441. 442. 443 and at least a minor in physics.
The following program is recommended for the first two years of stud}'
toward a baccalaureate degree for mathematics majors:
1IO
Mathematics
FRESHMAN YEAR:
Fall Quarter
Winter Quarter
Spring Quarter
ENG
101
ENG
102
ENG 103
MAT
101
MAT
102
MAT 171
HIS
101
MAT
103
PS 101
PA
101
HIS
102
MUS 165, ART 120
MS
101
MS
102
or HTH 179
PE
—
PE
—
MS 103
PE —
SOPHOMORE YEAR:
ENG
201
ENG 202 or 332 ori 433
PHIL 210
MAT
276
MAT
277
MAT 278
Lab. Science
Lab. Science
Lab. Science
GHY
103
PSY
201
ECO 200 or 251
MS
201
MS
202
MS 203
PE
—
PE
—
PE —
MAT 279 and MAT 305 or MAT 326 or MAT 341 should be taken during
the fall quarter of the junior year. The candidate for a B.S. degree should take
a second year of laboratory science during the junior year.
Students will be expected to adhere to the indicated prerequisites for each
course.
MATHEMATICS COURSES (MAT)
100 — Basic Mathematics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: One unit of high school algebra.
A study of the fundamental concepts of logic, the integers, rational num-
bers, laws of algebra and discrete statistics,
101-102— College Algebra I, II. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: Two units of high school algebra or MAT 100.
103 — Plane Trigonometry. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 101 or its equivalent.
112 — Mathematics for Business and Social Sciences. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Two units of high school algebra or MAT 100.
171 — Analytic Geometry.
Prerequisite: MAT 103.
276, 277, 278, 279— Calculus I, II, III, IV. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: MAT 171 for 276, 276 for 277, 277 for 278, 278 for 279.
305 — Differential Equations I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 279. MAT 305 may be taken concurrently with MAT 279.
318-G318— Basic Concepts of Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers.
Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 100 or its equivalent. (Open only to elementary educa-
tion majors; graduate credit only toward master's degree in education earned
in an in-service course.)
321 -G321— Foundations of Mathematics for Junior High School Teachers.
Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 100 or its equivalent. (Open only to elementary educa-
tion majors; graduate credit only toward master's degree in education earned
in an in-service course.)
326 — Linear Algebra I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 279. MAT 326 may be taken concurrently with MAT 279.
Ill
College of Arts and Sciences
')
338 — History of Mathematics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 276.
341 — Foundations of Mathematics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 277.
A study of set theory, logic and arithmetic of cardinal and ordinal numbers.
401-G401— Geometry. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 341.
406-G406 — Numerical Analysis I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 326.
407-G407 — Number Theory. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 341.
411-G411 — Vector Analysis. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 279.
415-G415 — Differential Equations II. Four hours. ]
Prerequisite: MAT 305 and MAT 326.
416-G416 — Numerical Analysis II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 406 and MAT 305. MAT 416 may be taken concurrently
with MAT 305.
418-G418 — Linear Programing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 326.
420-G420— Statistics and Probability. Four hours. !
Prerequisite: MAT 279 and MAT 341.
423-G423— Modern Algebra I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 341.
A development of the integers; rational, real and complex number systems
with emphasis on their algebraic structure.
424-G424 — Modern Algebra II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 423.
A study of groups rings, vector spaces and algebras.
425-G425 — Fourier Series. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 326 and MAT 305.
426-G426— Linear Algebra H. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 326.
431-G431 — Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 441.
435-G435 — Laplace Transform. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 305.
441-G441, 442-G442, 443-G443— Advanced Calculus I, II, III. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: MAT 279 and MAT 341.
461-G461, 462-G462— Projective Geometry I, II. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: MAT 326 and MAT 401.
471-G471 — General Topology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 279 and MAT 341.
472-G472 — Algebraic Topology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 424 and MAT 471.
473-G473 — Metric Spaces. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 471.
484-G484 — Mechanics I, Statics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 305 and Physics 103 or 203.
485-G485 — Mechanics II, Dynamics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: MAT 484.
Hi
Military Science
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE (MS)
John H. Dale, Sr., Chairman
Connor, Meader, Massey, Roberson, Rouchon, Snead, Weeks, Williams
AUTHORIZATION
The University of Southern Mississippi was authorized by the Department
of the Army to activate a unit of the Senior Division Reserve Officers Training
Corps on April 3, 1950. The unit was organized June 14, 1950, under the au-
thority of the Act of Congress, June 3, 1916, and subsequent amendments
thereto.
MISSION
The mission of the ROTC program is to produce qualified commissioned
officers for the United States Army and to provide citizenship and leadership
training for all male students during their Freshman and Sophomore years in
college.
TRAINING COURSES AND ALLOWANCE
The ROTC program covers four academic years and is divided into two
courses. The basic course consists of Military Science I and II (MS I & II)
is taught during the Freshman and Sophomore years, and the advanced course,
Military Science III and IV (MS III & IV) is taught during the Junior and
Senior years.
The Basic Course
All qualified male freshmen are required to complete the basic course
(MS I & II) as a part of the Basic College Core Curriculum. Once a cadet is
enrolled in the basic course, beginning with the quarter he enters the Uni-
versity, he must continue with the program in successive quarters and com-
plete the requirement within six quarters (including summer school). Only
the Dean of the Basic College may make exceptions to the foregoing.
Military Science I, first-year military science, consists of one hour of class-
room instruction and two hours of leadership laboratory (drill) weekly. In
addition, each freshman must complete a four-hour college course as directed
by the PMS, during the first year of college.
Military Science II, second-year military science, consists of two hours of
classroom instruction and two hours of leadership laboratory weekly.
The basic course in Military Science is a college course and has nothing
to do with a student's military service obligation.
The Advanced Course
The Advanced Course consists of three hours of classroom instruction and
two hours of leadership laboratory per week during the junior and senior year
and an advanced ROTC camp of six weeks duration conducted at an Army
installation during the summer between the junior and senior year. The Ad-
vanced Course is elective and a student must meet requirements listed in sub-
sequent paragraphs to enroll in the course. Students who qualify for advanced
ROTC are paid by the Federal Government at a rate fixed by the Secretary
of Defense. The present rate is $40.00 per month during the junior and senior
year, except for the six weeks camp during the summer. The students are paid
at the rate of $147.30 per month during the advanced camp and are paid six
cents per mile travel pay from their home or the University, whichever they
choose, to the summer camp site and return.
ENROLLMENT REQUIREMENTS
Basic Course
All male freshman students who are citizens of the United States, physi-
cally qualified, over 14 years of age and less than 24 years of age are required
to complete the basic course of Military Science. Those freshman students who
«3
College of Arts and Sciences
I
have completed 6 months active duty for training with any of the armed forces
or who have completed MST 1, 2, and 3 of a Junior Division ROTC (3 years
of high school ROTC) or MS 1 and 2 at any military school's division ROTC
(military high school) may be excused from the freshman year of the basic
course by producing proper evidence to the Professor of Military Science at
the beginning of the freshman year.
All male sophomore students who have completed MS I, NS I, or AS I
(Freshman Army, Navy, or Air Force ROTC) of any Senior Division ROTC
unit or were excused from Freshman ROTC for reason mentioned in the pre-
ceding paragraph are required to complete the basic course of Military Science
(Sophomore ROTC). Those sophomore students who have completed 12 months
active duty in any of the armed forces, or who have completed MST 3 and 4
at a military school's division ROTC (military high school) may be excused
from sophomore ROTC by producing proper evidence to the Professor of Mili-
tary Science.
Any student who transfers with more than 31 quarter hours credit from
an institution not having basic ROTC as a requirement for graduation is ex-
cused from Basic ROTC. Any student who transfers with less than 32 quarters
credit from an institution not having basic ROTC as a requirement for grad-
uation must complete the basic course in ROTC at this institution provided he
is otherwise qualified. Those students who transfer from institutions having
required basic ROTC must enroll in the proper course and complete the basic
course regardless of the number of hours transferred unless he was properly
excused from the Basic Course by the institution from which he transferred.
Advanced Course
Any male student who is regularly enrolled as a junior in the University
and will complete the Advanced Course and will meet other requirements for
a commission prior to his 28th birthday, and has completed any one of the
following is eligible to apply for entrance into the Advanced Course:
1. The basic course of any Senior Division ROTC unit of either of the
three services (Army, Navy, Air Force).
2. MST 1, 2, 3, and 4 of a Military School's Division ROTC unit,
3. Twelve C12) months of active duty in any of the armed forces.
4. Six (6) months active duty or active duty for training with any of the
armed services and second-year ROTC of a senior division unit or MST 3
and 4 of a Military School's Division ROTC.
5. Two years at either of the service academies (Army, Navy, Air Force,
or Coast Guard).
6. Six weeks basic ROTC camp for Junior College transfers.
Applicants must meet the following requirements before being accepted
into the advanced program:
1. Pass a physical examination.
2. Pass a Department of the Army qualification examination (RQ exam).
3. Have a 2.25 quality point average under the 4.0 system for the first two
years of college.
4. Complete specific courses in English and mathematics as directed by
the Professor of Military Science.
5. Be accepted after interview with Professor of Military Science.
The RQ examination and physical examination are administered early in
the Spring Quarter to students who will be eligible to apply for Advanced
ROTC the following September. These examinations are administered in the
ROTC Building. Students who are not able to take these examinations at this
time may get them by appointment through the Administration NCO in the
ROTC Building. Representatives from one of the Army Senior Division ROTC
114
Military Science
units will visit the Junior College campus to interview candidates and arrange
for examination and attendance at the six weeks basic ROTC camp which
usually starts in mid -June each year.
Advanced Summer Camp
The six week summer camp is normally attended by students upon com-
pletion of the 3rd Year Military Science. Students are paid six cents per mile
for the distance from the institution to the place of camp and return. While at
camp each student will receive food, uniforms, medical attention, and pay at
the rate prescribed for Cadets at the United States Military Academy (cur-
rently $147.30 per month) from the government.
Students attending the six weeks basic summer camp will be paid six cents
per mile travel expense and $78,00 per month.
At camp the students meet young men from many of the best institutions
in the United States, thus broadening their contacts and gaining opportunity to
make friendships that may be of great value in later life. In addition to the
many physical, moral, and mental features from the healthful camp life, there
are sufficient recreational features provided to make the stay thoroughly en-
joyable.
Commission in the Army of the United States
Students successfully completing the advanced course and the summer
camp are tendered commissions as reserve officers in the Army of the United
States.
There are certain stipulations whereby a student who completes the 3rd
Year Military Science may be designated a "distinguished Military Student."
A student so designated who maintains such standards until he graduates will
be designated a "Distinguished Military Graduate" and will be eligible for
consideration for appointment in the Regular Army.
Awards
Each year the outstanding ROTC cadets in each class are selected on the
basis of leadership, scholarship, and military aptitude. These cadets so honored
are awarded medals and their names are engraved on appropriate plaques
permanently displayed in the Department of Military Science. These plaques
and medals are donated by local civic and veteran organizations. Additional
awards for academic and leadership achievements are presented by local busi-
ness firms, individuals, campus military societies, active and reserve compo-
nents of the U.S. Army, and the Department of Military Science.
Military Service Organizations
ROTC cadets have the opportunity to participate in several special organi-
zations within the Corps of Cadets. These include the ROTC Band, Company
F6 of the Pershing Rifles (Drill Team), the ROTC Rifle Team, Scabbard and
Blade (Honorary Military Society), and the Ranger Group,
ROTC Flight Training
Eligibility requirements: At the time of enrollment in the Army Flight
Training Program, students must be either enrolled in MS IV (Fourth year of
Senior Division ROTC), or have successfully completed MS IV but not have
completed the academic requirements for graduation or commissioning. A stu-
dent must have a sufficiently high academic standing to be recommended by
his dean and PMS. Flight Training Applicants must meet Class I standards of
medical fitness for flying.
ROTC TWO-YEAR SCHOLARSHIP PROGRAM
The Army ROTC Scholarship Program is designed to offer financial assist-
ance to outstanding young men in the four-year ROTC Program who are in-
terested in the Army as a career. Each scholar ship provides for free tuition,
textbooks, and laboratory fees, in addition to paying $50.00 per month for the
period uhat the scholarship is in effect.
II "
College of Arts and Sciences
Selection Procedures:
Recipients of the two-year scholarships will be selected from Military
Science II students who have submitted applications to the Professor of Mili-
tary Science and who have been accepted for enrollment in the ROTC Ad-
vanced Course. Applicants will be screened by the University Scholarship
Commitee. All selections will be forwarded to The Department of the Army
for approval.
MILITARY SCIENCE COURSES (MS)
101, 102, 103— 1st Year Military Science. One hour each.
Organization of the Army and ROTC, Individual Weapons and Marksman-
ship, United States Army and National Security and Leadership Laboratory.
201, 202, 203— 2nd Year Military Science. One hour each.
Map and Aerial Photograph Reading, Basic Military Tactics, American
Military History, and Leadership Laboratory.
301, 302, 303— 3rd Year Military Science. Three hours each.
Advanced Military Tactics, Communications, Branches of the Army, Prin-
ciples of Leadership, Military Teaching Methods and Leadership Laboratory.*
401, 402, 403— 4th Year Military Science. Three hours each.
Logistics, Operations, Military Administration and Personnel Management,
Service Orientation and Leadership Laboratory.*
*Each advanced ROTC student is required to complete one four-quarter
hour course in each of the junior and senior years. The courses will be in the
following general areas of science:
1. Science Comprehension, 2. General Psychology, 3. Effective Communica-
tion, 4. Political Institutions, and 5. Political Development.
DEPARTMENT OF
PHYSICS (PHY) AND ASTRONOMY (AST)
H. C. Dudley, Chairman
Bordoloi, St. Clair
The primary objectives of the Physics Department are to provide students
with sufficient basic information and technical skills in the various areas of
physics so that they may be qualified to:
(a) Serve as teachers in secondary schools. A physics major for this group
will include Physics 101, 102, 103 or Physics 201, 202, 203; Physics 371, 381, 481,
plus 9 hours of any other physics course having laboratory. (Total 36 hours.)
(b) Serve as junior physicists in government or industry. Physics majors
for this group will include Physics 101, 102, 103 or Physics 201, 202, 203; Physics
371, 381, 481 plus 24 hours of any other physics courses having laboratory.
A minor in mathematics is required. Two years of German plus English 332
is recommended.
(c) Pursue professional work and graduate study in physics. It is the
intent of the Physics Department to meet the recommendations of the American
Institute of Physics — National Science Foundation Committee on Curriculum
for Undergraduate Physics Majors. Forty-eight hours of physics cannot meet
this requirement. For that reason any student planning to do graduate work in
physics should consult the Department about additional undergraduate credits;
60 hours of undergraduate physics preparation are required.
NOTE: Astronomy 301, 302, 303 do not fulfill the Physics courses which
may be elected in (b) and (c) above.
IK
Physics
PHYSICS COURSES (PHY)
101, 102, 103 — General Physics. Five hours each course.
Four lecture periods and one three -hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: MAT 102. Corequisite for Physics 101 and prerequisite for
Physics 102.
A traditional course in general college physics intended for liberal arts and
pre-medical students.
Mechanics and Hydrodynamics; Electricity and Magnetism; Light, Heat
and Sound. May not be taken by any one who has completed calculus except
by permission of the chairman.
201, 202, 203 — General Physics with Calculus. Five hours each course.
Four lecture periods and one three -hour laboratory period per week.
Corequisite: Calculus.
Mechanics and Hydrodynamics; Electricity and Magnetism; Light, Heat
and Sound.
A more rigorous course in General Physics recommended but not required
(in preference to Physics 101) for Physics majors. This course is required of
Engineering students.
320 — Electrical Circuit Theory. Four hours.
Three lecture periods and one three -hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: PHY 103 or 203.
AC and DC Circuit Theory with some applications in electrical measure-
ments.
327-328 — Electronics. Four hours each course.
Three lecture periods and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: PHY 103 or 203.
Fundamentals of vacuum and semiconductor devices with applications to
scientific instrumentation.
331-332 — Thermodynamics. Four hours each course.
Three lecture periods and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: PHY 103 or 203 and Calculus.
Temperature, Thermodynamic Systems, Laws of Thermodynamics, Reversi-
bility and Irreversibility, Carnot Cycle, Entropy and a brief introduction to
the physics of very low temperatures.
341 — Geometrical Optics. Four hours.
Three lecture periods and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: PHY 103 or 203 and Calculus.
Rays, refractive and reflective surfaces, lens design, stops and optical in-
struments.
Fundamentals of wave motion, introduction to Fourier Series, hearing and
applications to architectural acoustics.
371 — Atomic Physics. Four hours.
Prerequisites: PHY 103 or 203 and Calculus.
Survey of atomic particles, electromagnetic radiation and X-Rays, the
hydrogen atom, theory of optical spectra and electron distributions within the
atom.
381 — Nuclear Physics. Four hours.
Three lecture periods and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: PHY 371.
Natural radioactivity, fundamental particles, nuclear fission, radioactive
production of isotopes and new elements.
392 — Physics Special Problems I, n, III. One hour per quarter.
A course limited to junior and senior physics majors, to work out in the
laboratory special problems of interest to the student. A formal written report
will be required, showing extensive library research, and a completed piece
of functioning apparatus must be constructed. Permission of the chairman.
"7
College of Arts and Sciences
421-422 — Electricity and Magnetism. Four hours each course.
Three lecture periods and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: PHY 103 or 203, MAT 405 and MAT 411, PHY 320.
Vector Analysis, electrostatics, magnetostatics and electromagnetic fields.
441-442 — Physical Optics. Four hours each course.
Prerequisite: PHY 341. Corequisite: MAT 405.
Huygen's Principle, interference, diffraction, polarization and electromag-
netic theory of light.
443-G443 — Sound and Ultrasound. Four hours.
Three lecture periods and one three -hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: PHY 103 or PHY 203, PHY 481 or PHY 332.
A study of sound, and ultra sound, fundamentals of wave motion in a
finite medium. Fundamentals of hearing, acoustics, and high intensity waves.
444-G444 — Fundamentals of Solid State Physics. Four hours.
Three hours lecture and one three -hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: PHY 328.
Study of the solid as an electromagnetic wave medium, exitation levels,
and the one electron theory.
471-G471, 472-G472, 473 -G473— Theoretical Physics. Four hours each course.
Four hours lecture.
Prerequisite: Consent of Instructor, PHY 371.
Selected topics of general physics from an advanced point of view.
474-G474 — Quantum Mechanics I. Four hours.
Four lectures per week.
Schroedinger's wave equations applied to various potentials, simple har-
monic oscillator and particle in a central field.
475-G475 — Quantum Mechanics II. Four hours.
Four lectures per week.
Solutions of time independent and time dependent perturbated potentials
and identical particles. The relativistic wave equation and the origin of elec-
tron spin.
481-G481 — Nuclear Physics. Four hours.
Three hours lecture and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: PHY 381 and MAT 405-G405.
Nuclear binding forces, chain reaction, criticality, the non-steady state
reactor, radiation shielding.
485-G485, 486-G486— History and Literature of Physics I and II. Four hours
each course.
Prerequisite: PHY 103 or 203.
A survey of the literature of Pltysics from the ancients to Einstein; review-
ing the development of concepts, and the rise and fall of various theories
which were used to explain observed phenomena,
A survey of the development of Relativistic theories, and the experimental
data which now impinges on this school of thought. A study of current sources
of experimental and research data will be made.
499 — Undergraduate Research, I, II, III. Two hours per quarter.
A course limited to selected senior physics majors. To introduce the student
to methods of physical research, requiring a formal literature search, problem
outlines, construction of apparatus, and collection of accurate data on some
assigned problem. A formal report will be required. Permission of the chairman..
ASTRONOMY COURSES (AST)
301, 302, 303 — General Astronomy. Four hours each course.
Three lecture periods and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Introduction to the coordinate systems of the Earth and Celestial Sphere,
Time and its applications, The Solar System.
Astronomical relations of light, atomic theory, spectroscopy: further topics
on the Solar System, comets and meteorites
Astronomical measurements, star classifications, relative and apparent mo-
tion of the stars, galaxies, extra-solar matter and the stellar energy cycle.
ir8
Political Science
DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE (PS)
Leon A. Wilber, Chairman
Doumas, Hatcher, Lindsay, Parry, Robertson, Tuchak, Weems
(1) Requirements for an Undergraduate Major. The basic policy of the
Department is to require (a) the introductory survey course, Political Science
101, of everyone, (b) one introductory course from each of the four major
fields of Political Science, and (c) four elective courses.
The major would therefore include the following courses:
PS 101 — American Government
PS 400, 402, or 404— Political Theory
PS 301, 406, 407, 412, 434, 435, 436, 460, or 461— American Government
PS 450, 451, 452, 453, 470, 472, or 474— Comparative Government.
PS 300, 453, 457, 458, 459, or 485— International Relations.
Electives in Political Science: 16 hours. Total: 36 hours.
(2) Requirement for an Undergraduate Minor. The Department recom-
mends that the minor include introductory courses from the four fields listed
for the major.
(3) Economics 400, Finance 415, and History 405, 411, 469, and 470 may be
elected as Political Science if approved by the student's adviser.
POLITICAL SCIENCE COURSES (PS)
101 — American Government. Four hours.
A. survey of our national government, with some related study of Mis-
sissippi courts and the state election systems. (Required of all students.)
300 — United States Foreign Policy. Four hours.
A study of contemporary U.S. Foreign Policy with major emphasis on the
period 1945 to the present. The study highlights the revolution in American
Foreign Policy since World War II.
301 — State Government. Four hours.
345 — Current Problems in Citizenship. Four hours.
A study of current problems before the national, state, and local govern-
ments at the time the course is taught. Different problems are studied in dif-
ferent years.
400-G400— Political Theory to 1783. Four hours.
Political thought from Plato through the Enlightenment, with emphasis on
the contributions of individual philosophers.
402-G402 — American Political Theory. Four hours.
A study of the principal political ideas that have influenced the develop-
ment of the United States' political system.
404-G404— Political Theory Since 1783. Four hours.
Recent and contemporary European political thought with emphasis on
liberalism, conservatism, socialism, communism, and fascism.
406-G406 — American Political Parties and Pressure Groups. Four hours.
407-G407 — Mississippi Government. Four hours.
412-G412— U.S. Constitutional Law. Four hours.
A survey, by the case method, of principles and practices of American
constitutional law. Emphasis is placed upon judicial review, the federal system,
national powers, and individual rights.
434-G434 — County Government. Four hours.
435 -G435— Municipal Government. Four hours.
436-G436— The Legislative Process. Four hours.
IK
College of Arts and Sciences
A detailed study of Congress and the state legislature, covering functions,
organizations, procedure, outside influences, and problems. Emphasis is on
Congress.
450-G450 — Governments of West Europe. Four hours.
A study of France, West Germany, and Italy.
451-G451 — Soviet Government and Politics. Four hours.
A detailed study of the political, economic, and social structure of the
Soviet Union, and the role of the Communist Party.
452-G452 — British Government. Four hours.
453-G453 — Soviet Foreign Policy. Four hours.
A study of Soviet foreign policy with emphasis on the period after World
War II.
457-G457 — International Politics. Four hours.
458-G458 — International Organization. Four hours.
A study of the principal types of international organization, and of exam-
ples of the same, such as the United Nations and the Organization of American
States.
459-G459 — Propaganda in Foreign Policy. Four hours.
A study of the media and techniques of propaganda, and of propaganda as
an instrument of foreign policy. U.S. programs, both governmental and non-
governmental, are examined and compared with those of other appropriate
countries.
460-G460— Public Administration. Four hours.
An introductory study including administrative organization, personnel
management, and fiscal management.
461-G461— The Presidency. Four hours.
A study of the executive function in the process of government with spe-
cial emphasis on the increasing role of the President.
470-G470 — Middle East: Government and Politics. Four hours.
A study of the states of the contemporary Middle East: governmental
structures and institutions, political organizations and behavior, and regional
and international relations.
472-G472 — Far East: Governments and Politics. Four hours.
A survey of the politics and the governmental systems of the area in gen-
eral, and of such as India, China, Taiwan, Japan, Ceylon, and the Philippines
in particular.
474-G474 — Governments and Politics of Tropical Africa. Four hours.
A survey of the political systems of the "emerging" states of the dark con-
tinent and their politics, with special emphasis on industrialization, and socio-
cultural background.
485-G485 — International Law. Four hours.
A sampling of the field, based largely on cases.
492 — Special Problems I, II, III. One hour each.
A problem study to be approved by the Department Chairman. The stu-
dent will prepare a scholarly paper under the supervision of a professor.
DEPARTMENT OF RELIGION AND PHILOSOPHY
John F. Nau, Chairman
Arrington, Bishop, Parsons
The Department of Religion and Philosophy offers programs of study which
will allow a student to choose either a major or a minor in Philosophy or a
major and a minor in Religion and Philosophy combined.
Students majoring or minoring in Philosophy should begin with either
Philosophy 101 or Logic 210. For a major, a total of 36 quarter hours is re-
IXO
Philosophy
quired, of which at least 16 hours must be in courses on the 400 level. A major
program in philosophy will normally include Philosophy 101, Logic 210, and
Philosophy 203, 205, 207.
For a minor in Philosophy, a total of 28 quarter hours is required, of which
at least eight quarter hours should be in courses on the 400 level.
PHILOSOPHY COURSES (PHI)
101 — Introduction to Philosophy. Four hours.
A course intended to acquaint the student with the general nature of phi-
losophical study. Covers values, methods, themes, the nature of reality, episte-
mology, ethics, and aesthetics.
203 — History of Philosophy. Four hours.
A study of the main philosophic movements, and of the findings of Greek
pioneers, the patristic writers, and the scholastics.
205 — History of Philosophy. Four hours.
A study of the main problems and movements in philosophy from the
Renaissance to Kant.
207 — History of Philosophy. Four hours.
Philosophy after Kant. Writings of Hegel, Schopenhauer, Mill, Compte,
Marx, Nietzsche, Bergson, Dewey, Whitehead, and Russell will be considered.
210 — Logic. Four hours.
A study of the methods and problems of accurate and critical thinking.
Induction, deduction, the syllogism, fallacies, the scientific method, and sym-
bolic logic. Emphasis on practical application.
220 — Introduction to Symbolic Logic. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Eight hours of math or Philosophy 210.
The basic theory and operations of the sentential calculus, qualification,
and the logic of relations.
300— Philosophical Systems. Four hours.
This course offers more thorough study of the recent developments in phi-
losophical systems, emphasizing particularly creationism, emergentism, organ-
ism, existentialism, and pragmatism. Emphasis on supplementary readings in
these fields. Not Open to freshmen and sophomores.
310— Theories of Reality. Four hours.
An examination of some principal philosophical questions concerning
identity and diversity, causality, freedom, necessity, God, and of various re-
sponses made to these questions by members of both the metaphysical and
anti-metaphysical traditions.
320 — Theories of Knowledge. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 101.
An examination of recent philosophical positions in epistemology, including
positivism, pragmatism, realism, and ordinary language analysis.
330 — Continental Rationalism. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Eight hours of philosophy or permission of instructor.
A study of the philosophies of Descartes, Spinoza, and Leibnitz. Based on
selections from their writings.
340 — British Empirical Philosophy. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Twelve hours of philosophy or permission of instructor.
The British empiricists examined both individually and as contributors to
one of modern philosophy's historical developments.
350 — Foundations of Existentialism. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Eight hours of philosophy or permission of instructor.
An introduction to the basic motifs of existentialist thought through the
writings of Kierkegaard, Sartre, Nietzsche, and Berdyaev.
Iil
College of Arts and Sciences
370— Ethics. Four hours.
A study of the evolution of moral ideas from primitive to modern times,
and a critical analysis of ethical theories and of social institutions such as the
state, property, and the family.
372 — Philosophy of Religion. Four hours.
A detailed examination of the proofs for the existence of a diety and a
study of the problems of philosophical theology, such as transcendence and
immanence, free will, mysticism, and good and evil.
412-G412— Philosophy of Politics. Four hours.
A study of fundamental political concepts including law, government, sov-
ereignty and state, and the relation of man's understanding of his own nature
to the structuring of such concepts.
415-G415— Kant. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Twelve hours of philosophy.
Textual study of Kant's metaphysical, epistemological, and ethical theories.
Attention given to the influence of the Critical Philosophy upon subsequent
philosophical movements.
420- G420— Introduction to Philosophy of Science. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Eight hours of philosophy or advanced courses in mathematics
or the empirical sciences.
A study of the conditions and status of knowledge, perception, measure-
ment, hypothesis, causality, and concept formation based upon recent scientific
and philosophical investigation.
430-G430— Advanced Ethics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 370.
A study of rival contemporary theories in general theory of value and
ethics. The positions of naturalism, intuitionism, emotivism, and functionalism
will be critically compared.
440-G440— Whitehead. Four hours.
A study of Whitehead's theory of reality, philosophy, man, and civilization.
Readings from Process and Reality, Science and the Modern World, and other
works.
448-G448— The Pre-Socratics. Four hours.
A study of the major schools and problems of the pre-socratic philosophers
from Thales to the atomists. Consideration will be given to the intrinsic im-
portance of the contributions of these philosophers to perennial problems
in metaphysics and epistemology as well as to the influence of these contribu-
tions on the philosophies of Plato and Aristotle.
452-G452— Plato. Four hours.
A textual study of the major Platonic dialogues.
460-G460 — Analytic Philosophy. Four hours.
A study of the historical background and development of the contemporary
linguistic approach to philosophical problems based upon the writings of Witt-
genstein, Wisdom, Ryle, and Austin.
462-G462 — Phenomenology. Four hours.
Textual study of the philosophy of Edmund Husserl, the founder of pheno-
menology. Topics such as philosophy as rigorous science, intentionality, and the
phenomenological reduction will be given special attention.
464-G464 — Problems in the Philosophy of Language. Four hours.
Advanced study in various philosophical theories of language. Considera-
tion will be given to such special topics as the theory of descriptions, synony-
mity, analyticity, vagueness, reference, and generality.
11X
Science Education
RELIGION
Students majoring in Religion and Philosophy combined are required to
have a total of 36 hours of which no less than 12 quarter hours must be in
either Philosophy or Religion. Students minoring in Religion and Philosophy
combined are required to have a total of 28 quarter hours of which no less
than 8 quarter hours must be in either Religion or Philosophy.
RELIGION COURSES (REL)
201, 202— The Old and New Testaments. Four hours each.
A general survey, covering types of literature, and general content of the
books of the Old and New Testaments.
205 — History of Non- Christian Religions. Four hours.
May be elected as history.
A study of the grounds for religious beliefs of men, the emergence of tribal
and national religions in antiquity, and a survey of the principal non-Christian
faiths of ancient and modern times.
301, 302— The Major and Minor Prophets of Israel. Two hours each.
A study of the lives and teachings of the Old Testament prophets, the
social, political, economic, and religious backgrounds to their work and the
relevance of their message to modern times.
305 — The Gospels. Four hours.
A study of the biography of Jesus and literary problems of the synoptic
Gospels approached through intensive work on Mark, with materials integrated
from the Gospel of John.
310 — Archaeological Background of the Old Testament. Four hours.
A study of archaeologically obtained evidence relating to the Bible, with
special attention to excavated sites in Palestine.
320 — Ancient Inscriptions Relating to the Old Testament. Four hours.
A study of documents from Egypt, Assyria, and other countries which eluci-
date the Old Testament narrative, including a brief survey of cultures preceding,
and contemporary with, the Old Testament.
401-G401— History of Christian Culture. Four hours.
May be elected as history.
A study of the cultural development of Western Europe during the
Christian era, with emphasis on religious thought, and on religious aspects of
institutions, literature, and art.
402-G402 — Religion in the Rise of American Culture. Four hours.
A study of the origin and development of the major religious groups and
of the shifts in religious thought in the United States from colonial times to
the present.
405-G405— The Types of Literature in the Bible. Four hours.
May be elected as English 346.
An analysis of the types of literature in the Old and New Testaments and
a comparison of these with similar writings of other Jewish writers of the same
periods and with related types of writing among other people.
DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE EDUCATION (SCE)
Including Fundamentals of Science (FS)
A. G. Morgan, Chairman
F. Brown, Frazier, Olsen
The Department of Science Education is operated jointly by the College of
Arts and Sciences and the School of Education and Psychology. The facilities
i*3
College of Arts and Sciences
are in the College of Arts and Sciences: programs in teacher education are in
the School of Education and Psychology. Responsibility for the curriculum is
shared jointly. Graduate programs are described in the Graduate Bulletin.
Objectives
The mission of the Department of Science Education is: (1) to provide those
courses in both the physical and biological sciences which would give a mini-
mum degree of scientific literacy to all students; (2) to provide, in cooperation
with the Department of Elementary Education, a curriculum in the sciences and
science methods for elementary school teachers; (3) to provide advisement for
those students planning to teach the sciences at the secondary school level; (4)
to provide programs leading to advanced degrees in science education; (5) to
work with public schools in the development of curricula, workshops, science
fairs, and other activities designed to improve science instruction at all public
school levels.
Curriculum and Program
The Department of Science Education is concerned primarily with teachers
and prospective teachers of science. Although some students will be planning
to teach a specific science, current public school organization does not encour-
age too much specialization: familiarity with principles and concepts common
to all of the several scientific disciplines is prerequisite. Hence, courses in science
education are so organized as to give teachers and prospective teachers a broad
understanding of several of the sciences, with the opportunity for enough spe-
cialization in one area to pursue advanced study.
In general, all prospective science teachers will study mathematics through
trigonometry. Calculus is prerequisite for some courses in chemistry and physics.
Specialization in one scientific discipline will require a minimum of forty (40)
quarter credit hours in that discipline. Certain courses offered by the various
science departments specifically for public school teachers are applicable only
to the degree programs in education offered by the School of Education and
Psychology.
The Department of Science Education offers a major in general science for
secondary school teachers, grades 7 through 12. The recommended course of
study is outlined below:
Freshman year: Sophomore year:
English 101, 102, 103 Biology 101, 102, 103
Math 101, 102, 103 English 201, 433
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 History 101, 102
Geography 103 Sociology 103
Political Science 101 Physics 101, 102, 103
Music or Art Health 179
Psychology 201
Junior year: Senior year:
Public Address 101 SED 451, 313, 481 (education)
FED 328 (education) Electives 20 hours in biology,
EPY 319, 332 (psychology) chemistry, geology, or physics
FED 469 (education) Electives 8 hours
Chemistry 204, 205, 206
Biology 104 or 311, 300
Geology 101, 260
The above program provides a broad background and some depth in all sci-
ence areas, opportunity for considerable depth and specialization in one science
area, and background in professional education necessary for effective teaching.
Because of the nature of the teacher training program, a minor in general
science is not offered by the Department. Students in the College of Arts and
Sciences should discuss minors in the sciences with their major adviser and/or
1x4
Science Education
the particular science department chairman. Students in the School of Educa-
tion and Psychology can major in Science Education and minor in Secondary
Education. An adequate minor in general science is not possible. The program
as outlined above for science teachers meets certification standards in all states
in the areas of biology, chemistry, physics, earth sciences, general science, and
physical science; and, in most cases, it satisfies requirements for certification
in combined areas, i.e., biology, chemistry, and general science, or chemistry,
physics, and general science.
SCIENCE EDUCATION COURSES (SCE)
Including Fundamentals of Science (FS)
Fundamentals of Science: A sequence of two courses in the physical sciences
and two in the biological sciences. Each course carries four hours of credit and
consists of four one -hour lecture-demonstration sessions per week. A working
knowledge of algebra is presupposed. These courses are designed to give stu-
dents an acquaintance and understanding of certain fundamental principles
and laws of the major science disciplines. Credit in these courses will not count
toward the degree requirements for a major or minor in the sciences or in sec-
ondary school science teaching.
FS 104— Physical Science I.
A study of matter and energy in the universe; their sources, transformation,
and interactions; the forces acting within the universe; and the laws governing
these phenomena.
FS 105— Physical Science n. Prerequisite: FS 104.
A continuation of FS 104. Primary emphasis is on elementary and compound
substances, the arrangement of and forces acting on these substances in the
formation of the earth, atmosphere, and the universe.
FS 106— Biological Science I Zoology. Prerequisite: FS 105.
Elementary studies of cell structure and function; gametogenesis, ontogeny,
heredity, ecology, taxonomy, and phylogeny, with emphasis on the major groups
of animals.
FS 107— Biological Science II Botany. Prerequisite: FS 105.
Elementary studies of plant morphology, physiology, ecology, taxonomy,
and phylogeny, with emphasis on the major groups of plants.
SCE 432— Science for Elementary Teachers. Four hours.
Six hours of lecture, audio- visual, and laboratory work per week.
Designed to relate basic scientific principles to the elementary grades, and
provide experience in presenting these principles to the elementary school child
through the use of a variety of materials, activities, and methods. Required of
and designed for elementary education majors only.
SCE 447 — Nature Study and Elementary Science. Four hours.
Six hours of lecture and field work per week.
Familiarizes prospective teachers with the biological and physical materials
commonly close at hand and assists in the identification and utilization of these
materials. Considers the whole environment of the child and his observation and
interpretation of it. May be taken as elective credit for elementary education
majors.
SCE 451J— Methods in Teaching Science— Grades 10 through 12. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Senior standing (should be taken one or two quarters before
student practice teaching).
A course designed to familiarize teachers with trends in the secondary sci-
ence curriculum. It includes a study of materials and techniques used in pre-
senting subject matter to the secondary school student. Emphasis is placed upon
the design of activities dealing with science as a form of inquiry and investiga-
tion. Readings are required in the science and science education periodicals.
SCE 451K — Methods in Teaching Science — Grades 7 through 9. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Senior standing (should be taken one to two quarters before
student practice teaching).
Similar to 451J, but emphasizes curriculum, methods, and materials at the
junior high school level.
1*5
College of Arts and Sciences
SCE 400-G400— BSCS Biology for Secondary Teachers. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 36 hours of biology.
This course is for teachers only, and may not be used for credit toward a
major in biology.
A detailed critical examination of the subject matter, techniques, and meth-
ods for teaching biology in secondary schools, as proposed by the Biological Sci-
ences Curriculum Study. Designed to orient teachers in modern biology subject
matter and special techniques by presenting background material and special
laboratory exercises. Emphasis is placed on the laboratory as the source of in-
formation from which sound conclusions can be drawn.
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY (SOC)
John N. Burrus, Chairman
Allen, Blackmon, Hopper, McMurry
The Department of Sociology offers a major or a minor. Provision is also
made for the student who is not a major or minor but who wishes to select one
or several courses in sociology according to his interests or needs.
Core curricula applicable to the College of Arts and Sciences and the degree
selected should be followed with care. Sociology majors who wish to meet re-
quirements for a teacher's license should take note of these requirements in the
section of the catalog dealing with teacher training.
A minimum of 36 quarter hours (beyond core) is required for a major in
Sociology. Twenty-eight hours are required for a minor.
The Sociology major will complete a minor of 28 hours in another field. It
is possible for the minor to be taken in any department offering a major, but in
most circumstances a minor in one of the social sciences is most advantageous.
The core requirements should be completed as early in the academic program
as possible. Courses not needed to fulfill major, minor, or core requirements are
free electives and may be taken in any department of the University.
Freshmen and sophomores planning to major in Sociology are advised to
include some sociology courses in their schedules. This will preclude the neces-
sity of scheduling multiple courses during the junior and senior years. Such
courses should not interfere with the completion of core requirements, however.
Transfer students interested in majoring in Sociology are advised to check
their programs with the sociology adviser at as early a date as possible.
Course Requirements and Information
A. All sociology majors must take the following courses: 201, 301, 481 or 482
and 485.
B. Students taking the general Sociology major must also take 401 and com-
plete the 481-482 sequence. The remaining 12 hours may be selected from
any of the departmental offerings with the exception of 230 and 330.
C. Students preparing for careers in professional social work may use Sociology
as a major or minor in a program of pre-professional undergraduate train-
ing. While the University does not offer a degree or major in Social Work,
proper planning of the undergraduate program will provide an adequate
academic background for those who wish to pursue a career in that field.
Professional training must be obtained in a graduate school of social work,
but the student is urged to obtain a well-balanced undergraduate education
with courses representing all academic areas. Proficiency in English, mathe-
matics, and social sciences is particularly desirable.
The pre-professional student pursuing a major program in Sociology must
fulfill the requirements in "A" above and then may select 16-24 additional hours
in sociology from other departmental offerings. Some recommended courses are:
230, 304, 330, 429, 450, 470, and 209. The selection of courses should be made in
consultation with the sociology adviser.
116
Sociology
SOCIOLOGY COURSES (SOC)
Note: The 400-level courses, beginning with 401-G401, are open only to
students of junior standing or higher.
103 — Introduction to Sociology. Four hours.
A course designed to give the student a general overview of the content
and methodology of sociology. Prerequisite to all courses except 201.
201 — Rural Sociology.. Four hours.
A study of the structure, institutions, and social processes of rural society;
and of the effect of urbanization on rural society. Recommended for majors and
minors.
209 — Cultural Anthropology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sociology 103.
A study of human behavior in preliterate societies. Attention to how cul-
tural traits are invented and diffused: and to the relation of cultural change to
modern civilization. Emphasis on the American Indian.
230— Introduction to Social Work. Four hours.
An introduction to the purpose, methods, and philosophy of contemporary
social work. Intended only for persons planning to enter social work as a voca-
tion.
233 — Social Problems. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sociology 103 or 201.
A study of representative contemporary problems, with emphasis on causes
which arise from cultural patterns and social change.
280 — Criminology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sociology 103.
A study of causes, treatment and prevention of crime. The presentation
deals with criminology, penology, and criminal legislation in ancient and modern
times.
301 — Urban Sociology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sociology 103 or 201.
An analysis of the nature of urban society and the factors shaping it, in-
cluding the influence of urban ecology, and ecological processes. Consideration
is given to the impact of urbanization and industrialization on social institutions,
levels of living, and demography.
304^-The Family. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sociology 103.
An analysis of the structure and function of the family as an institution.
Some emphasis on contemporary trends and factors shaping the contemporary
family.
309 — Anthropology Survey I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Eight hours in Sociology or Anthropology.
The basic course for the serious or pre-professional Anthropology student.
Lecture and supervised research.
330— Methods of Social Work. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Sociology 103 and 230.
A study of the principles of social case work.
336 — Educational Sociology. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Sociology 103 or eight hours in Education, or consent of the
instructor.
A comprehensive study of the educational institution; an analysis of the
school as a social institution; and the relationship of the educational institution
to the community and general society.
i*7
College of Arts and Sciences
340 — Advanced Rural Sociology. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Sociology 201 or 103 and advanced standing.
An advanced course in rural sociology. Certain areas of rural life and social
change are selected for detailed study. The effects of urbanization, mechaniza -
tion, and migration are examined. Recommended as complementary to Sociology
301.
401-G401 — Population. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sociology 103.
This course introduces the student to the science of demography and ex-
amines differentials and trends in birth rates, migration, sex ratios, and mor-
tality rates. Recommended for all majors and minors. Advanced standing re-
quired.
420-G420 — Industrial Sociology. Four hours.
An advanced sociological study of industrial and business units as social
systems, and their institutional setting.
429-G429— Juvenile Delinquency. Four hours.
A study of causes and the nature of juvenile delinquency, the development
of the juvenile court, probation and other rehabilitative programs. Recom-
mended for persons with a serious interest in the study of delinquency. Not open
to freshmen and sophomores.
430-G430 — Social Foundations of Personality. Four hours.
A comprehensive treatment of the role of the social group and the cultural
heritage in the development and functioning of the human personality. An analy-
sis of social institutions, social organizations and social experience as they are
related to personality development. Advanced standing required.
450-G450 — Social Institutions. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Sociology 103 and advanced standing.
A detailed study of major American social institutions, their functions, in-
terrelationships, and significant trends. Emphasis on theory of social structure.
470-G470 — Advanced General Sociology. Four hours.
An advanced course in general sociology giving expanded treatment to the
basic sociological concepts and subject-matter areas. Not open to freshmen and
sophomores.
481-G481— History of Social Thought. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sociology 103 and advanced standing.
An examination of early social thought, tracing the development of western
thought and ideas from Hammurabi to Comte.
482-G482— Sociological Theory. Four hours.
A survey of the growth and development of sociological theory from Comte
to the present. Advanced standing required.
485-G485— Methods of Social Research. Four hours.
A survey of elementary research techniques, illustrated by demonstrations
and projects. How to locate, process, analyze, and interpret social research data.
Open only to juniors and seniors; required for majors.
Prerequisite: 12 hours in Sociology.
1*8
Speech and Hearing Sciences
DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH AND HEARING SCIENCES (SHS)
Robert W. Peters, Chairman
DuBard, George, Grange, Neff, Telle John
The Department of Speech and Hearing Sciences is concerned with the
body of knowledge and scientific study that pertains to both normal and abnormal
speech, hearing and language. The Department provides the environment in
which information in this area can be effectively advanced and knowledge dis-
seminated.
Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Science, and Bachelor of Science teaching
degrees are offered by the Department. For information concerning Master's or
Doctoral degrees, consult the Graduate Bulletin. Specialization is possible in
four principal areas: (1) Speech and Hearing Science, (2) Audiology, (3) Lan-
guage Disorders, (4) Speech Pathology.
Majors who take the B.S. teaching degree may minor in Special Education.
The minor will require EPY 316, EPY 319, EPY 332, EED 266, SPE 451, SPE 486,
SPE 471 (a minimum of 12 hours must be taken in SPE 471).
The Speech and Hearing Center, the School for Deaf and Aphasic Children,
and the Acoustic Laboratory are operated by the Department on the campus
to provide clinical and research laboratory experiences. Other training facilities
are available at off campus locations.
UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN MISSISSIPPI SPEECH
AND HEARING CENTER
Southern Station, Box 92
Hattiesburg, Mississippi
Phone:266-7221
Robert W. Peters, Director
The Speech and Hearing Center is operated by the Department of Speech
and Hearing Sciences as a laboratory training unit and as a service center for
students and other individuals who have speech, hearing, or language impair-
ments. Diagnostic, therapeutic, and teaching services are provided for a wide
variety of disorders, including delayed speech, defective articulation, stuttering,
cleft palate, cerebral palsy, language disorders, laryngectomees, and hearing
losses of any type. Included in the services offered to the hard of hearing are
hearing-aid evaluations, lip reading, auditory training, hearing aid orientation,
audiological assessment for compensation and medical-legal claims, and any
type of pure-tone and speech audiometry.
The staff of the center includes Robert Peters, Director; Robert O. Grange,
Speech Pathologist; Brooks E. Neff, Audiologist; Miss Etoile DuBard, Teacher
of Aphasic Children; and Patricia Tellejohn, Teacher of the Deaf.
The School for the Deaf and Aphasic Children, Miss Etoile DuBard, Director,
is a part of the over-all speech and hearing services and is specifically concerned
with diagnostics and teaching of children with hearing and language disorders.
The services are available at nominal costs.
Speech and Hearing Center Services:
Audiometric pure tone test $ 5.00
Diagnostic Hearing Evaluation 10.00
Hearing Aid Evaluation 15.00
Hearing Evaluation for Medical-Legal Compensation Claims 25.00
Diagnostic Speech Evaluation 10.00
Speech or Hearing Therapy fees per session 2.00
Therapy fees for college students per quarter 5.00
SPEECH AND HEARING COURSES (SHS)
SPEECH AND HEARING SCIENCE
201 — Introduction to Phonetics. Four hours.
l 9
College of Arts and Sciences
International Phonetic Alphabet as applied to English.
210 — Fundamentals of Speech and Hearing Science. Four hours.
An introduction to the basic knowledge pertaining to speech, hearing, and
language processes.
332 — Semantics. Four hours.
Scientific approach to the study of language as a symbolic code.
334-335 — Voice Science I, II. Four hours each.
A two-course sequence dealing with the various anatomical and neuro-
logical systems concerned with the production of speech.
336 — Experimental Phonetics. Four hours.
A study of laboratory investigations of problems in phonetics as they are
related to functional speech.
338 — Psychology of Speech. Four hours.
Study of Speech with particular reference to information theory, speech
intelligibility and other mathematical model systems.
402-G402 — Language Development, Four hours.
The normal acquisition of language.
406-G406 — Acoustic Phonetics. Four hours.
Principles of acoustic theories of speech production.
410-G410 — Anatomy, Physiology, and Mechanism of Hearing. Four hours.
This is a basic and fundamental audiology course open to all students who
are interested in the normal anatomy and physiology of the ear and associated
areas.
492 — Problems in Speech and Hearing Science, Audiology, Language Dis-
orders, or Speech Pathology. One to six hours.
AUDIOLOGY
302— Introduction to the Measurement of Hearing. Four hours.
A specialized survey of the field of audiology to acquaint students with the
causes, testing, and rehabilitation of persons with hearing loss.
401 -G401— Auditory Training and Hearing Aids. Four hours.
Current methods of using amplifications for rehabilitating persons with
hearing loss.
405-G405 — Clinical Audiology. Four hours.
Advanced audiometric techniques and clinical procedures.
409-G409— Speech Reading. Four hours.
Major theoretical and applied aspects of the speech reading (lipreading)
process.
413-G413 — Pre-School Hard of Hearing and Deaf. Four hours.
An over-all view of the complex problems facing the hard-of -hearing and
deaf child in the home, community and educational environment.
417-G417 — Audiological Instrumentation. Four hours.
To present advanced students various electronic systems employed in the
study of audiology.
425-G425 — Pathologies of the Hearing Mechanism. Four hours.
A basic and fundamental course in audiology open to students interested
in the various pathologies and abnormal functions of the ear and associated
130
Speech and Hearing Sciences
LANGUAGE DISORDERS
430-G430 — Phonetics for the Acoustically Handicapped. Four hours.
Techniques for teaching speech to the deaf and those children with unusual
hearing problems, including systems of orthography and their application for
teaching speech and reading to acoustically handicapped children.
431-G431 — Language Disorders I: Assessment of Children with Language
Disorders. Four hours.
Problems of assessing children with language disorders, differentiating the
aphasic child from the deaf, mentally retarded, autistic, severely emotionally
disturbed, or the child who does not develop speech and language because of
muscular paralysis.
432 -G432— Language Disorders n: Habilitation of the Aphasic Child. Four
hours.
Prerequisites: 430, 431.
Basic problems of the aphasic child and procedures needed for him to
acquire use and comprehension of language and speech.
433-G433 — Language for the Hard-of-Hearing and Deaf. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 413 or the consent of the instructor.
Principles of language development for the pre-school and school age
hard -of -hearing and deaf child and the child with multiple handicaps.
434-G434 — Speech for the Hard-of-Hearing and Deaf. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 430.
Problems in developing and maintaining intelligible speech in hard-of-
hearing and deaf children through the multisensory approach. Attention is
given to the speech problems of children with multiple handicaps.
435-G435 — Problems in Reading for the Hard-of-Hearing and Deaf. Four
hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor.
Problems confronting the deaf in reading. Special attention is given to
problems created by the vocabulary of high level abstraction and words of
multiple meanings.
436-G436 — Problems in Academic Subjects for the Hard-of-Hearing and
Deaf. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor.
Problems of vocabulary and language of specific subject matter areas.
437-G437 — History, Education, and Guidance for the Deaf. Four hours.
SPEECH PATHOLOGY
3O1-G301 — Introduction to Speech Pathology. Four hours.
404-G404 — Stuttering and Related Problems. Four hours.
Theories and therapeutic procedures evaluated with respect to the problem
of stuttering behavior in children and adults.
414-G414 — Diagnostic Procedures in Speech Pathology. Four hours.
Examination and diagnosis of people with speech disorders with emphasis
on interviewing, testing, and report writing.
416-G416 — Articulation Disorders. Four hours.
Study of the problems of defective articulation: definition, causative fac-
tors, therapy, and research.
420-G420 — Voice Disorders. Four hours.
The disorders of voice and their cause and management.
I3 1
College of Arts and Sciences
424-G424 — Organic Speech Problems. Four hours.
The pathologies and therapies for speech and allied language problems
associated with the organic disorders of cerebral palsy and cleft palate.
428 -G428— Adult Aphasia and Related Problems. Four hours.
The speech and related problems associated with neurological impairment.
438-G438 — Pathology of Speech Mechanism. Four hours.
Investigation of the various disorders involving the vocal mechanism which
can result in and /or be associated with speech problems.
1 3 1
SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Joseph A. Greene, Jr., Dean
PURPOSE
The School of Business Administration has as its objective the education of a
student through a blend of cultural knowledge, economic literacy, basic busi-
ness tools, and specialized knowledge to allow him to rise in the business world
to the maximum of his innate abilities. Specialized courses in various fields to
suit different objectives are superimposed upon a broad coverage of courses in
the arts and sciences, mathematics, economics and general business. Thus, it is
believed that the graduate has been given enough specialized training to enable
him to start work in one of the functional areas of business, and a broad enough
education with the ability to use managerial tools and exercise business judg-
ment to rise to the executive levels.
ORGANIZATION AND OPERATION
For efficient operation the School of Business Administration is organized
into the departments of Accounting, Economics, Finance and General Business,
Management, and Marketing. Each department offers at least one major and a
student interested in a particular area should examine any alternative majors
or course emphases offered by that department.
Whatever major is chosen the student pursues the same curriculum except
for his major course requirements. Upon completion of all requirements he is
awarded the degree of Bachelor of Science in Business Administration.
The Department of Economics offers the Bachelor of Arts degree in the
College of Arts and Sciences as well as the Bachelor of Science in Business
Administration. The curriculum for the Bachelor of Arts degree in Economics
is found under the section of the catalog devoted to the College of Arts and
Sciences.
STUDENT ADMITTANCE AND ADVISEMENT
A student is eligible for admission to the School of Business Administration
when he will have completed by the end of the current quarter as many as 90
quarter hours with a "C" average. For admittance without reservation he must
have completed or be completing all the requirements under the curriculum
prescribed for the freshman and sophomore years. A student is admitted with
some qualifications if he has the required hours but lacks some of his basic core.
It is imperative that the student will have completed, or will shortly complete,
the School requirements in accounting principles, economics principles, and
mathematics. A student will not be admitted under any circumstances until he
has completed freshman English composition.
Upon his admission to the School, the student is assigned an adviser within
the School by the Office of the Dean. His adviser will be his department chairman
or someone designated by the department chairman who will approve his
schedule each quarter, provide counsel, and sign his application for degree.
A student who changes his major within the School must come to the Office
of the Dean and change his departmental designation and his adviser.
STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS, PLACEMENT AND ASSISTANCE
The School promotes several professional and honorary societies for stu-
dents in order to foster fellowship and scholarship among those with similar
interests. These organizations are: Alpha Epsilon Alpha, professional fraternity
in accounting; Economics Society, professional fraternity in economics; Delta
Sigma Pi, professional fraternity for men in all areas of business; Omicron Delta
Epsilon, honorary society in economics; Phi Chi Theta, professional fraternity
for women in all areas of business; Pi Sigma Epsilon, professional fraternity in
marketing; Rho Epsilon, professional fraternity in real estate; and, Society for
Advancement of Management, professional fraternity in management.
All these organizations are coordinated under the Business Fraternity Coun-
cil of the School.
The School cooperates with the University Placement Bureau in assisting
*33
School of Business Administration
its graduates in finding positions. The student is expected to establish a file with
the Placement Bureau three quarters before graduation in order to avail him-
self of all the opportunities.
There are several scholarships available exclusively for students in the
School of Business Administration as well as many others for which business
students may apply. Any inquiry should be addressed to the Director of Stu-
dent Aid and Scholarships, Box 7, Southern Station, Hattiesburg, Mississippi.
PLAN FOR FRESHMAN AND SOPHOMORE YEARS
The curriculum requirements below are for all students in the School work-
ing toward the Bachelor of Science in Business Administration.
The transfer student should conform to the suggested curriculum as far as
possible.
CURRICULUM FOR FRESHMEN AND SOPHOMORES
Freshman Year
English 101, 102, 103— Freshman Composition 12
History 101, 102— World Civilization 8
Political Science 101 — American Government 4
♦Mathematics 100 or 101 4 or
Mathematics 112 or 102 4
**Science 12
***Office Administration 101 Proficiency Typewriting 4 or
Military Science and/or Physical Education Activity Courses 3 or
(Male Students must take both)
****Electives (See explanation under "Electives") or 11
51
♦Mathematics 100 or 101 is required only for those students who feel they have an inade-
quate background of algebra from high school. Other students may go directly into Mathe-
matics 112 or 102. Industrial Management majors must choose Math 101 and 102.
♦♦General Physics or Chemistry is strongly recommended for Industrial Management
majors.
♦♦♦A student may not take Office Administration 101 if he has had a year of high school
typewriting and may be excused from the course if he demonstrates proficiency.
♦♦♦♦Finance 100, Introduction to Business, is strongly recommended as an elective for
those students wishing a survey course in business to prepare them for the advanced
courses.
Sophomore Year
Public Address 101 — Oral Communication 4
Fine Arts (Music 165 or Art 120) 4
English 201, 202— Introduction to Literature 8
♦Philosophy 101 or 210 and Psychology 201 or Sociology 103 8
Economics 251, 252 — Principles of Economics 8
Accounting 201, 202, 203— Principles of Accounting 12
Finance 300 or CSS 200 (Statistics) 4
Military Science and/or Physical Education Activity Courses 3 or
(Male Students must take both)
Electives (See explanation under "Electives") or 3
51
♦A major in Personnel Relations must take both Psychology 201 and Sociology 103 as well
as the requirement in Philosophy.
PLAN FOR JUNIOR AND SENIOR YEARS
Business Core
In addition to the specific requirements in the Freshman and Sophomore
34
Accounting
years, all students in the School of Business Administration are required to take
the following core in business.
Course Title of Course Hours
Business Education 300 — Business Writing 4
Marketing 300 — Principles of Marketing 4
Economics 330 — Money and Banking 4
Finance 310, 311— Business Law 8
Management 360 — Principles of Management 4
Finance 375 — Business Problem Analysis and Report Writing 2
*Finance 389 — Corporation Finance 4
30
♦Accounting majors may substitute Finance 452, Investment Finance.
Major Requirements
The majors are outlined under the department in which they are located.
With the consent of his adviser, a student occasionally may make a substitution
for one of his required courses.
Minor Requirements
There is no minor required for the Bachelor of Science in Business Ad-
ministration except for the student who majors in General Business. This stu-
dent must complete 28 hours in a department which offers a major. He may not
minor in Finance or Management within the School of Business Administra-
tion. Otherwise, he may minor in accounting, economics, or marketing, or in
any other department within the University. A minor in accounting, economics
or marketing will require five advanced courses above the requirements listed
in the freshman curriculum, sophomore curriculum and business core. The se-
lection of a minor in other areas of the University should be discussed with
the student's adviser.
ELECTIVES
A student must take eight additional quarter hours outside the School of
Business Administration in any department he chooses. The remainder of his
electives may be taken within the School of Business Administration or from
any other department within the University. The student majoring in Indus-
trial Management must take Industrial Arts 121 and 342.
DEPARTMENT OF ACCOUNTING (ACC)
H. O. Jackson, Acting Chairman
Anderson, Carpenter, M. Davis, Forbes, J. Kelley, Kenamond, Mullen
Those students who plan to major in accounting should take Accounting
201, 202, and 203 in their freshman year and postpone part of their Basic College
core. They should continue by taking Accounting 301 and 302 in their sopho-
more year.
The following courses are recommended for students planning to minor
in Accounting: Accounting 202, 203, 301, 302, and three advanced accounting
courses.
ACCOUNTING
Freshman and sophomore curriculum 102
Business core 30
Accounting courses as listed below 36
Accounting 301 — Intermediate Accounting I 4
Accounting 302 — Intermediate Accounting II 4
Accounting 310 — Auditing 4
Accounting 32(V— Cost Accounting 4
Accounting 330 — Federal Income Tax 4
Accounting 401 — Advanced Accounting 4
Accounting 405 — Current Accounting Theory and Research 4
Accounting Electives 8
Electives 24
192
35
School of Business Administration
ACCOUNTING COURSES (ACC)
201 — Principles of Accounting I. Four hours.
The meaning and purpose of accounting; accounting statements and the ac-
counting cycle; special journals; notes and interest; bad debts; inventories.
Plant assets and depreciation.
202 — Principles of Accounting II. Four hours.
Bank reconciliation and petty cash; voucher system; concepts and princi-
ples; payrolls; taxes; partnerships; corporations.
203 — Principles of Accounting III. Four hours.
Departmental and branch accounting; job order, process, and standard cost
accounting; budgeting and internal reports; source and application of funds;
statement analysis.
300 — Administrative Applications of Accounting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 203.
A course designed to acquaint the student with the application of account-
ing principles to administrative decisions. (This course may not be applied to-
ward a major or minor in accounting.)
301 — Intermediate Accounting I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 203.
A resume of accounting theory and a brief review of accounting statements,
followed by an intensive study of inventories, tangible and intangible fixed as-
sets, cash and temporary investments, receivables, and current and contingent
liabilities.
302 — Intermediate Accounting II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 301.
A study of permanent investments, long-term debt, corporate capital, state-
ments from incomplete data, correction of errors, special problems of income
determination, analytical techniques, fund and cash flow statements.
310 — Auditing I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 301 and 302.
A study of auditing principles, techniques, and procedures, professional
ethics and legal responsibility, the audit program, field work, and the audit re-
port.
320 — Elementary Cost Accounting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 301 or consent of instructor.
Manufacturing statements and cost terminology; job order and process cost
accounting; material, labor, and overhead costs; standard costs and variance
analysis; direct costing; spoilage; joint and by-product costing.
330 — Federal Income Tax Accounting I. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 301 or consent of instructor.
An introductory course with emphasis on the computation and reporting of
ordinary income, capital gains and losses, exclusions, and deductions applicable
principally to individuals.
401 — Advanced Accounting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 302 or consent of instructor.
Partnership accounting, joint ventures, consignments and installment sales,
home office and branch, fund accounting, and annuities.
405-G405 — Current Accounting Theory and Research. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 310, 320, 330 and 401 or consent of instructor.
The study of current accounting problems, with special emphasis on the
published bulletins (pronouncements) of professional accounting organizations.
Students will explore specific contemporary controversial topics and write re-
search papers.
i 3 6
Economics
410-G410— Auditing II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 310.
A study of AICPA audit bulletins, application of statistical sampling tech-
niques to auditing, review of internal control procedures, and case studies in
auditing procedures.
420-G420 — Advanced Cost Accounting and Budgeting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 320.
A study of the managerial uses of accounting data including budgetary pro-
cedures and control. Emphasis will be on analyzing cost behavior, distribution
costing, cost analysis, break-even analysis, cost-profit-volume relationships, de-
cision making, budget preparation, cash and capital budgeting. Students will
also be required to write a research paper on a selected topic.
430-G430 — Federal Income Tax Accounting II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 330.
A continuation of Accounting 330 with emphasis on research in taxation,
accounting methods, special sales, payment of taxes, guides for partnerships,
estates, trusts, and corporations, and preparation and filing of required returns.
450-G450 — Accounting Systems. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 310.
A study of the nature and procedure of systems work with attention given
to the design and use of business papers and forms, mechanical equipment and
auxiliary devices, punched-card accounting methods, journals, ledgers, internal
checks, and applied accounting systems and procedures.
460-G460 — Consolidated Statements and Accounting for Fiduciaries. Four
hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 401 or consent of instructor.
Fiduciary accounting principles and reports, parent and subsidiary account-
ing including consolidations and mergers, and foreign exchange.
470-G470 — Municipal and Governmental Accounting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Accounting 203.
A study of the principles and standards of governmental accounting, with
emphasis on classification of accounts, fund accounting, statements and reports.
492-G492 — Research in Accounting Problems. One to four hours.
Prerequisite: Senior standing and approval of instructor.
A seminar course for advanced study in problems in cost accounting, budget-
ing, auditing, income tax, or governmental accounting.
DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS (ECO)
Louis Dixon, Acting Chairman
Baker, Greene, Johnson, Lee, McQuiston
The major curricula in economics are intended to prepare students for posi-
tions as economists in education, business, and government. The recommended
minor in economics constitutes a systematic study of the economic environment
in which we live. A few advanced courses have been designed to provide ap-
propriate instruction in economics to students in other major fields; and several
comprehensive introductory courses may be taken by those who are interested
in economics in a less formal way.
The recommended minor in economics for students outside the School of
Business Administration consists of Economics 252, 330, 340, 345, 440, 470 and
one elective in economics.
The School of Business Administration does not require a minor field. How-
ever, a student in the School may, if he so desires, minor in economics or include
an emphasis on economics through his choice of electives. Such a student should
consult closely with the Department of Economics faculty.
37
Department of Economics
ECONOMICS— BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Hours
Freshman and sophomore curriculum 102
Business core 30
Major requirements as listed below 36
Hours
Economics 310 — Economic History of the United States 4
Economics 340 — Price Theory 4
Economics 345 — Income Theory 4
Economics 435 — International Trade Theory 4
Economics 405 — Quantitative Analysis I 4
Economics 406 — Quantitative Analysis II 4
Economics 440 — Economic Growth 4
Economics 470 — Comparative Economic Systems 4
Economics (Elective) 4
Electives* 24
192
*Students considering graduate work in economics should consult frequently with Eco-
nomics Department advisers, and are urged to take some mathematics courses beyond
the minimum core requirements.
ECONOMICS— BACHELOR OF ARTS
FOREIGN TRADE— BACHELOR OF ARTS
The degree of Bachelor of Arts in economics or foreign trade is granted by
the College of Arts and Sciences. Curricula are outlined in the College of Arts
and Sciences section of this catalog.
ECONOMIC COURSES (ECO)
200 — Introduction to Economics. Four hours.
Not to be counted toward major, minor, or meeting the core requirements
of the School of Business.
An elementary survey of political economy and economic analysis.
251 — Principles of Economics I. Four hours.
An introduction to political economy and economic analysis with reference
to price determination in markets for both resources and final products under
competition and monopoly.
252 — Principles of Economics II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Normally preceded by Economics 251.
An introduction to political economy and economic analysis with reference
to international trade, economic growth, and the determination of income, em-
ployment, and the price level.
305 — Elementary Operations Research. Four hours.
An introduction to the use of quantitative techniques in managerial de-
cision-making.
310 — Economic History of the United States. Four hours.
A study of the economic forces that have influenced the development of the
United States from its European origins to the present.
330 — Money and Banking. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Economics 251 and 252.
An intermediate study of the nature and functions of money, the banking
system of the United States, and monetary theory.
335 — Economics of the Firm. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 251.
An intermediate study of the application of economic theory to managerial
decision-making.
340 — Price Theory. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 251.
An intermediate study of the determination of prices in factor and final
product markets.
, 3 8
Economics
345 — Income Theory. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 252.
An intermediate study of the determination of income and employment.
365 (Formerly listed as 410) — Economics of Labor. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Economics 251 and 252.
A study of the labor market with special reference to the institutional set-
ting, wage determination, and employment problems in an industrial economy.
400-G400— Public Finance. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Economics 251 and 252.
A study of federal and state spending and fund raising policies within the
context of the social goals to be accomplished by such policies.
405-G405 — Quantitative Analysis in Economics I. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Economics 335 or 340 or consent of instructor.
Usually offered in alternate years.
A survey of mathematical concepts particularly suited for their applica-
tion in economic theory of consumer and theory of the firm.
406-G406 — Quantitative Analysis in Economics II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 405.
Usually offered in alternate years.
Design, estimation, and testing of mathematical models in economic theory,
with emphasis on microeconomics.
420-G420 — Economics of Public Utilities. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Economics 251 and 252.
Usually offered in alternate years.
A study of the development, institutional bases, structure, and regulation
of public utilities.
430-G430 — Economics of Urban Areas. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Economics 251 and 252.
Usually offered in alternate years.
A study of the economic problems of urban areas, with special reference to
the problem of urban land utilization and the spending and fund-raising prob-
lems of municipal government.
435-G435 (Formerly listed as 350 -G350)— International Trade Theory. Four
hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 330.
A study of the historical development of international trade theory, the im-
portance of international trade, the mechanism of international payments, and
modern theories dealing with the subject.
436-G436 (Formerly listed as 355 -G355)— International Economic Relations.
Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 435.
A study of the problems and policies arising out of international economic
relations and practices.
440-G440 — Economic Growth. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 330.
A study of the nature, causes, and effects of regional and national economic
development.
445-G445 (Formerly listed as 360-G360)— Business Cycles. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 330.
A study of the nature, causes, and effects of business cycles, and of policies
to promote economic stability.
450-G450 — Money Markets and Monetary Policy. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 330.
Usually offered in alternate years.
A study of the nature and structure of money markets, of interest rate de-
termination and patterns, and of the effects of monetary policy on money mar-
kets.
39
School of Business Administration
460-G460— Fiscal Theory. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 330.
Usually offered in alternate years.
A study of the theoretical bases for governmental fiscal operations.
470 -G470— Comparative Economic Systems. Four hours.
A course designed to acquaint the student with the origins, development,
and characteristics of fascism, socialism, communism, and capitalism.
482-G482 — Contemporary Economic Problems I. Two hours.
Prerequisite4-Economics 330.
Usually offered in alternate years.
A study of the economic problems of monopoly, international trade, and in-
come distribution.
484-G484 — Contemporary Economic Problems II. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 330.
Usually offered in alternate years.
A study of the economic problems of the business cycle, inflation, growth,
and the size and influence of the public economy.
DEPARTMENT OF FINANCE AND GENERAL BUSINESS
(FIN)
R. R. Hardin, Chairman
Clements, Jordan, Otto, Stepp, Weisend
The objective of the Department of Finance and General Business is to
prepare its graduates to assume responsible positions in private business and
financial institutions and governmental agencies, to promote and operate their
own businesses more effectively, or to continue study in graduate or profes-
sional schools. The curricula in the Department are designed to give the student
a broad knowledge of our society and of the business world in which he will
function. Enough specialization is included to prepare students for positions in
respective areas of business. The Department includes majors in Finance and
in General Business. The Finance major provides area emphases in finance,
insurance, and real estate.
The recommended minor in General Business for a non-business major
is Accounting 201 and 202 or Economics 251, 252; Finance 389, and four ad-
vanced courses in the Department. There is no minor in Finance.
Major — General Business
Freshman and sophomore curriculum 102
Business core 30
Major requirements, minor and electives 60
Finance 415 or Economics 400 — Gov't, and Bus., or Public Finance 4
Finance 325 — General Insurance 4
Economics 410 — Economics of Labor 4
Management 364 — Personnel Management 4
Electives in Finance or Management 8
*Minor and Electives 36
*A major in General Business may not minor in Management or Finance but may minor
in any other department within the School of Business Administration or may choose a
minor in any other department within the University.
I40
Finance and General Business
Major — Finance
Freshman and sophomore curriculum 102
Business core 30
Major requirements as listed below 32
Finance 325 — General Insurance 4
Finance 350 — Banking Administration 4
Finance 370 or Economics 360 — Applied Statistics or
Business Cycles 4
Finance 452 — Investment Finance 4
Economics 410 — Public Finance 4
Finance 480 — Financial Management 4
Electives in Finance 8
*Electives 28
Alternate Major Emphasis, Insurance 32
Finance 325 — General Insurance 4
Finance 330— Real Estate 4
Finance 425 — Life Insurance 4
Finance 445 — Fire and Casualty Insurance 4
Finance 452 — Investment Finance 4
Electives in Finance 12
*Electives 28
Alternate Major Emphasis, Real Estate . 32
Finance 325 or Finance 445 — General Insurance or
Fire and Casualty Insurance 4
Finance 330— Real Estate 4
Finance 430— Real Estate Law 4
Finance 432 — Real Estate Finance 4
Finance 434 — Real Estate Appraising 4
Finance 436 — Property Management 4
Finance 438 — Principles of Industrial Real Estate 4
Electives in Finance 4
♦Electives 28
FINANCE COURSES (FIN)
100 — Introduction to Business. Four hours.
An introductory course to practically all phases of the business and
economic world for the beginning student in commerce.
300 — Elementary Statistics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Math 102 or 112.
A survey of probability concepts, measurements of central tendencies and
dispersion, statistical inference, and correlation.
310 — Business Law. Four hours.
The fundamental principles of law that apply to common business trans-
actions.
311 — Business Law. Four hours.
A more specific course in law as applied to business, especially suitable for
the accounting, finance and insurance majors.
320 — Personal and Family Finance. Four hours.
A study of the financial problems that people encounter in planning and
managing their own individual affairs. Emphasis is given to choosing an oc-
cuDation, budgeting, borrowing, savings and investments, life insurance, social
security and annuities, home ownership, taxes, estate planning, and wills and
trusts.
141
School of Business Administration
325 — General Insurance. Four hours.
A beginning course in insurance designed to explain the fundamental
principles of risk and risk bearing and to introduce the insurance mechanism
as a device for reducing risk and sharing losses.
330— Real Estate. Four hours.
An introduction to the field of real estate covering the principles of valua-
tion, appraisal, financing and marketing of real estate.
340 — Savings and Loan Institutions. Four hours.
A survey of the history and principles of savings and loan institutions, and
analysis of the organization, operation, and functions of savings and loan asso-
ciation, credit unions and other thrift institutions, and their relationship to the
American financial structure.
350 — Bank Administration. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Economics 330.
A comprehensive survey of practical bank administration, covering such
topics as bank practices and problems, loans and discounts, investments, fiduci-
ary and other services, and the money market.
361 — The Organization and Operation of a Small Business. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Principles of Accounting and Economics.
A course designed to give the student a knowledge of sound business
principles to be applied to the problems of organizing and operating a small
business.
362— Case Studies in Small Business Organization and Operation. Four
hours.
Prerequisite: Finance 361.
The principles studied in Finance 361 re-examined in the light of actual
business successes and failures.
370 — Applied Business Statistics. Four hours.
Prerequisite: A basic course in statistics.
The use of statistics in solving business problems.
375 — Business Problem Analysis and Report Writing. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Completion of Business Core.
To develop the student's ability to use sources of business information,
handle tabular and graphic presentation, and write business reports based upon
research and statistical techniques applied to problem-solving.
389 — Corporation Finance. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Accounting 203 and Economics 252.
A course dealing with the organization of corporations, methods of financ-
ing and types of securities, analysis of causes of failure, and rehabilitation of
bankrupt corporations.
415-G415 — Government and Business. Four hours.
A study of the place of government in the business world, with emphasis
on types of controls, regulation of public service corporations and financial in-
stitutions, laws to enforce competition, and government aids to business.
425-425G — Life Insurance. Four hours.
A comprehensive treatment of life insurance, with the use of materials
paralleling those approved by the American College of Life Underwriters.
430 — Real Estate Law. Four hours.
Designed to give the student a general background in real estate law cover-
ing such major points as land and its elements, easements, titles, deeds, record-
ing, brokers and managers, contracts of sales, insurance, and landlord and
tenant, with emphasis on case and problem solutions.
141
Management
432-G432— Real Estate Finance. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Finance 330.
Functions of real estate finances; the loan contract; the mortgage market;
elements of mortgage risk; loan policy and administration of loans; and analysis
of current mortgage market conditions.
434 — Real Estate Appraising. Four Hours.
Prerequisite: Finance 330.
Designed to train students in the technique and art of real estate apprais-
ing. This course is concerned with the application of the principles of property
valuation to the various classes of realty; stress is laid on the character of
land value, axioms of valuation and application of valuation procedures via
the cost, market, and income approach to real estate value. The case method
of instruction is used in order to enable students to prepare independent prop-
erty appraisal reports.
436 — Property Management. Four hours.
Management of real properties as a part of the real estate business; prin-
ciples of management and organization; collections expenditures and services;
physical care of the property; records; and agent's relation with tenant.
438 — Principles of Industrial Real Estate. Four hours.
Prerequisites. Finance 330.
A principles and problems study course concerned with financial, man-
agerial, and marketing phases of industrial real estate. The course will include
city planning, zoning, and development of industrial sites.
440-G440 — Transportation. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Principles of economics, marketing, and junior standing.
The principles, practices and problems of transportation that prevail in
the United States.
445 — Fire and Casualty Insurance. Four hours.
Prerequisite: A previous course in insurance.
An analysis of the fire pojicy, consequential loss contracts, ocean and inland
marine risks, automobile underwriting, business liability protection.
452-G452 — Investment Finance. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Finance 450.
The techniques of investment analysis as applied to industrial, railroad,
public utility, and other securities, with emphasis placed upon the importance
of a knowledge of American industry.
475 — Government Contracting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Finance 310.
A course designed to inform the student of the opportunities and proce-
dures of securing government contracts for business firms.
480-G480 — Financial Management. Four hours.
A study of the theory of assembling, investing, and managing capital. The
principles of choosing from among available, alternative combinations of
short-term debt, long-term debt, and equity. The principles of evaluating and
selecting capital projects; and the principles for combining capital and other
inputs in such a way as to maximize efficiency and maintain liquidity.
492 — Independent Study. Four hours.
A case problem to be worked out to meet the needs of the particular stu-
dent; to include a research paper to be presented to the major professor and
chairman of the department.
DEPARTMENT OF MANAGEMENT (MGT)
Martin Stegenga, Chairman
Bracey, J. Davis, Ellis, Guess
The program of study in management has two major objectives: (1) to give
M-3
School of Business Administration
the student a broad perspective of the organization and operation of the modern
business enterprise, with particular reference to its relationship to the economy
as a whole and (2) to prepare the student, by specialized training, to begin em-
ployment which may lead to positions of managerial responsibility.
Students interested in the management field have the option of electing to
major in either Industrial Management or Personnel Management. The Indus-
trial Management option places emphasis on production activities, motion and
time study, wage incentive methods, and the nature and characteristics of spe-
cific industries. The Personnel Management option emphasizes the study of
collective bargaining, labor law and legislation, the administration of wage
systems, and the administration of personnel with special reference to the
human relations aspects of the business enterprise.
Careers in management are available in industry, government, and teach-
ing. Beginning employment opportunities for which the management graduate
is trained include such sample jobs as: job analyst, foreman, production sched-
uler and dispatcher, time study man, employment interviewer, assistant training
supervisor, and junior management trainees. The student's broad education and
training will, when coupled with additional maturity and experience, serve to
further his career in more responsible management positions, such as production
or plant manager, labor relations director, and personnel manager.
The recommended minor in management for a non -business major is Eco-
nomics 251 and 252; Management 360; and four advanced courses in the Man-
agement Department.
Major — Personnel and Industrial Relations
Freshman and Sophomore Curriculum 106
Business Core 30
Major requirements as listed below 40
Accounting 300 — Managerial Accounting,
or an advanced economics course * 4
Management 364 — Personnel Management 4
Management 370 — Labor Law and Legislation 4
Economics 410 — Economics of Labor 4
Finance 415 — Government and Business 4
Management 454 — Human Relations 4
Management 456 — Industrial Training 2
Management 468 — Wage and Salary Administration 4
Management 472 — Collective Bargaining 4
Management 474 — Supervisory Management 2
Management 484 — Problems in Personnel Administration 4
Electives 16
Major — General and Industrial Management
Freshman and Sophomore Curriculum 108
Business Core 30
Major requirements as listed below 38
Accounting 320 — Cost Accounting 4
Management 362 — Introduction to Industrial Management 4
Management 370 — Labor Law and Legislation 4
Finance 370 — Applied Business Statistics 4
Management 386 — Industrial Safety 2
Management 464 — Time and Motion Study 4
Management 466 — Production and Quality Control 4
Management 468 — Wage and Salary Administration 4
Management 476 — Managerial Systems Analysis 4
Management 482 — Production Problems Seminar 4
Electives 16
144
Management
MANAGEMENT COURSES (MGT)
360 — Principles of Management. Four hours.
Basic management concepts and principles applied to the functions of plan-
ning, organization and control in business enterprise.
362 — Introduction to Industrial Management. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Management 360.
The basic principles and policies in the management of an industrial plant,
covering such topics as plant location and layout, purchasing, materials hand-
ling, maintenance, and production control systems.
364 — Personnel Management. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Management 360.
A course covering the tools of personnel management, with principal em-
phasis on the major task of procuring, developing, maintaining, and using an
effective work force.
370 — Labor Law and Legislation. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Management 360.
A study of the development of legislation and of court decisions pertaining
to labor relations. Special emphasis is given to the importance of legal principles
involved in managerial decisions.
386— Industrial Safety. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Management 362.
A study of the nature, causes, and costs of industrial accidents and occupa-
tional diseases. An analysis of safety problems and procedures in establishing
industrial safety programs
454 — Human Relations. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Management 364.
A study of individual and group interaction and behavior in the business
and industrial environment with emphasis on interpersonal and intergroup mo-
tivations and conflicts.
456 — Industrial Training. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Management 364.
A study of the methods, procedures, and psychology in planning and organ-
izing effective in-service training programs for employees and management.
464 — Motion and Time Study. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Management 362 and Finance 300 or Mathematics 320.
A general course in the fundamentals of operation analysis, motion economy,
micromotion techniques, time study, job standards, and fatigue and industrial
efficiency.
466 — Production and Quality Control. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Management 362 and Finance 300 or Mathematics 320.
An evaluation of some of the problems of management as they relate to the
production and quality of output, with emphasis upon statistical methods and
other management techniques to achieve acceptable quality in production at
minimum cost.
468-G468 — Wage and Salary Administration. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Management 362 or Management 364.
A study of wage and salary structures; preparation and use of job analyses,
descriptions, and specifications; job evaluation, incentive systems, and individ-
ual wage determination; and wage surveys, fringe benefits, and merit rating
systems.
472-G472 — Collective Bargaining. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Management 370.
A study of the practices, techniques, procedures, methods, and legal and
administrative requirements of collective bargaining, with a consideration of
the points of view of the worker, the union, the employer, and the general public.
I 45
School of Business Administration
474 — Supervisory Management. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Management 360 or Management 364.
A study of the responsibilities of the line supervisor; development of tech-
niques and skills in job training, maintenance of morale, motivation, handling
grievances, interviewing, and counseling through case studies, role playing, and
conference procedures.
476 — Managerial Systems Analysis. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Management 464.
An analysis of management systems and procedures techniques for im-
proving managerial controls and reducing operating costs; includes a study of
work measurement, forms control, Monte Carlo and queuing theories, and an
introduction to electronic data processing concepts and business applications.
482-G482 — Production Problems Seminar. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Management majors only and consent of adviser.
Special study of selected current problems in manufacturing production. A
case approach to such problems as plant and warehouse location, selection and
maintenance of equipment, product mix and quality, purchasing, and production
controls.
484-G484 — Problems in Personnel Administration. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Management majors only and consent of adviser.
An application through case analysis of the principles and techniques in
personnel administration. A problems and case approach to develop proficiency
in applying principles and developing decision-making ability.
DEPARTMENT OF MARKETING (MKT)
Richard C. Vreeland, Chairman
Sorbet, Williams, Bullard
There are three basic functions performed by any business organization:
marketing, production, and finance. The goal of the Department of Marketing
is to train students to fill competently positions as managers of the marketing
function. It is necessary, therefore, that the student not only learn the subject
of marketing but that he also master certain executive skills, of which ability
to think is usually considered the most important. Other attributes of significance
are the ability to: (1) solve problems; (2) communicate orally and in writing;
(3) understand and work with people.
The context of marketing courses provides the student with a basic knowl-
edge of marketing principles and techniques. The method used in teaching the
material enables the student to develop the skills necessary to utilize this
knowledge after graduation.
For a student not majoring in the School of Business Administration, a
minor in marketing can be earned by completing 28 hours of courses in the fol-
lowing recommended sequence:
1. Finance 100, and Marketing 300
2. Marketing 330, 332, and 355 (select any two)
3. Marketing 400, 432 or 375 (select one)
4. Any two marketing electives
Students majoring in marketing are required to take a specialized program
in either General Marketing, Sales and Sales Management, Advertising or Retail
Management. In each of these programs a marketing core of three courses is
essential and should be completed in the following recommended sequence dur-
ing the senior year:
1. Marketing 370, Marketing Problems
2. Marketing 410, Marketing Research
3. Marketing 480, Marketing Management
The courses needed to complete an area of specialization are listed below:
[46
Marketing
General Marketing
Staff, Advisers
Hours
Freshman and Sophomore curriculum 102
Business Core 30
Major requirements as listed below 32
Marketing 330 — Salesmanship 4
Marketing 332 — Principles of Retailing 4
Marketing 355 — Principles of Advertising 4
Marketing Core 12
Marketing Electives 8
Electives 28
Sales and Sales Management
Dr. Williams, Adviser
Hours
Freshman and Sophomore curriculum 102
Business Core 30
Major requirements as listed below 32
Marketing 330 — Salesmanship 4
Marketing 400 — Sales Management 4
Marketing Core 12
Marketing Electives 12
Electives 28
Advertising
Dr. Sorbet, Adviser
Hours
Freshman and Sophomore curriculum 102
Business Core 30
Major requirements as listed below 32
Marketing 355 — Principles of Advertising 4
Marketing 375 — Advanced Advertising 4
Marketing 475 — Promotion Development 4
Marketing Core 12
Marketing Electives 8
Electives 28
Retail Management
Dr. Vreeland, Adviser
Hours
Freshman and Sophomore curriculum 102
Business Core 30
Major requirements as listed below 40
Marketing 332 — Principles of Retailing 4
Marketing 435 — Advanced Retailing 4
Marketing 461 and 462 — Retail Management Training 12
Marketing Core 12
Marketing Electives 8
Electives 20
MARKETING COURSES (MKT)
300 — Principles of Marketing. Four hours.
A survey course designed to give a general understanding of marketing in
present day society, the channels involved in the distribution of goods, the func-
tions performed by the institutions and agencies in marketing.
330 — Salesmanship. Four hours.
A study of the principles of persuasion as applied to the art of salesmanship.
47
School of Business Administration
332 — Principles of Retailing. Four hours.
A survey course comprising an analysis of the factors underlying the suc-
cessful operation of retail stores including location, stock arrangement, buying
and selling, advertising and display, merchandise, planning and control, per-
sonnel management, and customer relations.
355 — Principles of Advertising. Four hours.
A study of methods used to disseminate among groups information concern-
ing goods and services, the sales promotional aspects of such dissemination, and
the evaluation techniques available.
360 — Credit and Collection. Four hours.
A study of the nature of credit in its relation to the distribution of goods,
the management activities involved, and collection procedures available.
370 — Marketing Problems. Four hours.
An introductory course in problem-solving techniques which emphasizes
creative problem-solving methodology as applied to marketing.
375 — Advanced Advertising. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Marketing 355.
A study of principles and techniques of advertising presentation adaptable
to mass communication media and direct advertising.
400 — Sales Management. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Marketing 330.
A study of the principles involved in the selection, training, and manage-
ment of salesmen. Also considered is the application of these principles in order
to make the selling function more efficient.
410- G410— Marketing Research. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 320.
A study of principles and techniques used in marketing research to solve
factual and qualitative marketing problems.
432-G432 — Advanced Retailing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Marketing 332.
A study of the various operations performed in a retail store. The modified
case method of instruction is used.
380 — Industrial Marketing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Marketing 300.
A study of the special problems involved in marketing materials, equip-
ment, and supplies to manufacturers, other business firms, and institutions that
use the goods in further production; determination of methods and policies ap-
propriate to the goods and the marketing situations.
E461-E462 — Retail Management Training. Six hours each.
Prerequisite: Permission of the Chairman of the Marketing Department.
Experience in the operation and management of retail activities. Work is
to be done in a cooperating retail store. Management trainee is under the con-
trol of and makes reports to faculty supervisor.
Twelve hours of credit must be earned by the students. Part-time work
will receive a maximum of six hours of credit per quarter. Full-time work will
receive twelve hours of credit per quarter. The credit given for these courses
will be extension credit rather than residence credit. This means the student
cannot take this work his last quarter before graduating unless it is part-time
work and he is carrying at least twelve hours of class work. The hours earned
in 461-462 must be included in the amount of extension and correspondence
credit which may be applied toward a degree.
148
Marketing
475-G475 — Promotion Development. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Marketing 355 or consent of instructor.
A study of the relationship of the business organization to the various
interest groups which affect its promotional results, and the policies and pro-
cedures utilized in connection with such groups.
480-G480 — Marketing Management. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Open only to majors or minors in marketing during their
senior year.
A comprehensive course designed to synthesize the more specialized
marketing knowledge of the student. The interrelation of all marketing activi-
ties in reaching the firm's objectives is emphasized through the study of case
histories.
149
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION AND PSYCHOLOGY
Carl L. McQuagge, Dean
The University of Southern Mississippi, through its School of Education
and Psychology, holds membership in the American Association of Colleges for
Teacher Education. All undergraduate programs in teacher education are fully
accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education.
The teacher- education programs offered by the University on the under-
graduate level fall into three major categories: Elementary Education, Second-
ary Education, and Special Areas. For details of graduate teacher -education
programs, consult the Graduate Bulletin.
PURPOSES
The purposes of the School of Education and Psychology are: (1) to prepare
teachers for the public schools and the colleges and universities of Mississippi
and other states; (2) to offer, in addition to the undergraduate teacher-education
programs categorized above, non-teaching degree programs on the under-
graduate level in Library Science, Industrial Arts, Office Management, Execu-
tive Secretarial Studies. Psychology, Corrective Therapy, and Recreation (for
graduate level non-teaching degree programs, consult the Graduate Bulletin);
(3) to provide clinical and professional services to the public schools of Mis-
sissippi and to the University; and (4) to promote educational and psycho-
logical research.
These purposes are achieved through: (1) the work of the various depart-
ments in the School; (2) clinics and offices for professional services; (3) co-
operation with the public schools; and (4) cooperation with other colleges,
schools, and divisions of the University in the development of teacher-educa-
tion programs that meet requirements for Mississippi certification.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
1. A 2.1 quality point average on all courses undertaken.
2. Completion of the University's Basic College core.
3. A "C" average in Freshman English. (Courses with grades below "C" may be
repeated to raise the grade)
4. An application for admission must be made to the School of Education and
Psychology and approved by the Dean of the School. The application must
show all college work completed, quality point average, and a planned
program for each quarter the student expects to be in the School of Educa-
tion and Psychology. In addition to the above, the student must indicate a
major and a minor if required. A student enrolled in the Basic College of
the University of Southern Mississippi will file a completed application for
transfer from the Basic College. Transfers into the School of Education and
Psychology from other colleges will be given tentative approval based upon
an evaluation of the transcripts filed with the Admissions Office. Upon
coming to the campus for registration, each transfer student will be re-
quired to file the program plan for each quarter required to complete his
degree. When this is done the student will be given final approval for ad-
mission, clearing him for registration. (See instructions for filing applica-
tions and programs.)
5. All applicants to a teacher education program will be screened for charac-
teristics that might impair their teaching effectiveness. The screening proc-
ess will be part of FED 300 which every applicant to teacher education
except music education majors must take. Music education majors will be
screened by the Music Education Department. Any student who is not ap-
proved by the screening may appeal to the Dean of the School of Educa-
tion and Psychology for further consideration by a special committee.
The student will make application for admission to a teacher education pro-
gram during the quarter he takes FED 300.
I50
Teacher Education
TEACHER-EDUCATION PROGRAMS AND REQUIREMENTS
No program in teacher education is available to the student still enrolled in
the Basic College. The student must be admitted to an upper-level college,
school, or division of the University and must be approved for a teacher-educa-
tion program by the Dean of the School of Education and Psychology before
entering upon the program.
Having completed the Basic College core, students enrolling in the School
of Education and Psychology to seek teaching degrees must also complete the
additional requirements of the School and the special requirements for the
major and minor in teacher-education programs. These requirements are de-
tailed below.
To prepare for a career in Elementary Education, grades one through
eight, the student will engage in a comprehensive elementary education pro-
gram which requires no minor area of study. The recommended program of
studies is treated in detail under the Elementary Education Section of this
catalog.
To prepare for a career in Secondary Education, grades seven through
twelve, the student will major in an academic area and minor in Secondary
Education, following the Secondary Education curriculum recommended below.
The academic majors available for certification in Secondary Education are:
Biology German
Business Education (40-49 hours) History*
Chemistry Home Economics (52 hours)**
Economics* Industrial Arts (45 hours)
English (45 hours) Library Science
French Mathematics
General Science Physics
General Speech Political Science*
Geography* Sociology*
Spanish
♦Students majoring in economics, geography, history, political science, or sociology and
minoring in Secondary Education must include in their degree programs the following
courses: world history — 8 quarter hours; American history — 8 quarter hours; Mississippi
history — 4 quarter hours; economics — 4 quarter hours; political science — 4 quarter hours;
geography— -4 quarter hours.
Note: One cannot be certified in economics, geography, history, political science, or
sociology. (See note above for requirements). A major in one of the social studies areas
is a University requirement.
**Home Economics majors will enroll in the Division of Home Economics, but will
also apply to the School of Education and Psychology for approval of their secondary edu-
cation teaching program.
The Special Areas in which teacher-education programs are available,
grades one through twelve, are:
School of Fine Arts
Art Education
Music Education
School of Education and Psychology
Audiology***
Health and Physical Education (22 hours Health, 22 hours Physical
Education)
Language Disorders***
Library Science
Special Education
Speech Pathology***
***Curricula for the Audiology, Language Disorders, and Speech Pathology majors
will be found in the Department of Speech and Hearing Sciences of the College of Arts
and Sciences. Any student preparing to become a special areas teacher in one of these
major fields will enroll in the School of Education and Psychology, and will then be as-
signed to the Department of Speech and Hearing Sciences for courses in the major. The
teaching degree will be awarded by the School of Education and Psychology.
I 5 I
School of Education and Psychology
TEACHING DEGREES
The student preparing to teach will normally pursue the Bachelor of Science
teaching degree which is offered only in the School of Education and Psychology.
The major exception is Home Economics, as explained in the note above. The
student preparing to teach may also pursue the Bachelor of Arts degree, with
Secondary Education as the minor. This B.A. teaching degree may be awarded
by either the College of Arts and Sciences or the School of Education and Psy-
chology. However, if the student elects to pursue the B.A. degree from the
College of Arts and Sciences with Secondary Education as a minor, the stu-
dent's program must be approved by the Dean of the School of Education and
Psychology (all requirements for admission into a teacher-education program
being applicable).
CERTIFICATION
A student completing successfully any of the degree programs listed above
will meet the requirements for certification in Mississippi. He will also meet the
accrediting requirements of the National Council of Accreditation for Teacher
Education, and will receive the University of Southern Mississippi's institutional
endorsement. Such institutional endorsement means that the student will be
certified automatically in about thirty states in addition to Mississippi.
COMBINED BASIC COLLEGE CORE AND SCHOOL OF EDUCATION AND
PSYCHOLOGY REQUIREMENTS FOR TEACHING DEGREE
In addition to the Basic College core curriculum, the requirements of the
School of Education and Psychology consist of courses essential to certification
and institutional endorsement. These requirements vary for elementary and
secondary education degree candidates. The National Teacher Examination is
required of all candidates for the teaching degree.
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
Students preparing for elementary teaching must satisfy the following pro-
gram requirements. Due to the comprehensive nature of the Elementary Edu-
cation sequence, the following courses satisfy Basic College core curriculum
and major and minor area requirements for an Elementary Education major in
the School of Education and Psychology. The combined requirements are:
Courses by Departments: Hours
English 101, 102, 103, 201, 202, or 433 20
History 101 and 102 8
Science 20
Physical Science— FS 104 and 105—8 hours
Biological Science— FS 106 and 107—8 hours
Science Education 432 — 4 hours
Mathematics 100 and 318 8
Social Science 12
Political Science 101 — 4 hours
Elect Two different courses from the following:
Economics 200 or 251
Geography 103
Sociology 103 or 210 — 8 hours
Physical Education — 6 non-credit activity courses
Health 179 and PE 409 8
Military Science (men only) 6
Public Address 101 or 310 4
1 5 1
Student Teaching
Psychology 201, Educational Psychology 316 and 319 12
Music 165 (if Art 120 is not elected) and Music 361, Music 362 8 or 12
Art 120 (if Music 165 is not elected) and Art 107 and 309 8 or 12
Foundations in Education 300, 416, and 469 12
Elementary Education 301, 305, 306, 309, 311, 317, 412 28
Student Teaching and EED 343 16
Electives (including Military Science) 24
SECONDARY EDUCATION
As noted above, the student preparing to teach at the secondary school level
takes an academic major in a subject-matter field and a minor in Secondary
Education. Advisement in the subject matter area will be given by the depart-
ment chairman or someone he designates. Advisement for professional education
will be given by the Chairman of the Department of Secondary Education. The
combined requirements are:
English 101, 102, 103, 201, 202 or 433 20
History 101, 102 8
Science 16
Non-Science Majors
Biological Science — 8 hours
Physical Science — 8 hours
Science majors must take laboratory sciences and should see re-
quirements for majors in the sciences. Non-science majors may
take Fundamentals of Science.
Mathematics (any four quarter hour course) 4
Social Science 12
Political Science 101 — 4 hours
Elect two courses from the following for 8 hours
Economics 200 or 251
Sociology 103 or 210
Geography 103
Other Courses — Students planning to enter the School of Education
and Psychology must take the following 16
Health 179
Public Address 101
Psychology 201
Music 165 or Art 120
Secondary Education Minor
Foundations Education 300 4
Educational Psychology 332 and 319 8
Secondary Education 313, 451, and 481* 20
Foundations Education 469 4
Physical Education — six quarters (no credit)
Military Science (for Men) 6
Major requirements and electives will constitute the balance of the
degree requirements.
♦See student teaching below.
OFFICE OF STUDENT TEACHING
Ralph L. White, Director
Campbell, Padgett, Peddicord, Rogers, Scoggins
The basic purpose of the student teacher program is to provide all students
in teacher- education with opportunities that will assist them in developing the
skills and competencies necessary for a beginning teacher. The student teach-
ing program provides an environment for a realistic evaluation of the strengths
and weaknesses of prospective teachers.
All student teaching is done in off-campus cooperating schools designated
by the Director of Student Teaching. The student teacher's assignment is for
a full-day, full-quarter for which he earns twelve quarter hours credit. Super-
*53
School of Education and Psychology
vision is provided by cooperating school personnel and faculty members of the
University.
Each student must follow the procedure listed below in submitting both
his request and application for student teaching.
REQUEST— Formal request must be submitted to the Office of Student Teach-
ing during the registration period two quarters prior to student teaching.
Request for fall quarter student teaching must be filed during the registra-
tion period of the previous winter quarter.
APPLICATION — On the day the student is regularly scheduled to register, one
quarter prior to student teaching, the prospective student teacher must
obtain his application for student teaching. The application must be com-
pleted and submitted with his adviser's signature within ten days.
All student teachers:
1. Must have completed a minimum of 132 quarter hours of college work.
2. Each candidate must have completed a minimum of 24 quarter hours
in his major field, eight of which must have been taken in residence in this in-
stitution.
3. At the time the student submits his application he must have at least a
2.2 over-all grade average.
4. Candidates for student teaching in the elementary school must have
completed the following courses: FED 300, EED 301, EED 305, 306, EED 307,
309, 311, EPY 316, and SCE 432.
5. Candidates for student teaching in the secondary school must have com-
pleted the following courses: FED 300, EPY 319, SED 451, and other methods.
6. Each candidate must have passed the English Proficiency Examination.
7. Each candidate must have been admitted to a teacher education program
for at least two quarters.
8. The student will be expected to spend the entire school day in an off-
campus school designated by the Director of Student Teaching.
Candidates for student teaching in the secondary school should register for
SED 313, Principles of Teaching in High School, simultaneously with student
teaching.
Candidates for student teaching in the elementary school should register
for EED 343, Methods and Materials in Elementary Education, simultaneously
with student teaching.
For specific requirements, see Elementary Education courses listed as EED
480, 482, 489, and Secondary Education courses listed as SED 481 A through S,
and SED 489.
Student teaching for in-service teachers will be offered each summer quar-
ter for eight quarter hours. To be eligible for this course the teacher must
have had two full years of teaching experience and meet all other requirements
for student teaching. Applications for the seminar in student teaching must be
made to the Director of Student Teaching by March.
CURRICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-TEACHING DEGREES
The School of Education and Psychology offers major programs in Psy-
chology, Library Science, Office Management, Executive Secretarial Studies,
Recreation, and Industrial Arts leading to the Bachelor of Science non- teaching
degree. Students in Psychology, Library Science, and Architectural Drafting
may take programs leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree. The requirements
for these non-teaching degrees are listed below.
Bachelor of Science (Non-Teaching)
English 101, 102, 103, 201, 202 or 433 20
History 101, 102 8
*54
Special Sciences
Science* 12
Mathematics 4
Social Science 12
Political Science 101 — 4 hours.
Elect two courses from the following for 8 hours
Economics 200 or 251
Sociology 103 or 210
Geography 103
Other Courses in the Basic College 12 or 20
**Philosophy 101 or 210
Fine Arts, Music 165 or Art 120
Public Address
Psychology 201
♦♦Psychology 202
Physical Education non-credit (six quarters)
Military Science (for Men) 6
Major requirements and electives will constitute the balance of the degree
requirements.
♦Biology or physic recommended for psychology major.
**Required for Psychology majors only.
Bachelor of Arts
Same as Bachelor of Science Non-teaching degree with the addition
of twelve (12) to eighteen (18) hours of a Foreign Language.
SPECIAL SCHOOL SERVICES
Audio- Visual Center
S. L. Knight, Director
Recognizing a need for audio-visual services in the state, the University of
Southern Mississippi has established an Audio-Visual Center on the campus.
Activities of the Center include a film service for Mississippi schools, a program
for the use of audio-visual materials in college classes, and courses in audio-
visual education taught both on and off the campus.
The Center is prepared to assist local schools in setting up a program for
the use of audio-visual materials, and to assist through in-service and pre-
service training in the interpretation of the values derived from the use of
audio -visual instructional aids in education.
The film collection of the Audio-Visual Center comprises over 1,700 reels
on educational subjects. The collection includes University-owned films and films
deposited by members of the South Mississippi Educational Film Association.
Through a cooperative agreement member schools buy a specified number of
films which may be used each week from the total collection of the film library.
Thus an educational film service is provided for the schools of Mississippi at a
fractional part of rental charges customary with commercial film libraries. This
cooperative film service has been in operation for a period of eighteen years
with a success which predicts a permanently functioning organization.
The film library, one of forty-nine in the United States with over 1,000
primary instructional films, is an important part of the audio-visual courses
providing many stimulating opportunities for students enrolled in audio -visual
education.
Any school interested in membership in the South Mississippi Educational
Film Association should write to the Director, Audio -Visual Center, Box 54,
University of Southern Mississippi, for further information.
Psychological and Special Education Clinic
L. Erl Mehearg, Director
The University of Southern Mississippi, through the Psychological and
Special Education Clinic, affords students opportunity for clinical experience in
*55
School of Education and Psychology
addition to the course work in the several areas of special education and
psychology. The program provides for experience in diagnostic testing and psy-
chological appraisal, and for working with both children and adults in the
Psychological Clinic setting.
Members of the clinic staff and the psychology department serve on the
regional screening team which assists the public schools of the area in psy-
chological appraisal of children and the determination of eligibility for place-
ment in special education classes. The staff works very closely with the State
Supervisor of Special Education and with state school systems, to provide
students with excellent practicum facilities and experience.
The Developmental Reading Center
Elizabeth M. Antley, Director
The Developmental Reading Center is an organized group of professional
people whose primary function is that of helping various segments of the popu-
lation to improve their reading abilities.
The Center's functions are varied, but its primary concern is that of edu-
cating teachers in methods, techniques, materials, and equipment for effective
reading in the classroom. Additional functions include the training of graduate
and advanced graduate students for reading specialization in developmental
or diagnostic and remedial reading. As a part of the diagnostic and remedial
reading specialization of graduate students, the Center is able to offer limited
services in diagnosis of reading problems and remedial reading to children re-
ferred to the Center. The cost of the diagnostic evaluation which includes a
suggested program of remedial procedures is $20.00, or a proportionate part,
based on ability to pay. Remedial instruction for four periods a week is $20.00
per month.
Consultant services are available to schools throughout the state by the
Center staff. An up-to-date collection of materials used for reading instruction
and a library of children's books are open for examination.
University students and adults may obtain testing, counseling, and special
reading instruction by applying at the Center. The type of instruction offered
will depend upon the type of help needed and the availability of instruction at
the time of application. University students can also receive instruction in the
reading areas of comprehension, vocabulary development, and study skills im-
provement through enrolling in the Center's "Improvement of Study" course.
An annual reading conference is held each June where nationally known
reading authorities present the program.
The Developmental Reading Center Faculty and graduate students con-
duct research in reading and are available to assist other researchers in read-
ing research.
Speech and Hearing Clinic
Robert W. Peters, Director
The Speech and Hearing Clinic is operated by the Department of Speech
and Hearing Sciences in the College of Arts and Sciences, but it works with the
School of Education and Psychology very closely in the preparation of Special
Education teachers.
This Clinic has a dual function. It provides facilities for the training of
specialists in the area of clinical speech and audiology, and provides clinical
services for persons with speech and hearing problems.
The Clinic's services include both diagnostic examinations and therapy pro-
grams for both children and adults who have speech or hearing problems. These
services are available to both University students and members of the com-
munity at nominal fees.
Speech and Hearing Clinic Services:
Audiometric pure tone test $ 5.00
Diagnostic Hearing Evaluation 10.00
Hearing aid evaluation 15.00
5*
Business Education
Hearing evaluation for medical-legal compensation claims 25.00
Diagnostic Speech evaluation 10.00
Speech or Hearing Therapy fees per session 2.00
Therapy fees for college students per quarter 5.00
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS EDUCATION (BED)
Annelle Bonner, Acting Chairman
Baldwin, Cameron, Ewell, Reck
The Department of Business Education offers curricula in business teacher
education, office management, a four-year program in executive secretarial
studies, and a two-year program leading to a specialized certificate in secretarial
training.
The student who plans to teach business subjects on the high school level will
follow the curriculum prescriptions which lead to the Bachelor of Science teach-
ing degree. He will enroll in the School of Education and Psychology upon com-
pletion of his work in the Basic College and, therefore, must meet the admission
requirements for that school. His major field of concentration will be in busi-
ness subject matter prescribed by the Department of Business Education. The
professional education and psychology requirements constitute the minor.
The recommended minor in secretarial studies is 12 hours in typewriting,
12 hours in shorthand, and 12 hours in advanced business education courses. A
year of typewriting and a year of shorthand taken in high school will reduce the
number of recommended hours to 28.
To complete the curriculum requirements in business teacher education,
executive secretarial studies, or secretarial training, one course in typewriting
and one course in shorthand must be taken at the University of Southern Mis-
sissippi. A student with one year of typewriting in high school cannot get credit
for BED 101, and a student with one year of shorthand in high school cannot
get credit for BED 201. A student who has had more work than this in either or
both fields should consult with the Chairman of the Department of Business
Education about the appropriate beginning courses for his program. With spe-
cial permission from the Department Chairman, a student may graduate with a
major in business teacher education without shorthand. In this case, the Class A
teaching certificate will reveal this inadequacy.
Business Teacher Education
College Core requirements 76 or 82
English 101, 102, 103 12
English 201 4
English 202 or 433 4
History 101, 102 8
Mathematics 4
Science — Biological and Physical (May be Fundamentals
of Science) 16
Political Science 101 4
Economics 251 4
Health 179 4
Sociology 103 or 210, or Geography 103 4
Public Address 101 4
Psychology 201 4
Fine Arts 4
Physical Education (one course each quarter for six quarters)
Military Science (for men) 6
Professional education and psychology 36
These courses constitute the minor in business teacher education.
The special method course is SED 451A.
Departmental subject matter requirements 80
BED 101, 102, 310; BED 201, 202, 305, 371, 372; ACC 201, 202, 203;
BED 300, 352, 354, 385, 450, 460; ECO 252; FIN 310, 389; and one
!57
School of Education and Psychology
course elected from MKT 300, ECO 330, or MGT 360. Business skills
courses taken in high school will reduce the total number of hours
required for the major.
Electives to complete a total of 192 hours
192
Office Management
Freshman and sophomore curriculum 102
English 101, 102, 103, 201, 202 or 433 20
History 101, 102 8
Laboratory Science 12
Mathematics 8
(Mathematics 100 or Algebra 101, Mathematics 112 or 320)
Social Science 12
Political Science 101 4
Economics 251 4
Elect one course from these four: Economics 252,
Sociology 103 or 210, Geography 103 4
Health 179 4
Public Address 101 4
Psychology 201 4
Music 165 or Art 120 4
Accounting 201, 202, 203 12
Physical Education (one course each quarter for six quarters)
Military Science (for men) 6
Electives to complete 102 hours 4
102
Major requirements 74
Business Education 101, 102, 310— Typewriting 12
Business Education 300 — Business Writing 4
Business Education 352 — Filing Systems and Records Management 2
Business Education 354 — Problems in Typewriting 2
Business Education 385 — Office Practice and Procedures 4
Business Education 450 — Office Appliances 4
Business Education 460 — Office Management 4
Marketing 300 — Principles of Marketing 4
Finance 310, 311 — Business Law, 375 — Report Writing, and
389 — Corporation Finance 14
Economics 330 — Money and Banking 4
Management 364 — Personnel Management, 454 — Human Relations,
and 464— Motion and Time Study 12
Psychology 202 — Applied Psychology 4
Psychology 449 — Industrial Psychology 4
*See note below relative to business skills courses.
Electives to total 192 hours 16
Executive Secretarial Studies
192
Freshman and sophomore curriculum 102
The same curriculum as shown for Office Management with these
exceptions: Only four hours of mathematics are required and only
eight hours of accounting.
Major requirements 72
♦Business Education 101, 102, 310— Typewriting 12
♦Business Education 201, 202, 305, 371, 372— Shorthand 20
Business Education 300 — Business Writing 4
I5 8
Business Education
Business Education 352 — Filing Systems and Records
Management 2
Business Education 354 — Problems in Typewriting 2
Business Education 385 — Office Practice and Procedures 4
Business Education 450 — Office Appliances 4
Business Education 460 — Office Management 4
Marketing 300 — Principles of Marketing 4
Finance 310, 311 — Business Law, 389 — Corporation Finance 12
Economics 330 — Money and Banking 4
*Business skills courses taken in high school will reduce the total
number of hours required for the major. Hours thus saved may be
applied to these recommended courses: Finance 100 — Introduction
to Business, and 454 — Human Relations.
Electives to total 192 hours 18
192
Secretarial Training
Two- Year Curriculum
Required general education courses ! 24
English 101, 102, 103— English Composition 12
Public Address 101 — Oral Communication 4
Mathematics 100 — Basic Mathematics or 101 — Algebra 4
Physical Education — Activity courses (one each quarter)
Social Studies — Government 101, History 101 or 102,
Sociology 103, Geography 143, or Psychology 201 4
Required business courses as listed below . 68
♦Business Education 101, 102, and 310— Typewriting 12
♦Business Education 201, 202, 305, 371, and 372— Shorthand 20
Business Education 300— Business Writing 4
Business Education 352 — Filing Systems and Records Management 2
Business Education 354 — Problems in Typewriting 2
Business Education 385 — Office Practice and Procedures 4
Business Education 450 — Office Appliances 4
Business Education 460 — Office Management 4 jii[j||
Accounting 201 and 202 — Principles of Accounting 8
Economics 251 — Principles of Economics 4
Finance 310 — Business Law 4
Elective 4
96
*A student who has had one year of typewriting in high school will
start his program with BED 102, and a year of shorthand in high
school, with BED 202. The hours saved are to be used on the follow-
ing courses: FIN 100, ECO 252, ACC 203, MKT 300, FIN 375; SED
334; or the Social Studies courses listed in the general education re-
quirements.
BUSINESS EDUCATION COURSES (BED)
101 — Elementary Typewriting. Four hours.
This course is for beginners in typewriting. Emphasis is given to acquiring
keyboard control, developing correct typewriting techniques, and applying this
acquired skill to letter writing and simple tabulated reports. No credit is given
to a student whose high school transcript shows one unit in typewriting.
102 — Intermediate Typewriting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 101 or equivalent.
A review of keyboard and manipulative controls, with emphasis on letter
styles, manuscripts, and tabulated reports. Students who have had more than
one year of typewriting in high school should enroll in BED 310.
201 — Beginning Shorthand. Four hours.
The theory and practice of Gregg shorthand, with emphasis on fluency of
*59
School of Education and Psychology
writing and reading; a limited amount of dictation and transcription. English
101, 102, and 103 to be taken concurrently or to have been completed previously.
202 — Intermediate Shorthand. Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 201 or equivalent.
Completion of theory of Gregg shorthand, with some emphasis on dictation
and transcription. English 101, 102, and 103 to be taken concurrently or to have
been completed.
300 — Business Writing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: English 101, 102, and 103, and ability to typewrite.
A study of principles and techniques used in writing effective business let-
ters, memorandums, and other forms of business communication. Emphasis is
placed on analyzing and solving business problems through written communica-
tion.
305 — Dictation and Transcription. Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 202 or two years of high school shorthand.
A constant automatic review of shorthand theory, developing the student's
shorthand speed and emphasizing mailable transcripts.
310 — Advanced Typewriting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 102 or equivalent.
Preparation of stencils, business forms, and legal documents; additional em-
phasis on tabulations, manuscripts, and letter forms, as well as on speed and
accuracy.
340 — Adding and Calculator Machine Operation. Two hours.
Sufficient practice provided to develop a thorough working knowledge of
the operations involved in the use of the following machines: rotary printing
and key-driven calculators, and full keyboard and ten-key adding machines. As
an integral part of the course, review is given in the fundamentals of business
mathematics. This course may not be taken for credit by a student who has had
BED 450 or its equivalent.
352 — Filing Systems and Records Management. Two hours.
An introduction to major filing systems in business, with a study of standard
rules for alphabetizing, practice in the use of common systems of filing, and the
application of filing principles to specific types of businesses.
354 — Problems in Typewriting. Two hours.
Prerequisite: BED 310. ■
A review of techniques in skill building, with development of speed and
accuracy in typing a variety of office forms and emphasis on shortcuts in produc-
tion typewriting.
371 — Advanced Dictation and Transcription, Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 305.
Emphasis on office style dictation using the vocabulary of different types of
businesses.
372 — Executive Secretarial Shorthand. Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 371.
The finishing course in shorthand dictation and transcription, with primary
emphasis on mailable copy.
385 — Office Practice and Procedures. Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 102 or equivalent.
A course covering practical secretarial problems and the developing of an
employable personality.
450 — Office Appliances. Four hours.
Prerequisite: BED 101 or equivalent.
Sufficient practice to develop a thorough working knowledge of the opera-
tions involved on calculators, adding machines, posting machines, transcribers,
electric typewriters, mimeoscope, and direct process mimeograph duplicators.
:6o
Educational Foundations
This course may not be taken for credit by a student who has had BED 340 or
its equivalent.
460-G460 — Office Management. Four hours.
A study of the principles of management as applied to office work, covering
office organization, supervision, layout, supplies, machines, personnel, office
forms and reports, and office services.
DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATIONS (FED)
H. B. Easterling, Chairman
Gunn, Ralph White, McQuagge, Knight, Lucas, Wilier, Peddicord
The Department of Educational Foundations is essentially a service depart-
ment. It offers no degree programs or majors. Its purpose is to offer courses
in education required by a number of departments in the University; also,
those courses not specifically identified with the subject matter of any given
department in the School.
EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATIONS COURSES (FED)
FED 300— Public Education in the United States. Four hours.
An orientation to public education in the United States including the back-
ground, purposes, organization, trends, and issues and the evolution of teaching
as a profession.
To be taken the last quarter of the sophomore year.
Required as a phase of screening for admission to a teacher education pro-
gram in the School of Education and Psychology.
334 — Improvement of Study. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.
An analysis of effective study techniques for use by secondary school
teachers. Useful for college students who wish to improve their own reading
and study habits.
336 — Principles of Guidance. Four hours.
An introductory course dealing with the fundamental philosophy, methods,
and organization of guidance services in the public schools.
416 — Audio-Visual Education. Four hours.
A general course for teachers with emphasis upon sound and visual class-
room teaching aids. Careful attention given to the sources, selection, preparation,
and uses of audio- visual materials.
469 — Tests and Measurements. Four hours.
Consideration of good evaluative practices in elementary and high schools,
the preparation and use of informal objectives and essay- type tests, a study
of typical standard tests, and an introduction to elementary statistical pro-
cedures.
DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION (EED)
John P. Van Deusen, Chairman
Antley, Dent, Easterling, McPhail, Miller, Padgett, Wall
Students preparing to teach in the elementary school will enter a compre-
hensive Elementary Education Program of studies which does not require an
academic minor. The Elementary Education sequence, therefore, includes all
requirements to satisfy both the major and minor area of study
The required courses an elementary education major must satisfy are
listed below in suggested sequence. Basic College core curriculum require-
ments must be satisfied within twelve hours of completion prior to admission
into the Teacher Education Program of the School of Education and Psy-
chology.
The Basic College requirements for Elementary Education are listed under
the Freshman and Sophomore year schedules. Courses appearing in the Junior
161
School of Education and Psychology
and Senior year schedules are reserved only for students who have satisfied
core curriculum requirements and have been formally admitted into the School
of Education and Psychology.
REQUIREMENTS FOR ELEMENTARY EDUCATION MAJOR
Course Description Hours Credit
Freshman Year
English 101, 102, 103 12
History 101, 102 8
Mathematics 100 4
Science 16
Physical— FS 104 and 105—8 hours
Biological— FS 106 and 107—8 hours
(FS 104 is prerequisite to all sciences)
Physical Education Activity Courses (3 non-credit courses)
Art 107 4
Military Science (men only) 3
Sophomore Year
English 201, 202 or 433 8
Music 165 or Art 120 4
Health 179 4
Public Address 101 or 301 4
Social Science 12
Political Science 101 — 4 hours
Elect two different courses for 8 hours from:
(A) Economics 200 or 251
(B) Sociology 103 or 210
(C) Geography 103
Physical Education Activity Courses (3 non- credit courses)
Psychology 201 (Sophomore year only) 4
Education Foundations 300 (to be taken last quarter of
sophomore year or first quarter junior year) 4
Military Science (men only) 3
Junior Year
EED 301— Methods and Materials in Arithmetic 4
EED 305— Social Studies in the Elementary Grades 4
EED 306 — Language Arts in the Elementary School 4
Art 309— Elementary School Art 4
EED 309— Developing Skills in Reading 4
EED 311 — Developmental Reading in the Elementary School 4
EPY 316— Human Growth and Development, Pt. 1, Child 4
EED 317 — Methods and Materials in Children's Literature 4
Math 318 — Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers 4
EPY 319— Educational Psychology 4
Senior Year
Course Descriptions Hours Credit
MED 361— Music for Elementary Teachers, I 4
MED 362— Music for Elementary Teachers, II 4
PE 409 — Physical Education in the Elementary School 4
:6a
Elementary Education
EED 412 — Diagnosis and Remediation of Reading Disability
for the Classroom Teacher 4
FED 416— Audio -Visual Education 4
SCE 432— Science for Elementary Teachers 4
FED 469— Tests and Measurements 4
EED 480-482— Student Teaching in the Elementary Schools and
EED 343, Methods and Materials in Elementary Education 16
Total Hours 168
Electives (including Military Science) 24
Grand Total 192
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION COURSES (EED)
301 — Methods and Materials in Arithmetic. Four hours.
A course in the methods of teaching arithmetic in the elementary grades.
Special attention is given to developing an understanding of numbers, teach-
ing basic combinations, and the use of arithmetic textbooks and workbooks.
305 — Social Studies in the Elementary Grades. Four hours.
Social studies in the broad fields and core curriculum with emphasis on
objectives and content. Areas, sequence of units, and the evaluation of social
studies units for elementary grades is stressed. Preparation and presentation
of a complete social studies unit is required.
306 — Language Arts in the Elementary School. Four hours.
A course dealing with the development of skills in writing, spelling, listen-
ing, speaking, and related fields.
309 — Developing Skills in Reading. Four hours.
An undergraduate course which makes an intensive study of the skills re-
quired in reading; methods and materials required to teach these skills; and
classroom techniques for evaluating proficiency in the development of read-
ing skills.
311 — Developmental Reading in the Elementary School. Four hours.
Prerequisite: EED 309.
A study of reading as a growth process and as a developmental task; to
include also the nature and principles of a developmental program with flexi-
ble grouping. Consideration will be given to the slow-learner and the gifted
child with regard to reading.
317 — Methods and Materials in Children's Literature. Four hours.
Reading in mythology, legend, history, biography, fiction, and poetry. Nar-
rative and dramatic presentation. Comparative editions, graded bibliographies,
and standard practice in building collections of books for children.
343 — Methods and Materials in Elementary Education. Four hours.
An examination of materials and their relatedness to methods. Stresses ap-
proved techniques in light of research in these fields: Language arts, social
studies, number relationships, handwriting, spelling, science, health, and cre-
ative experiences. Only offered concurrently with student teaching.
403-G403 — Kindergarten-Primary Education. Four hours.
A study of the contributions which group living makes to the mental and
physical health of young children, with emphasis upon child development re-
search in curricular experiences and records. Designed to help teacher and
parents understand the readiness program. Laboratory is included.
412 — Diagnosis and Remediation of Reading Disability for the Classroom
Teacher. Four hours.
Prerequisite: EED 311 or SED 311.
This course deals with the need for corrective and remedial reading in
63
School of Education and Psychology
the school; nature and causes of reading disability; procedure in making a
classroom diagnosis, including interpretation of results; remedial treatment of
reading difficulties to include techniques and materials; and some opportu-
nity for testing and remedial teaching in the public schools.
480 — Student Teaching in Lower Elementary. Twelve hours.
Prerequisites: FED 300, EED 301, 305, 306, 309, 311, EPY 316, and SCE 432.
Students arrange for this course with Director of Student Teaching two
quarters in advance. (EED 343 Methods and Materials in Elementary Educa-
tion is concurrent with this course).
482— Student Teaching in Upper Elementary. Twelve hours.
See statement under EED 480.
489 — Seminar in Elementary Student Teaching. Eight hours.
In-service student teaching designed for experienced teachers who have
demonstrated their interest and ability as classroom teachers. Two years ex-
perience as a teacher is required and enrollment will be limited to the Summer
Quarter only. This course will deal with classroom management, programs of
instruction, and student role in the educational environment.
490 or G490 — Workshop in Aviation Education. Four hours.
491 or G491 — The Reading Conference I, II, III. Two hours each.
An intensive program for five days during the summer quarter consisting
of lectures, group discussion, and demonstration lessons.
496 — Projects in Elementary Education I, II, III. Four hours.
Designed for school systems planning local projects of curriculum revision
and course of study construction. Available for credit more than once if proj-
ects require more than one quarter to complete.
DEPARTMENT OF GUIDANCE (GED)
Herman Boroughs, Chairman
Gutsch, Weatherford, Alcorn
The Department of Guidance offers separate curricula at the graduate level
to prepare candidates in three areas of personnel and guidance work. These
areas are: (1) public school counselors, (2) college and junior college counselors,
personnel workers and specialists, and (3) counselors, personnel workers and
specialists in community agencies. See the Graduate Bulletin for the course pat-
terns of each curriculum mentioned. (Note: The courses in Guidance — FED
336, GED 506, 522, 571, 581, 582, 587, 593, I, II, III, 600 I, II— are offered to meet
Mississippi State Department of Education requirements for certification as a
school counselor.)
DEPARTMENT OF
HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION, AND RECREATION
C. E. McCarver, Chairman
Instructors: Alexander, M. Brown, Grantham, M. C. Johnson, King, McCarver,
McDavid, Milam, Myers, Nesbitt, Slay, Switzer, Townley, Trosper, Warren,
Yarrow.
Varsity Coaches: Berry, Clark, Floyd, Green, Harrington, Lambright, Taylor,
Underwood, Vann, Van Hook,
Specialists in Therapy: E. A. Hiller, Director, Biloxi Veterans Administration
Center; E. L. Maddry, M.D.; W. B. Hawkins, M.D.; W. A. Dodson, M.D.;
K. M. Clements, M.D.; R. A. Parrish; O. W. Stringer.
The program for the Department of Health, Physical Education, and Rec-
reation is designed to meet the following objectives: (1) to promote the health
and fitness of University students; (2) to provide information and a scientific
basis for the formation of sound health attitudes and habits; (3) to offer op-
portunities for recreation; (4) to prepare teachers, coaches, health educators,
supervisors, administrators, recreation directors, and other specialists in the
field of school and community health, safety, physical education, and recrea-
tion.
164
Corrective Therapy
The Department emphasizes the close relationship of health, physical edu-
cation, and recreation. Students majoring in the Department are expected to
acquire an understanding of this relationship to enrich whatever area of spe-
cial concentration they may eventually select.
REQUIRED PROGRAM
Non- credit physical education activity courses are required of all students
during the freshman and sophomore years: one course each quarter for six
quarters (excluding the summer quarter). Marching band members, Dixie
Darlings, and Pom Pons will be excused from this requirement during
one quarter each year of participation. Varsity athletes will be excused from
this requirement while participating in varsity sports. Non-credit activity
courses may not be repeated. Students are required to have suitable uniforms
as determined by the Department.
The required non-credit activity courses for men are:
Freshman year: Fall Quarter Winter Quarter Spring Quarter
PE 43M PE 44M PE 45M
Sophomore year: Fall Quarter Winter Quarter Spring Quarter
PE 57M PE 58M Non-credit
The required non-credit activity courses for women are:
elective
Freshman year: Fall Quarter Winter Quarter Spring Quarter
PE 43W PE 44W PE 45W
Sophomore year: Fall Quarter Winter Quarter Spring Quarter
Non-credit Non-credit Non-credit
elective elective elective
DEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMS
Bachelor of Science Professional Degree in Health and Physical Education
The major in Health and Physical Education for the Bachelor of Science
Professional degree requires 44 quarter hours with a minimum of 22 hours
in health, and the remainder of the 44 hour requirement in physical educa-
tion above the Basic College core and professional requirements (see certifi-
cation requirements).
Recommended courses in major include: *
Health: 482 (prerequisite Biology 228 and 229), 484
Physical Education: 412, 405, 406.
*Recreation 440 is recommended for Health and Physical Education majors.
ALTERNATE CORRECTIVE THERAPY CURRICULUM LEADING
TO A NONPROFESSIONAL DEGREE
IN HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Recommended courses:
Biology: 228, 229
Health: 179, 452, 482, 485
Physical Education: 379, 401, 412
Psychology: 337, 445, 481
i6 5
School of Education and Psychology
* Clinical training — 14 hours per quarter for three quarters.
Electives and minor to equal a minimum of 192 hours.
* Upon completion of this program, the student is eligible to apply for
nine months clinical training in the Veterans Administration Hospitals in
Biloxi and Gulfport.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN RECREATION
Departmental Requirements:
Recreation: 420, 430, 433, 440, 445, 450, 469, 470, 474, 481, 488.
A minor from areas related to recreation, selected with the approval
of the major adviser. Among the related areas are:
(1) Sports and Games: individual and group (Physical Education)
(2) Dance: folk, square, modern, social (Physical Education)
(3) Arts and crafts: painting, ceramics, woodwork, leathercraft,
photography (Fine Arts and Industrial Arts)
(4) Industrial Arts: building construction (Industrial Arts)
(5) Music: appreciation, fundamentals, recreational (Music)
(6) Dramatics: public address, theatre (Communications, Theatre)
(7) Administrative: personnel and office management, accounting,
economics, marketing (Business Administration)
(8) Sociology: urban and rural, social problems, family and delinquency
problems, social work methods, social institutions (Sociology)
(9) Psychology: applied, social, abnormal, industrial (Psychology)
(10) Political Science: public administration; municipal, county, and
state government (Political Science)
(11) Philosophy: introduction, logic, ethics (Philosophy)
(12) Education: guidance, special, audio-visual (Education)
Students may concentrate in one of several special areas within the broad
field of Recreation: Recreation Leadership, Municipal Administration, Park
Management, Camping and Outdoor Education, Agency Administration, Church
Recreation, College Recreation, Hospital or Institutional Recreation, Military
Recreation, Industrial and Commercial Recreation. Although course require-
ments within the Department are essentially the same for all specific areas,
students will be guided into programs of elective courses according to their
areas of concentration.
DEPARTMENTAL MINORS
Minor in Health and Physical Education With Emphasis in Dance
A dance minor may be obtained by completing 28 hours in dance and re-
lated areas.
Minor in Health and Physical Education With Emphasis in Health
This minor may be obtained by completing the following requirements:
Health: 179, 333, 335, 425, 437, 485, and electives to equal 28 hours.
Minor in Health and Physical Education With Emphasis in Physical Education
This minor may be obtained by completing the following requirements:
Physical Education: 379, 405, 411, 412
Physical Education— men: 402, 410, and electives to equal 28 hours
Physical Education — women: 314, 400, and electives to equal 28 hours.
CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS
All health, physical education, and recreation majors are encouraged to
acquire certificates in the following areas:
166
Health
Driver Education Instructor
Issued by the University of Southern Mississippi for the Mississippi State
Department of Education and the American Automobile Association
m (Health 333, 335, 437, and Education 451D)
Swimming and Water Safety
Senior Life Saving and Water Safety
IssUed bv the University of Southern Mississippi for the American Red
Cross (PE 403)
Water Safety Instructor
Issued by the Universitv of Southern Mississippi for the American Red
Cross on completion of Life Saving and Water Safety Requirements and
PE 404
First Aid
First Aid Certificate
Issued by the University of Southern Mississippi for the American Red
Cross (Health 333)
First Aid Instructor's Certificate
Issued by the University of Southern Mississippi for the American Red
Cross on completion of requirements for Standard First Aid Certificate
and Health 343
Instructor in Marksmanship
Issued by the University of Southern Mississippi for the National Rifle
Association of America (Recreation 382)
Corrective Therapy Certificate
Certificate in Corrective Therapy issued on completion of therapy training
and satisfactorily passing the examination by the American Board for
Certification of Corrective Therapists.
HEALTH COURSES (HTH)
127 — Community Health. Four hours.
Community control of environmental health hazards, community control
of disease; health agencies.
179 — Personal Health. Four hours.
The human body and its function as related to problems of health and
disease.
333— First Aid. Two hours.
Standard first aid as approved by the American Red Cross. Emphasis on
preparing students in the knowledge and skills needed in preventing accidents
as well as rendering first aid to the victim of accidents and sudden illness.
335 — Safety Education. Two hours.
A study of the general program of safety education in public schools, with
special reference to the selection and knowledge of materials, including
methods and techniques of instruction: visual aids, safety projects, special
programs, and the utilization of new methods of civil defense.
343 — Advanced and Instructor First Aid. Two hours.
Prereauisite: Health 333.
An advanced study certifying personnel to conduct first aid courses in
schools and community, and new methods of civil defense.
425— Problems of Child Health. Four hours.
Child safety, nutrition, diseases of children, mental health of children,
growth.
431 — Sanitation. Four hours.
Problems of sanitation in the home and school, in food, producing and
handling, water supply, waste and excreta disposal. Based on an understanding
of general biology.
437 or G437 — Introduction to Driver Education. Four hours.
Critical analysis of traffic accidents, attitude factors, essential knowledge
167
School of Education and Psychology
of automobile operation, and traffic law and regulations. Includes introduction
of laboratory experiences in the use of psychophysical testing and in the
development of driving skills.
452 or G452 — Physiology of Exercise. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Biology 229.
A study of the physiological changes which occur in the body during
muscular activity.
454 — Health Education in Elementary Schools. Four hours.
Methods and materials for the elementary teacher, with special emphasis
on instruction and on coordination of school and community health programs.
455 — Health Education in Secondary Schools. Four hours.
Primarily for students majoring or minoring in health and physical edu-
cation. Materials and techniques for high school teachers of health; conducting
the school health program at the secondary level.
482 or G482 — Kinesiology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Biology 228.
Analysis of movement based on a knowledge of anatomy and physiology
as applied to the function of muscles in body mechanics.
483— School Health. Four hours.
Organization and operation of school health program, with emphasis on
policies, procedures, problems, cooperating agencies, and field work.
484 or G484 — Evaluation in Health and Physical Education. Four hours.
Administration and interpretation of tests in health, physical fitness, and
skills.
485 — Marriage and Family Life. Four hours.
Physical, emotional, and medical basis for successful courtship, marriage,
and parenthood.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES (PE)
300— Varsity-Football. One hour.
301 — Varsity -Basketball. One hour.
302— Varsity-Baseball. One hour.
303— Varsity-Track and Field. One hour.
304 — Varsity-Tennis. One hour.
305— Varsity- Golf. One hour.
312— Softball for Women. One hour.
313 — Soccer and Speedball for Women. One hour.
314 — Officiating Team Sports for Women. Four hours.
Development of personal skills and officiating techniques in team sports.
315 — Stunts and Tumbling for Women. One hour.
317— Techniques of Teaching Stunts, Tumbling, and Apparatus. Two hours.
320— Women's Basketball. One hour.
321— Volleyball. One hour.
322 — Prevention and Care of Athletics Injuries. Two hours.
326 — Badminton. One hour.
328 — Archery. One hour.
330— Golf. One hour.
341 — Square Dancing. One hour.
342 — Folk, Contra, and Round Dances. One hour.
349 — Bowling. One hour.
351 — Modern Dance. One hour.
Emphasis on beginning techniques and movement fundamentals.
168
Physical Education
352 — Intermediate Modern Dance. One hour.
Prerequisite: PE 351 or by permission of instructor.
353 — Advanced Modern Dance. One hour.
Prerequisite: PE 352 or by permission of instructor.
354 — Composition. One hour.
Prerequisite: PE 353 or by permission of instructor.
355 — Advanced Composition. One hour.
Prerequisite: PE 354 or by permission of instructor.
356 — Techniques of Production and Performance in Dance. One hour.
Prerequisite: PE 355 or by permission of the instructor.
363 — Swimming. One hour.
365 — Tennis. One hour.
367 — Gymnastics. One hour.
371 — Social Dancing. One hour.
373 — Coaching Football. Two hours.
Player selection, fundamentals, training, and game strategy.
374 — Coaching Basketball. Two hours.
The growth and popularity of basketball, selection, practice and training
of players, offensive and defensive strategy.
375 — Coaching Baseball. Two hours.
A study of the background and development of baseball, coaching of the
fundamentals, player selection and placement, and other coaching problems.
376— Coaching Track and Field. Two hours.
Selecting of personnel, fundamentals and training techniques.
378 — History of Physical Education. Two hours.
379 — Introduction to Health, Physical Education, and Recreation. Four hours.
A survey of the areas of Health, Physical Education, and Recreation.
380— Conducting Drill Team. Two hours.
381 — Markmanship. One hour.
400 — Officiating Individual and Dual Sports for Women. Four hours.
Development of personal skills and officiating techniques in individual
and dual sports.
401 or G401 — Preventive and Corrective Physical Education. Four hours.
Recognition of and corrective exercises for functional abnormalities.
402 — Techniques of Officiating Sports for Men. Four hours.
Personal skills and officiating techniques of varsity sports.
403 — Life Saving and Water Safety. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Proficiency in Swimming.
American Red Cross Senior Life Saving Certificate awarded upon course
completion.
404 — Water Safety Instructor's Course. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Life Saving and Water Safety.
Emphasis on knowledge and skills beyond the scope of Senior ; Life Saving
and certifying personnel to conduct water safety courses in schools and com-
munities.
405, 406, 407 — Coaching the Minor Sports. (Beginning, Intermediate, and
Advanced). Two hours each.
Experiences in the various phases of intramurals and physical education
activity programs.
408 or G408 — Techniques of Teaching Rhythms. Two hours.
Practical experience in group instruction in various areas of dance.
409 — Physical Education in Elementary Schools. Four hours.
Materials and methods in the elementary grades; both theory and practical
School of Education anl Psychology
experiences in selecting, organizing, and directing activities for the elementary
school.
410 — Physical Education in Secondary Schools for Men. Four hours.
Developing personal skills in individual, dual, and team sports for men.
411 — Theory of Teaching Swimming and Diving. Two hours.
Organization and administration of the community swimming program,
including pool operation, maintenance, and sanitation.
412 — Organization and Administration of Health and Physical Education.
Four hours.
The theory and procedure in adopting policies and programs necessary
to the development and administration of a sound health and physical edu-
cation program.
423 — History of Dance. Two hours.
A survey of dance in various civilizations from prehistoric times to the
present.
RECREATION COURSES (REC)
420 — History and Principles of Recreation. Four hours.
The history, principles, and values of recreation. The contributions and
responsibilities of the many organizations active in the field are described.
430 — Outdoor Education and Recreation. Four hours.
Designed to acquaint recreation leaders, teachers, and administrators with
the values, programs, opportunities, and relationships of outdoor education
and recreation.
433 — Camp Counseling and Administration of Camping. Two hours.
Development of skills in camp leadership and administration.
440 — Recreational Leadership Theory. Four hours.
Developing individual competency in leading recreational activities.
445 — Social Recreation Programming. Two hours.
Planning, programming, and conducting of social recreation activities.
450 — Youth Service Programs. Four hours.
Administration, organization, and leadership of youth-serving organizations
in the community, and the relationship of youth-service programs to the total
community recreation activity.
469 — Recreational Skills. Four hours.
Adapting different craft media for use in recreation programs: making
game equipment, stage properties, decorations, hobbies, and other crafts.
470 — Park and Recreation Areas and Facilities. Four hours.
Presenting to the professional recreation worker the fundamental princi-
ples, standards, and techniques in the design, construction, and mainten-
ance of park and rents for the B.A. degree.
Curriculum for Bachelor of Arts
Degree with a Major in Library Science
Freshman and Sophomore Years
Courses listed in Basic College core and School of Education and Psychology
requirements.
Junior and Senior Years
Hours
Library Science 301, 302, 303 12
Library Science 427, 428, 462, 463 and 489 21
Foundations Education 416 4
Electives and minor 60
Departmental Requirements
General requirements: The student wishing to major in Library Science
should take 37 hours in the Department of Library Science, all of which must
be in courses numbered above 300. Required of all majors and counted as a
library science course is FED 416.
No correspondence or extension work is counted toward this credit. For the
B.S. teaching degree 12 hours of directed teaching will be in school library
practice, Education 481R. The B.A. and non-teaching B.S. may include L.S. 489
instead. FED 416 will be counted toward the major in library science, provided
it is done in residence.
Minor and Electives
In addition to the core requirements, the certification requirements and the
departmental requirements, the student must also complete the requirements
for a minor, preferably in a related field. Courses not used to fulfill any of these
requirements are free electives and may be taken in any department of the
University.
V7
School of Education and Psychology
The student minoring in Library Science must take 28 hours in the depart-
ment.
Students may qualify for the Class A Certificate by completing at least 36
quarter hours of Library Science. Students may qualify for a permit by com-
pleting Library Science 302, 303, 315, and 316.
Qtr. Hrs.
Books and Related Materials for Children and Young People 8
Organization and Administration of Libraries 8
Electives in Library Science 20
LIBRARY SCIENCE COURSES (LS)
301 — Book Selection. Four hours.
A general study of principles of selection and standards for evaluation of
books, periodicals and other library materials; book publishers, series and
editions; use of standard book selection aids.
302 — Books and Related Materials for Children. Four hours.
A study of library materials and their uses for children of preschool age
through the elementary grades; emphasis on the examination of both printed
and audio-visual materials.
303 — Books and Related Materials for Young People. Four hours.
A study of the reading needs and interests of adolescents with criteria for
selecting books for the school library. Emphasis on a wide study of both books
and allied materials.
315 — Organization and Administration of School Libraries. Four hours.
A study of the technical processes involved in organizing a library, circula-
tion, classification and cataloguing; care of collection; maintenance of library
materials, library quarters and equipment, finance, the acquisition of books and
non-book materials.
316 — Organization and Administration of School Libraries. Four hours.
Continuation of 315. To be taken concurrently with 315.
NOTE: FED 416 may be counted as library science. For description, see
Department of Educational Foundations.
427 — School Library Reference Materials. Four hours.
Required for the 28-hour program and above.
The study and evaluation of basic reference materials for school library use
428 — School Library Reference Materials. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Library Science 427. Not required on 28-hour program.
A study of the more specialized reference material, including bibliographic
and government materials, lectures, and problems.
462 — Classification and Cataloguing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Library Science 315, 316 and 427.
A study of the fundamental principles and methods of classification and
cataloguing suitable for the average school library situation. Dewey Decimal
Classification and simplified cataloguing with emphasis on the printed cards
and other aids.
463 — Classification and Cataloguing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Library Science 462.
Expansion of the principles and methods of classification and cataloguing
with attention given to more advanced problems.
489 — Practice Work. Five hours.
Culmination course of majors in library science to be taken with B.S.
non-teaching degree. Experience in various phases of library work. Approxi-
mately 180 hours of laboratory work including a one- day field trip which will
involve a small expense.
490 — School Library Problems. One and one-half hours each.
An intensive course through group study in the analysis of special problems
in the library field. Full-time work for five days, offered during the summer
quarter; to be conducted through the cooperative efforts of the Department of
Library Science and the State Department of Education. May be taken three
times.
78
Psychology
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY (PSY)
Including Educational Psychology (EPY), Special Education (SPE),
and Human Relations (HUR)
Ray S. Musgrave, Chairman
Barker, Gough, Gurman, Hildman, Lowe, Mehearg, Norsworthy, Rabin,
Stritch, Wofford
The Department of Psychology offers a full range of courses in psychology
in either of two major sequences: general and pre -professional. It also func-
tions as a service department in teacher education, offering certain courses
required for teacher certification. The Department also offers courses for other
schools and departments which require or recommend courses in psychology
in their respective curricula. For graduate programs consult the Graduate
Bulletin.
Requirements for Major
A student majoring in psychology may elect one of several alternative plans.
He may work toward either the B.S. or the B.A. degree. In each degree pro-
gram he may follow either the pre-professional major sequence, or he may elect
the general major program. The student's choice of program should be deter-
mined by his plans for the future.
General Psychology Major
This major is provided for the student who is interested in psychology and
who plans to enter an occupation other than professional psychology. The stu-
dent who elects this major will not be recommended for professional work in
psychology or for graduate professional training. Students aspiring to ad-
vanced professional training in psychology should take the pre-professional
sequences.
Pre- Professional Psychology Major
This major sequence is planned to provide the student with the background
and skills essential for graduate professional training in psychology.
A. Curriculum — Basic College and School Requirements
The student working toward either degree must include the appropriate
core curriculum requirements for his degree.
Students who contemplate advanced graduate work are reminded that a
reading knowledge of two foreign languages is usually required. Study of
German or French is recommended as a part of the undergraduate program
for pre-professional psychology majors. Bachelor of Arts students will take one
of these languages to meet core requirements.
B. Curriculum — Departmental Requirements
1. General and Specific Requirements.
The student wishing to major in psychology, regardless of his degree plan,
must take 36 hours in the Department of Psychology. Required of all majors
are Psychology 201, 202, 450, 466, or 467, and 484.
The student taking the pre-professional psychology major should take, in
addition to Psychology 201, 202, 450, 466 or 467, and 484, as indicated above,
Psychology 445, 451, 482, and one course from the group 337, 480 or 481.
Courses designated EPY may be used toward a psychology major.
C. Curriculum — Minor and Electives
In addition to the core, school, and departmental requirements, the student
must also complete the requirements for a minor, preferably in a related field.
Courses not used to fulfill any of these requirements are free electives and may
be taken in any department of the University.
79
School of Education and Psychology
PSYCHOLOGY (PSY) AND EDUCATIONAL
PSYCHOLOGY (EPY) COURSES
PSY 201— General Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Sophomore standing.
An introduction to the scientific study of human behavior and experience.
PSY 202— Applied Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Psychology 201.
Application of psychological methods and principles to occupational fields,
other than education, including business and industry, law, medicine, the
ministry, and others.
EPY 316 — Human Growth and Development, Part I: Child. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Psychology 201.
Study of the child through the elementary school years, emphasizing prin-
ciples and problems of development. Case studies of individual children.
EPY 319 — Educational Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Psychology 201.
Application of psychological methods, facts, and principles to education.
EPY 332 — Human Growth and Development, Part H. Adolescent. Four
hours. (132)
Prerequisite: Psychology 201.
A course dealing with development of the individual through the ado-
lescent years. Case studies of individual adolescents.
PSY 337— Mental Hygiene. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Psychology 201.
Characteristics of the wholesome personality and the building of healthy
emotional attitudes; promotion of good mental health and prevention of ab-
normalities. Emphasis is placed on increased personal efficiency.
PSY 445-G445— Social Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Psychology 201.
Psychological factors and influences in group behavior. Study of the indi-
vidual in group situations, and the influence of the social environment on his
behavior and development.
PSY 449-G449— Industrial Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Psychology 201. (Psychology 450 recommended).
Applications of psychological principles and methods to problems of in-
dustry, emphasizing employee selection and placement, merit rating, accident
reduction, training, and measurement and improvement of employee morale.
PSY 450-G450— Introduction to Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences. Four
hours.
Computation of measures of central tendency, variability, and correlation.
Introduction to concepts of sampling techniques (t tests, chi square, and analysis
of variance).
PSY 451-G451 — Psychological Measurement. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Psychology 201 and 450.
Theory, problems and techniques of psychological measurement. Group
tests of ability, aptitude, interests, and personality are emphasized.
PSY 466- G466— Experimental Psychology I. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Psychology 201 and 450 and permission of the instructor.
Two hours of lecture and two two-hour laboratory periods.
Introduction to psychological laboratory work. Experiments include study
of sensory and perceptual processes, emotion and motivation.
PSY 467-G467— Experimental Psychology II. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Psychology 201 and 450 and permission of the instructor.
Two hours of lecture and two two-hour laboratory periods.
180
Special Education
Introduction to psychological experimental techniques. Experiments in-
clude study of learning, memory, and thinking.
PSY 480-G480— Psychology of Personality. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Psychology 201 and permission of the instructor.
A study of the facts involved in the development of the mature personal-
ity, with an analysis of the structure and dynamics of personality; critical re-
view of methods of personality evaluation.
PSY 481-G481— Abnormal Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Good background in psychology and permission of the in-
structor.
Study of the major psychoses, the psychoneuroses, and mental deficiency;
field trips and demonstration clinics. Primarily for psychology majors, pre-
medical students, and students planning to enter law, social work, teaching, or
the ministry.
PSY 482-G482— Physiological Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Psychology 201.
Relationships between physiological functions, especially those of th«
nervous system, and psychological functions, including perception, emotion,
motivation and learning. Primarily for psychology majors and premedical
students.
PSY 484-G484— History and Systems of Psychology. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.
Review of the history of psychology, and intensive study of current sys-
tems of psychology. Primarily for psychology majors as final senior course.
PSY 492 — Special Problems in Psychology. Two to four hours.
Prerequisites: Twenty-eight hours in psychology and approval of the de-
partment chairman.
Intensive study of a specific topic or problem in contemporary psychology.
Preparation of a series of formal papers and reports.
SPECIAL EDUCATION (SPE)
Musgrave, Mehearg, Norsworthy, Lowe
The University of Southern Mississippi prepares teachers to teach mentally
retarded children at both the elementary and the secondary level, and trains
speech therapists to work with children in the public schools who have speech
and hearing defects. Students who wish to become speech therapists should
follow the program outlined under the Department of Speech and Hearing
Sciences.
Teachers who specialize in teaching the mentally retarded ordinarily major
in Special Education with emphasis on the mentally retarded. They do part
of their student teaching with mentally retarded children and part with normal
children. It is possible for students to major in elementary education and take
the additional specified courses to obtain an endorsement to teach the mentally
retarded.
Students wishing to major in Special Education and prepare to teach men-
tally retarded children should follow the program outlined below:
Program of Courses for a Major in Special Education
and Certification to Teach the Mentally Retarded*
Freshman and Sophomore Years Quarter Hours
English 101, 102, 103 12
English 201, and 202 or 433 8
History 101, 102 8
Political Science 101 4
-Students interested in teaching the mentally retarded at the secondary level should
plan their programs with Mr. Norsworthy.
181
School of Education and Psychology
Science Education 104, 105, Physical Science I and II
106, 107, Biological Science I and II 16
Math 100 4L
Art 107 — Introductory Art 4
Art 309 or Art 392 4
Public Address 101 4
Social Studies: Choose two from Geography 103, Economics
200 or 251, or Sociology 103 or 201 8
Psychology 201 4
Music 165 — The Enjoyment of Music 4
Health 179— Personal Health 4
FED 300— Public Education in the United States 4
Physical Education Activity Courses — 6 quarters
88
Elective to make total 96 hours for the year plus PE.
Men students will be required to take the prescribed Military Science courses.
Junior and Senior Years
Music Education 361, 362 — Music for Elementary Teachers 8
EED 301— Arithmetic for Children 4
EED 317— Methods and Materials in Children's Literature 4
Science Education 432 — Science for Elementary Teachers 4
EED 305— Social Studies in the Elementary Grades 4
EED 306 — Language Arts in the Elementary School 4
EED 309— Developing Skills in Reading 4
EPY 319— Educational Psychology 4
EPY 316— Human Growth and Development, Part I— Child 4
EED 311 — Developmental Reading Methods 4
SPE 486 — Psychology and Education of the Exceptional Child 4
SPE 455 — Speech and Hearing Problems for the Classroom Teacher — or
SPT 301— Introduction to Speech Therapy 4
SPE 450 — Psychology and Education of the Mentally Retarded 4
SPE 460— Methods and Materials for Teaching the Mentally Retarded . . 4
SPE 480 or 481— Student Teaching of the Mentally Retarded 12
EED 343 — Methods and Materials in Elementary Education 4
SPE 470 — Curriculum Adaptations for Teaching Handicapped Youth . . 4
SPE 487— Problems in Special Education 4
84
Electives to make total 96 hours for the years (Suggested PE 409, FED 416,
FED 469, PSY 481, EED 412, Math 318)
Majors in Speech Therapy and Audiology may minor in Special Educa-
tion. The minor will require EPY 316, EPY 319, EPY 332, FED 300, SPE 451,
SPE 486, SPE 471, Student Teaching and Clinical Experience in Special Educa-
tion for a minimum of 12 hours in SPE 471.
Prospective teachers of exceptional children are urged to consult with Mr.
Norsworthy in planning their programs.
SPECIAL EDUCATION COURSES (SPE)
450 -G450— Psychology and Education of the Mentally Retarded. Four
hours.
A study of the social, emotional, physical, and intellectual characteristics
i8*
Human Relations
of the mentally retarded; methods of diagnosis and differentiation; and special
class organization.
451 — Methods in Speech and Hearing. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Speech Therapy 301, 330, and 401.
A course designed to acquaint the Speech and Hearing major with clinical
conditions as found in public schools, including practice with various types of
speech and hearing cases, and instruction in working with parents, teachers,
and the public in solving speech and hearing problems.
455-G455 — Speech and Hearing Problems for the Classroom Teacher.
Four hours.
A course designed to acquaint the teacher with speech and hearing prob-
lems commonly found in the classroom.
460 -G460— Methods and Materials for Teaching the Mentally Retarded.
Four hours.
A study of methods and materials most useful in teaching the mentally
handicapped. Emphasizes the use of arts and crafts as instructional media.
470-G470 — Curriculum Adaptations for Teaching Handicapped Youth. Four
hours.
Examination of the educational needs of mentally, physically, and emo-
tionally handicapped youth of secondary school age and methods of meeting
these needs. Emphasizes the principles and procedures of the cooperative Spe-
cial Education- Vocational Rehabilitation program.
471 — Student Teaching and Clinical Experience in Special Education. Up
to 12 hours.
480 — Student Teaching of the Mentally Retarded — Elementary. Twelve
hours.
481 — Student Teaching of the Mentally Retarded — Secondary. Twelve
hours.
486-G486— The Psychology and Education of the Exceptional Child. Four
hours.
Considers the psychological and educational needs of children in the
atypical groups; physically, visually, or auditorially handicapped; defective
speech, mentally retarded, or socially and emotionally maladjusted.
487 -G487— Problems in Special Education. Four hours.
Organization and administration at both state and local levels of the edu-
cation of the exceptional child.
490-G490 — Workshop in Special Education I, II, III. One and one-half hours
each.
Workshops in selected areas of Special Education.
HUMAN RELATIONS (HUR)
Gough
34 — Personal and Social Development (women). No credit.
A program aimed at self-enhancement of the individual student, with
emphases on the development of personal attributes and social competence
through practical demonstration and class interaction.
135 — Foundations of Human Relations. Four hours.
The development of the qualities of human personality from the standpoint
of human relations.
83
School of Education and Psychology
DEPARTMENT OF SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION,
SUPERVISION, AND CURRICULUM (AED)
James H. Mailey, Chairman
Baxter, Kinlaw, McQuagge, Moody, Owings, Thomas
The Department of School Administration, Supervision, and Curriculum
offers programs for the preparation of administrators for the public schools and
colleges and for teachers of school administration. These preparation programs
are offered only at the graduate level and lead to the master's degree, the sixth
year specialist certificate, and the doctor's degree. For a description of these pro-
grams, consult the Graduate Bulletin.
DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE EDUCATION (SCE)
Including Fundamentals of Science, (FS)
A. G. Morgan, Chairman
F. Brown, Frazier, Olsen
The Department of Science Education is operated jointly by the College of
Arts and Sciences, and the School of Education and Psychology. The facilities
are in the College of Arts and Sciences; programs in teacher education are in
the School of Education and Psychology. Responsibility for the curriculum is
shared jointly. Graduate programs are described in the Graduate Bulletin.
PURPOSES
The mission of the Department of Science Education is: (1) to provide those
courses in both the physical and biological sciences which would give a mini-
mum degree of scientific literacy to all students; (2) to provide, in cooperation
with the Department of Elementary Education, a curriculum in the sciences and
science methods for elementary school teachers; (3) to provide advisement for
those students planning to teach the sciences at the secondary school level; (4)
to provide programs leading to advanced degrees in science education; (5) to
work with public schools in the development of curricula, workshops, science
fairs, and other activities designed to improve science instruction at all public
school levels.
CURRICULUM AND PROGRAM
The Department of Science Education is concerned primarily with teachers
and prospective teachers of science. Although some students will be planning
to teach a specific science, current public school organization does not encourage
too much specialization; familiarity with principles and concepts common to all
of the several scientific disciplines is prerequisite. Hence, courses in science
education are so organized as to give teachers and prospective teachers a broad
understanding of several of the sciences, with the opportunity for enough spe-
cialization in one area to pursue advanced study.
In general, all prospective science teachers will study mathematics through
trigonometry. Calculus is prerequisite for some courses in chemistry and physics.
Specialization in one scientific discipline will require a minimum of forty (40)
quarter credit hours in that discipline. Certain courses offered by the various
science departments specifically for public school teachers are applicable only
to the degree programs in education offered by the School of Education and Psy-
chology.
The Department of Science Education offers a major in general science for
secondary school teachers, grades 7 through 12. The recommended course of
study is outlined below:
Freshman year: Sophomore year:
English 101, 102, 103 Biology 101, 102, 103
Math 101, 102, 103 English 201, 433
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 History 101, 102
184
Science Education
Geography 103 Sociology 103
Political Science 101 Physics 101, 102, 103
Music or Art Health 179
Psychology 201
Junior year:
Public Address 101 Senior year:
FED 328 (education) SED 451, 313, 481 (education)
EPY 319, 332 (psychology) Electives 20 hours in biology,
FED 469 (education) chemistry, geology, or physics
Chemistry 204, 205, 206 Electives 8 hours
Biology 104 or 311, 300
Geology 101, 260
The above program provides a broad background and some depth in all sci-
ence areas, opportunity for considerable depth and specialization in one science
area, and background in professional education necessary for effective teaching.
Because of the nature of the teacher training program, a minor in general
science is not offered by the Department. Students in the College of Arts
and Sciences should discuss minors in the sciences with their major adviser
and/or the particular science department chairman. Students in the School
of Education and Psychology can major in Science Education and minor in
Secondary Education. An adequate minor in general science is not possible.
The program as outlined above for science teachers meets certification standards
in all states in the areas of biology, chemistry, physics, earth sciences, general
science, and physical science; and, in most cases, satisfies requirements for
certification in combined areas, i.e., biology, chemistry, and general science,
or chemistry, physics, and general science.
SCIENCE EDUCATION COURSES (SCE)
Including Fundamentals of Science (FS)
Fundamentals of Science: A sequence of two courses in the physical sci-
ences and two in the biological sciences. Each course carries four hours of credit
and consists of four one-hour lecture -demonstration sessions per week. A work-
ing knowledge of algebra is presupposed. These courses are designed to give
students an acquaintance and understanding of certain fundamental principles
and laws of the major science disciplines. Credit in these courses will not count
toward the degree requirements for a major or minor in the sciences or in sec-
ondary school science teaching.
FS 104— Physical Science I.
A study of matter and energy in the universe; their sources, transformation,
and interactions; the forces acting within the universe; and the laws governing
these phenomena.
FS 105— Physical Science II. Prerequisite: FS 104.
A continuation of FS 104. Primary emphasis is on elementary and compound
substances, the arrangement of and forces acting on these substances in the
formation of the earth, atmosphere, and the universe.
FS 106— Biological Science I Zoology. Prerequisite: FS 105.
Elementary studies of cell structure and function; gametogenesis, ontogeny,
heredity, ecology, taxonomy, and phylogeny, with emphasis on the major groups
of animals.
FS 107— Biological Science II Botany. Prerequisite: FS 105.
Elementary studies of plant morphology, physiology, ecology, taxonomy,
and phylogeny, with emphasis on the major groups of plants.
SCE 432 — Science for Elementary Teachers. Four hours.
Six hours of lecture, audio-visual, and laboratory work per week.
Designed to relate basic scientific principles to the elementary grades, and
provide experience in presenting these principles to the elementary school child
through the use of a variety of materials, activities, and methods. Required
of and designed only for elementary education majors.
is 5
School of Education and Psychology
SCE 447— Nature Study and Elementary Science. Four hours.
Six hours of lecture and field work per week.
Familiarizes prospective teachers with the biological and physical materials
commonly close at hand and assists in the identification and utilization of these
materials. Considers the whole environment of the child and his . observation
and interpretation of it. May be taken as an elective for elementary education
majors.
SCE 415J— Methods in Teaching Science— Grades 10 through 12. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Senior standing (should be taken one or two quarters before
student practice teaching).
A course designed to familiarize teachers with trends in the secondary sci-
ence curriculum. It includes a study of materials and techniques used in pre-
senting subject matter to the secondary school student. Emphasis is placed upon
the design of activities dealing with science as a form of inquiry and investiga-
tion. Readings are required in the science and science education periodicals.
SCE 451K— Methods in Teaching Science — Grades 7 through 9. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Senior standing (should be taken one to two quarters before
student practice teaching).
Similar to 451J, but emphasizes curriculum, methods, and materials at the
junior high school level.
SCE 400-G400— BSCS Biology for Secondary Teachers. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 36 hours of biology.
This course is for teachers only, and may not be used for credit toward a
major in biology.
A detailed critical examination of the subject matter, techniques, and meth-
ods for teaching biology in secondary schools, as proposed by the Biological
Sciences Curriculum Study. Designed to orient teachers in modern biology sub-
ject matter and special techniques by presenting background material and spe-
cial laboratory exercises. Emphasis is placed on the laboratory as the source of
information from which sound conclusions can be drawn.
DEPARTMENT OF SECONDARY EDUCATION (SED)
N. L. Landskov, Chairman
Campbell, Hagenson, Rogers, Scoggins
The student who plans to teach at the high school level will work toward
the Bachelor of Science "Professional" degree. This degree requires an acadmic
major and a minor in secondary education. The majors available for this degree
are listed under the General Degree Requirements Section of this catalog. The
Basic College, school, and professional or minor requirements are listed on
preceding pages. The National Teacher Examination is also part of the degree
requirement. A student in Secondary Education will have two advisers: the
Chairman of the Department of Secondary Education and the chairman of the
department in which he is majoring. Students should also read carefully the
requirements for student teaching. No more than twelve quarter hours in pro-
fessional education courses taken by correspondence may be accepted for a
degree.
The "professional" degree meets the requirements for certification by state
and national certification agencies.
SECONDARY EDUCATION COURSES (SED)
310 — Junior -Senior High School Reading Methods. Four hours.
A course designed to familiarize junior and senior high school teachers with
reading methods and materials. Special emphasis is placed on improving read-
ing skills in the subject matter areas and providing suitable material for poor
readers.
186
Secondary Education
313 — Principles of Teaching in High School. Four hours.
Taken simultaneously with SED 481.
Aims of secondary education, motivation and direction of learning, school
organization, including guidance, and an introduction into methodology.
451A — Methods in Business Education. Four hours.
A study of business education trends and aims, teaching procedures, tests
and measurement, special helps, and teaching materials.
451B — Methods in Art. Four hours.
Aims, objectives, and methods of art education in the elementary and sec-
ondary schools.
451G — Methods in Industrial Arts. Four hours.
Methods and materials in the teaching of industrial arts.
451H — Methods in English — Secondary. Four hours.
Required of English majors who follow the professional teaching program.
Should be taken in the third quarter of the junior year or in the summer pre-
ceding the senior year. A course in methods of teaching English in the junior
and senior high schools.
4511 — Methods in Foreign Languages. Four hours.
Required of foreign language majors who follow the professional teaching
program. A course in methods of teaching French, Spanish, and German in
high schools.
451J — Methods in Sciences — Secondary. Four hours.
A course intended to give teachers the techniques of handling science
classes, including selection, organization, and presentation of subject matter.
451K — Methods in Mathematics — Secondary. Four hours.
Should be taken after the student has completed most of his mathematics
courses.
A course designed to give the student a knowledge of the foundation on
which mathematics is built, the aims and purposes of teaching the subject in
high school, curriculum problems, organization and presentation of subject
mater, methods of teaching, and methods of testing.
451L — Methods in Social Studies — Secondary. Four hours.
Prerequisites: EPY 319, or consent of instructor.
A study of principal methods of teaching, application of psychological prin-
ciples to teaching, methods of selecting content, and materials available. The
work is adapted to the social studies in the high school.
451M — Methods in Speech. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
A general orientation to the teaching of speech, followed by individualized
unit work in the special fields of speech.
451P— Methods and Principles in Health, Physical Education and Recrea-
tion. Four hours.
For grades 1 through 12. Primarily for students majoring or minoring in
health, physical education and recreation. Materials and techniques of teach-
ing health, physical education and recreation in public schools.
SED 452A-GBED452— Philosophy of Vocational Business Education. Four
hours.
History of vocational education; changing concepts resulting from Federal
legislation; changing nature of office systems and occupations; changing em-
ployment opportunities and consequent changes in procedures and techniques
of vocational business education.
462-G462 — Curriculum of the Secondary School. Two hours.
A critical examination of the present day curriculum with emphasis upon
the core curriculum.
»7
School of Education and Psychology
464-G464 — Student Activities in Secondary Schools. Two hours.
Consideration is given to the general nature and organization of the pro-
gram popularly known as extra-curricular activities. Major emphasis is placed
upon the various activities that constitute an activity program in a modern
high school.
481-A-S — Student Teaching in High School. Twelve hours.
Prerequisites: The completion of 132 hours of college including EPY 319,
EPY 332, SED 451, and 2/3 of the work in the student's major field, of which at
least eight hours must have been taken in residence in this institution. (See
student teaching.)
The individual courses in pre-service student teaching are listed below:
481A (Business Education) Twelve hours
481B (Art) Twelve hours
481G (Industrial Arts) Twelve hours
481H (English) Twelve hours
4811 (Foreign Languages) Twelve hours
481J (Sciences) Twelve hours
481K (Mathematics) Twelve hours
481L (Social Studies) Twelve hours
481M (Speech) Twelve hours
481P (Health, Physical Education, Recreation) Twelve hours
481R (Library Science) Twelve hours
481S (Music Education) Twelve hours
489 — Seminar in Secondary Student Teaching. Eight hours.
In-service student teaching designed for experienced teachers who have
demonstrated their interest and ability as classroom teachers. Two years ex-
perience as a teacher is required and enrollment will be limited to the Summer
Quarter only. This course will deal with classroom management, programs of
instruction, and student role in the educational environment.
188
SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS
Raymond Mannoni, Dean
PURPOSE
The primary purpose of the School of Fine Arts is to provide its students
with a well-rounded preparation for professional or teaching careers in one of
the many branches of art or music or theater. In addition, it seeks to provide
opportunities for students in all departments of the University to participate in
artistic activities and develop an awareness of cultural values.
To achieve its purposes, the School of Fine Arts offers courses of study
centered around a core of theoretical, historical, and other academic subjects,
and designed to develop artistic ability and general cultural awareness.
ORGANIZATION
Since curricular requirements vary for each major, students aiming at
degrees from the School of Fine Arts should follow the course sequences for
each year outlined in detail under each department in the following pages.
The School of Fine Arts is organized into four departments: Art, Music,
Music Education, and Theatre. The baccalaureate degrees awarded are in Fine
Arts, Art, Music, and Music Education, with appropriate majors. Undergraduate
minors are available in Art History, Music, and Theatre.
A student majoring in Elementary Education who wishes to minor in Fine
Arts may do so by electing the following courses:
MUS 165 ART 107
MED 361 ART 120
MED 362 ART 309
MED 363
plus four hours of electives in Fine Arts (THE 201 is recommended)
DEPARTMENT OF ART (ART)
Walter Lok, Chairman
Ambrose, Campbell, Barrio, Dodson, D'Olive, Merrifield
Curricula are offered in Drawing and Painting, and in Commercial Art,
leading to the degree Bachelor of Fine Arts. A new major, Three Dimensional
Design, has been approved. A major is available in Art leading to the degree
Bachelor of Arts. A minor program is also available in the History of Art. The
National Teacher Examination is required of all candidates for the teacher
certification degree.
Exhibitions on tour and students' exhibitions aiv arranged and presented
by the faculty, student committees, and members of the local chapter of Kappa
Pi, national honorary art fraternity.
The department reserves the right to retain student work for exhibition
purposes.
The FRESHMAN year is a common course of study for all major programs
in Art.
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Art 120; Appreciation 4
History 101, 102
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1
Art 101, 102, 103; Drawing 4
Art 111, 112, 113; Design 4
17
The remaining three years are detailed below for each undergraduate major.
4
4
1
1
4
4
4
4
L7
17
189
School of Fine Arts
DRAWING AND PAINTING MAJOR
(Leading to the degree of Bachelor of Fine Arts)
Sophomore
English 201, 202 4 4
Mathematics 4
Political Science 101 4
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Art 315, 325, 335; History 4 4 4
Art 201, 202, 203; Figure Drawing 4 4 4
17 17 17
Junior
Science 4 4 4
Core Electives from two of the following areas:
Health 179, Philosophy 101 or 201, Public Address 101 4 4
Art 321; Watercolor 4
Foreign Language 4 4 4
Art 331; Oil Painting 4
Art Electives 4 4
16 16 16
Senior
Art 322, 423; Watercolor 4 4
Art Elective 4
Art 332, 433; Oil Painting 4
Art 470; Painting Project 4
Electives 8 8 8
16 16 16
COMMERCIAL ART MAJOR
(Leading to the degree of Bachelor of Fine Arts)
Sophomore
English 201, 202 4 4
Mathematics 4
Political Science 101 4
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Art 315, 325, 335; History 4 4 4
Art 201, 202; Figure Drawing 4 4
Art 321; Watercolor 4
17 17 17
Junior
Science 4 4 4
Core Electives from two of the following:
Health 179, Philosophy 101 or 201, Public Address 101 4 4
Art Elective 4
Art 341, 342, 343; Commercial 4 4 4
Foreign Language 4 4 4
16 16 16
Senior
Art 441, 442, 443; Advertising 4 4 4
Art Elective 4 4
Art 480; Advertising Project 4
EKectives 8 8 8
16 16 16
190
Art
ART MAJOR
(Leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts)
Sophomore
English 201, 202 4 4
Mathematics 4
Political Science 101 4
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Art 315, 325, 335; History 4 4 4
*Art Sequence I 4 4 4
17 17 17
Junior
Science 4 4 4
Core Electives from two of the following:
Health 179, Philosophy 101 or 201, Public Address 101 4 4
* *Minor or Elective 4
Foreign Language 4 4 4
*Art Sequence II 4 4 4
16 16 16
Senior
Foreign Language 4 4
**Minor and Electives 12 12 12
16 16 16
♦Twelve hours of art from a single area constitutes a sequence.
♦♦Minor hours must total twenty-eight from an approved subject field.
TEACHER CERTIFICATION CURRICULUM
(Leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts)
Sophomore
English 201, 330 4 4
Mathematics elective 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Science 104 4
Psychology 201 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
History of Art 315, 325, 335 4 4 4
Public School Art 208 4
Elementary School Art 309 4
Social Science elective — One course from the following 4
Economics 201 or 251, Sociology 103 or 201,
Geography 103
17 17 17
Junior
Physical Science 105 4
Biological Science 106, 107 4 4
Health 179 4
Public Address 101 4
Foundations in Education 328 4
Foreign Language 4 4 4
Methods in Art 451B 4
Educational Psychology 319 4
Sculpture 251, or Ceramics 255 4
16 16 16
I 9 1
School of Fine Arts
Senior
Foreign Language 4 4
Student Teaching 481B 12
Principles of Teaching in High School 313 4
Test and Measurements 469 4
Commercial Art 342 4
Human Growth and Development Part II 332 4
Stagecraft 302 4
Crafts 412 4
Watercolor 324, or Oil 331 4
Art Education Project 492 2 2
16 18 18
ART COURSES (ART)
101 — Beginning Drawing. Four hours.
Basic problems in black and white sketching and modeling. Techniques
for dry media such as pencil, conte crayon, charcoal.
102 — Intermediate Drawing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 101 or permission of instructor.
Fluid media techniques; pen and ink; felt nibs; wash. More emphasis on
composition.
103 — Advanced Drawing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 102 or permission of instructor.
Creative drawing in all media. Introduction of color. Emphasis on inter-
pretation and composition.
107 — Introductory Art. Four hours.
For students in teaching programs.
Fundamentals of lettering, drawing, perspective, light and shade, color
theory, and design.
Ill — Beginning Design. Four hours.
Study of the terms of visual design: problems involving all the design ele-
ments in non- objective and more figurative modes. A color theory and some
lettering.
112 — Intermediate Design. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 111, or permission of the instructor.
Further study of the creative approach to design in a variety of media
and techniques.
113 — Advanced Design. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 112, or permision of the instructor.
A course in design applied to some reproductive techniques and three
dimensional expressions.
120— Art Appreciation. Four hours.
An introductory course providing a background for art appreciation. An
approach to the understanding of the plastic arts.
201 — Figure Drawing. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Permission of the instructor.
Study of the construction and use of the human figure in design. Drawing
from the model in various media.
202 — Figure Drawing. Four hours.
A continuation of 201.
203 — Figure Drawing. Four hours.
A continuation of 202.
208— Public School Art. Four hours.
For students majoring or minoring in Art for teacher certification. Funda-
IQ2
Art
mentals of lettering, drawing, perspective, light and shade, color theory, and
design for the art teacher.
261 — Graphic Arts. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 103 and 113 or equivalent, or permission of the in-
structor.
A study of design for, and techniques of, the various graphic arts (etch-
ing, drypoint, lithograph). Studio problems in some of the above techniques.
309 — Elementary School Art. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 107.
An application of material from Art 107 to the classroom situation. Prob-
lems in this course follow work suggested by the "Mississippi Course of Study
in Art for Elementary Schools."
315 — History of Art. Four hours.
Pre-Historic to Medieval. A survey course.
321 — Watercolor Painting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 103 and 113, or permission of the instructor.
322— Watercolor Painting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 321.
Continuation of Art 321 with problems in opaque media.
325 — History of Art. Four hours.
Medieval to Eighteenth Century. A survey course.
331 — Oil Painting. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 103 and 113 or permission of the instructor.
Studies in the techniques of oil painting. Color, composition, and surface
quality stressed.
332— Oil Painting. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 331.
Further study in oil techniques. Greater emphasis on subject matter or
content.
335 — History of Art. Four hours. 3
Eighteenth Century through Modern. A survey course. u
341 — Commercial Art. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 103 and 113, or permission of the instructor.
Recommended for those interested in any form of commercial art. The
rendering of objects and materials for commercial presentation.
342 — Commercial Art. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 103 and 113 or permission of the instructor.
Hand and precision lettering and advertising and show card layout.
343 — Commercial Art. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 341, 342, or permission of the instructor.
A study of commercial illustrative techniques and their application to a
variety of layout problems.
351 — Sculpture. Four hours.
Problems in ceramic sculpture. Study of glazes mixing and application.
Firing.
352 — Sculpture. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 351.
Work with larger solid clay forms for casting. The use of armatures and
various types of molds.
355 — Ceramics I* Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 103 and 113 or permission of the instructor.
The use of ceramic materials as a means of expression. Experiences in hand
forming, application of glazes, and firing.
*93
School of Fine Arts
356 — Ceramics II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 355.
A continuation of Art 355. Experiences in wheel forming, slip casting, and
glazemaking.
362 — Graphic Arts. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 261.
Further problems in design and production using various graphic media.
370— Illustration. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 201 and 103, or permission of instructor.
Practical problems in the illustration of poems and short stories. Black
and white and color studies involving the relation of medium and technique
to subject.
392 — Special Projects for Elementary Teachers I & II.
Prerequisite: Art 107. Two hours each.
Projects in art and methods of presentation to children in the grades.
Need not be taken in sequence.
410— Ancient Art. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 315.
The artistic achievements of the ancient world. A careful analysis of im-
portant examples correlated with their background.
412-G412— Crafts. Four hours.
Pre-requisite: permission of instructor.
An orientation for prospective teachers and other art majors in the craft
areas: dealing with such projects as jewelry, metal craft, enameling, leather,
stitchery, and with similar materials and techniques.
420— Medieval Art. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 325.
A study of the art of the western civilizations from the fall of the Roman
Empire to the end of the Fourteenth Century including Early Christian and
Byzantine sources.
423 — Watercolor Painting. Four hours.
Advanced study in opaque and transparent watercolor. Experiments with
mixed media.
430 — Renaissance Art. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 325.
The art of Italy, France, Germany, Spain, and the Low Countries from
the close of the Middle Ages through the sixteenth century.
433 — Oil Painting. Four hours.
Further study in oils based on experiments in Arts 331 and 332 with
special emphasis on techniques and specialized subject matter fields.
440 — Baroque and Rococo Art. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 325 and 335.
The tracing of these movements through the western world from the
close of the sixteenth through the eighteenth century.
441 — Advertising Design. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 343 or permission of the instructor.
Practical problems in advertising design with particular attention to
modern reproduction methods and preparation of suitable copy.
442 — Advertising Design. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 441.
A continuation of Art 441 including a study of color separation techniques
and typographic experiments.
443 — Advertising Design. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 442.
A continuation of Art 442 with particular emphasis on professional pro-
cedure.
I 94
Music
450— Nineteenth Century Art. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 335.
An analysis of Neo-Classicism, Romanticism, Realism and Impressionism.
453 — Sculpture. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 352.
Problems in wood, stone, and metal sculpture.
457 — Ceramics HI. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 356.
A continuation of Art 356. An application of ceramic techniques to a variety
of expressive forms. Further experiments with clay bodies, firing, and glazing.
460 — Twentietn Century Art. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 335.
An analysis of Fauvism, Cubism, Futurism, Surrealism, and Expressionism.
463 — Graphic Arts. Four hours.
A continuation of Art 362.
470 — Painting Project. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 433, 423, or permission of instructor.
Full quarter series or unit project in painting involving considerable re-
search. Seminar.
480 — Advertising Project. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 443 or permission of instructor.
Full quarter series or unit project in advertising design and presentation
involving considerable research. Seminar.
492-G492— Art Education Project. Two-four hours.
Prerequisite: Art 309.
A research project of considerable scope and depth in the area of specialized
art teaching and supervision. Should be repeated to total of four hours credit by
Art Education majors.
493 — Three Dimensional Design Project. Four hours.
Prerequisites: Art 453, 457.
Full quarter series or unit project in three dimensional expression involving
considerable research seminar.
MUSIC AND MUSIC EDUCATION
The University of Southern Mississippi is a fully accredited member of
the National Association of Schools of Music. Requirements for entrance and
for graduation are in accordance with the published regulations of this As-
sociation.
Entrance examinations in music theory are given all Freshman music stu-
dents. Transfer students are given validation examinations in theory and in
their applied areas.
Students desiring to major in music can elect piano, organ, voice, violin,
viola, violoncello, string bass, flute, oboe, clarinet, bassoon, French horn, saxo-
phone, baritone, trumpet, trombone, tuba, music history and literature, theory-
composition, church music, or vocal or instrumental music education as a major.
Any student of the university not registered for a music degree may pursue
such courses in music as he wishes if he pays the required fees.
Music majors who have taken music courses under private instruction or
in such way as not to receive credit may be excused from required courses
in the music curriculum on the basis of tests of proficiency.
Every music major is required to participate in the same major organiza-
tion for 12 quarters, with the exception of music education majors, who will be
excused the quarter of their internship. Departmental approval must be re-
ceived if the student wishes to change organization. In addition, the student
will be allowed to participate in one other ensemble. Permission for participa-
tion in more than two ensembles must be granted by the Dean of the School.
Music majors may enroll lor credit in organizations if their loads permit.
The student who wishes to take a B.A. or B.S. degree and minor in music
may do so by taking the following distribution of courses:
95
School of Fine Arts
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 12 hours
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 6 hours
Conducting 331, 332, 333 3 hours
Piano 6 hours
Voice 3 hours
Instrument Electives 3 hours
Music Electives 9 hours
Total 42 hours
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC (MUS)
David Foltz, Chairman
Andersen, Avery, Baylis, Benner, Donohue, Harmon, Hays, Huck,
Imbragulio, Mannoni, Monachino, Presser, Stocker, Ware
APPLIED MUSIC CURRICULA
These curricula provide instruction designed to prepare a student for a
career as a professional musician or private teacher. Careful attention is given
to the development of technique, interpretation, and musicianship. A broad
knowledge of literature and musical styles is emphasized.
Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Music in applied music must
present recitals selected from composers of the classic, romantic, and modern
schools of composition in their senior year.
WIND MAJOR
(Leading to the degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 1 1
Major Wind Instrument 2 2 2
Band or Orchestra 181B, 182B, 183B, or 181A, 182A, 183A
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Physical Education
Science 4 4 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 201-1, 202-1, 203-1 1 1 1
Major Wind Instrument 2 2 2
Band or Orchestra 281B, 282B, 283B, or 281A, 282A, 283A
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic and Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint, 321, 322. 323 2 2 2
Ensemble 371, 372, 373 2 2 2
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Voice Class 301, 302 3 3
Major Wind Instruments 3 3 3
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Band or Orchestra 381B, 382B, 383B, or 381A, 382A, 383A
17 17 14
96
Music
Senior
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Adv. Ensemble 471, 472, 473 2 2 2
Wind Pedagogy 451E, 452E, 453E 2 2 2
Instrumental Literature 441D, 442D, 443D 2 2 2
Major Instrument 3 3 3
Recital 415 3
String Class 455 : 2
Woodwind Class 457 2
Brass Class 459 2
Electives 2 2
Band or Orchestra 481B, 482B, 483B, or 481A, 482A, 483A
16 16 14
PIANO MAJOR
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 101-3, 102-3, 103-3 3 3 3
Orch., Band, or Chorus 181 A, B, or C;
182 A, B, or C; 183 A, B, or C
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Physical Education
Science 4 4 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 201-3, 202-3, 203-3 3 3 3
Orch., Band, or Chorus 281 A, B, or C;
282 A, B, or C; 283 A, B, or C
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint 321, 322, 323 2 2 2
Ensemble 371, 372, 373 2 2 2
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Voice Class 301, 302 3 3
Piano 301-3, 302-3, 303-3 3 3 3
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Orch., Band, or Chorus 381 A, B, or C;
382 A, B, or C; 383 A, B, or C
17 17 14
Senior
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Adv. Ensemble 471, 472, 473 2 2 2
Piano Pedagogy 451B 452B, 453B 2 2 2
Piano Literature 441B, 442B, 443B 2 2 2
Piano 401-4, 402-4, 403-4 4 4 4
Recital 415 3
Electives 4 4 2
17 17 15
197
School of Fine Arts
ORGAN MAJOR
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 1 1
Organ 111-2, 112-2, 113-2 2 2 2
Orch., Band, or Chorus 181 A, B, or C;
182 A, B, or C; 183 A, B, or C
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Social Science Core EHectives 4 4
Physical Education
Science 4 4 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Military Science 201. 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 201-1, 202-1, 203-1 1 1 1
Organ 211-2, 212-2, 213-2 2 2 2
Orch., Band, or Chorus 281 A, B, or C;
282 A, B, or C; 283 A, B, or C
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint 321, 322, 323 2 2 2
Ensemble 371, 372, 373 2 2 2
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Voice Class 301, 302 3 3
Organ 311-3, 312-3, 313-3 3 3 3
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Orch., Band, or Chorus 381 A, B, or C;
382 A, B, or C; 383 A, B, or C
17 17 14
Senior
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Adv. Ensemble 471, 472, 473 2 2 2
Organ Pedagogy 451C, 452C, 453C 2 2 2
Organ Literature 441C, 442C, 443C 2 2 2
Organ 411-3, 412-3, 413-3 3 3 3
Recital 415 2
Electives 2 2 2
Gregorian Chant 461 2
Hymnology 462 2
Administration of Church Music 463 2
Orch., Band, or Chorus 481 A, B, or C;
482 A, B, or C; 483 A, B, or C
16 16 15
9 8
Music
STRING MAJOR
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory, 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 1 1
Major Instrument 121-2, 122-2, 123-2 2 2 2
Orchestra or Band 181A, 182A, 183A, or 181B, 182B, 183B
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Physical Education
Science 4 4 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 201-1, 202-1,203-1 1 1 1
Major String Instrument 221-2, 222-2, 223-2 2 2 2
Orchestra or Band 281A, 282A, 283A, or 281B, 282B, 283B
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint 321, 322, 323 2 2 2
Ensemble 371, 372, 373 2 2 2
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Voice Class 301, 302 3 3
Major String Instrument 321-3, 322-3, 323-3 3 3 3
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Orchestra or Band 381A, 382A, 383A, or 381B, 382B, 383B
17 17 14
Senior
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Adv. Ensemble 471, 472, 473 2 2 2
String Pedagogy 451D, 452D, 453D 2 2 2
Instrumental Literature 441D, 442D, 443D 2 2 2
Major String Instrument 421-3, 422-3, 423-3 3 3 3
Recital 415 2
String Class 455 2
Woodwind Class 457 2
Brass Class 459 2
Electives 2 2 2
Orchestra or Band 481A, 482A, 483A, or 481B, 482B, 483B
16 16 15
VOICE MAJOR
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
199
School of Fine Arts
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1-1
Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 1 1
Voice 161-2, 162-2, 163-2 2 2 2
Chorus 181C, 182C, 183C
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Theater Production I, II, 201, 202 4 4
Physical Education
Science 4 4 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Piano 201-1, 202-1, 203-1 1 1 1
Voice 261-2, 262-2, 263-2 2 2 2
Chorus 281C, 282C, 283C
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint 321, 322, 323 2 2 2
Opera Workshop 341, 342, 343 2 2 2
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Voice 361-3, 362-3, 363-3 3 3 3
Electives 2 2
Psychology 201 4
Chorus 381C, 382C, 383C
16 16 18
Senior
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Opera Workshop 441, 442, 443 2 2 2
Voice Pedagogy 451A, 452A, 453A ■. 2 2 2
Voice Literature 441A, 442A, 443A 2 2 2
Diction 401, 402, 403 1 1 1
Social Studies electives 4 4
Voice 461-3, 462-3, 463-3 3 3 3
Recital 415 3
Chorus 481C, 482C, 483C
17 17 13
The Curriculum in Church Music
The curriculum in church music, with either voice or organ as a major,
is designed to provide a thorough and complete course of training for those
who intend to pursue church music as a full time profession. Special emphasis
is placed on literature to be used in the church services. A recital must be pre-
sented on the major instrument during the senior year to be a candidate for the
degree of Bachelor of Music with Church Music as the major. Students will not
be enrolled for organ until satisfactory proficiency at the piano has been demon-
strated.
CHURCH MUSIC MAJOR
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
lOO
Music
Major Applied Music (organ or voice) 2 2 2
Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 i i
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
Chorus 181C, 182C, 183C
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Major Applied Music (organ or voice) 2 2 2
Piano 201-1, 202-1, 203-1 1 1 1
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Science 4 4 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Chorus 281C, 282C, 283C
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint 321, 322, 323 2 2 2
Major Applied Music (organ or voice) 3 3 3
Minor Applied Music (voice or organ) 1 1 1
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
History of Church Music 351, 352, 353 2 2 2
Elementary Music Methods 311 2
Intermediate Music Methods 312 2
Junior High School Methods 313 2
Old Testament 201 4
New Testament 202 4
Elective 4
Chorus 381C, 382C, 383C
17 17 17
Senior
Composition 311, 312, 313 2 2 2
Advanced Choral Conducting 2 2 2
Major Applied Music (organ or voice) 3 3 3
Minor Applied Music (voice or organ) 1 1 1
Liturgies 460 2
Conducting from the Console 458 2
Gregorian Chant 461 2
Church Music and Materials 459 2
Hymnology 462 2
Administration of Church Music 463 2
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Recital 415 2
Chorus 481C, 482C, 483C
16 16 18
The Curriculum in Music History and Literature
The curriculum in music history and literature is planned for those who
intend to teach on the college level or for those who desire careers in musical
journalism, music publishing, or the recording industry — fields in which a wide
and comprehensive knowledge of music history and literature is essential.
xoi
School of Fine Arts
The major in music literature will receive a strong foundation not only in
his chosen field but also in theory and in academic subjects which will enrich
the student's cultural background.
MUSIC HISTORY AND LITERATURE MAJOR
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 1 1
Applied Music Electives 2 2 2
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
Orch., Band, or Chorus 181A, B, or C; 182A, B, or C: 183A, B, C
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Piano 201-1, 202-1, 203-1 1 1 1
Applied Music Electives 2 2 2
Science 4 4 4
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Orch., Band, or Chorus 281A, B, or C; 282A, B, or C; 283A, B, or C
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint 321, 322, 323 2 2 2
Baroque Music 435 4
Eighteenth Century Music 436 4
Nineteenth Century Music 437 4
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Applied Music Elective 2 2 2
History of Church Music 351, 352, 353 2 2 2
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Orch., Band, or Chorus 381 A, B, or C; 382A, B, or C; 383A, B, or C. ...
17 17 17
Senior
Music Literature Electives 441, 442, 443 4 4 4
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
History of Opera 431 4
American Music 432 4
Twentieth Century Music 433 4
Applied Music Electives 2 2 2
Electives 4 4 4
Orch., Band, or Chorus 481A, B, or C; 482A, B, or C: 483A, B, or C. . .
17 17 14
The Curriculum in Theory -Composition
This course is designed to prepare the student for teaching theory and com-
position, writing and arranging music of serious intent, and arranging and
lOl
Music
writing music of a commercial nature. Various steps in the preparation of music
from the preliminary sketch to the published composition are included. The
student will become familiar with the Musicwriter, Vari-Typer, diazo- printing,
offset- printing, copyright law, and the sale, distribution and promotion of
published music.
THEORY— COMPOSITION MAJOR
(Leading to Degree of Bachelor of Music)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 1 1
Applied Music Electives 2 2 2
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
Orch., Band, or Chorus 181A, B, or C; 182A, B, or C; 183A, B, or C. . .
18 18 18
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Piano 201-1, 202-1, 203-1 1 1 1
Applied Music Electives 2 2 2
Social Science Core Electives 4 4
Science 4 4 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Orch., Band, or Chorus 281A, B, or C; 282A, B, or C; 283A, B, or C. . .
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Counterpoint 321, 322, 333 2 2 2
Composition 311, 312, 313 2 2 2
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Voice 161-2, 162-2, 163-2 2 2 2
Applied Music Electives 1 1 1
Italian, French, or German 4 4 4
Orch., Band, or Chorus 381A, B, or C; 382A, B, or C; 383A, B, or C. . .
17 17 14
Senior
Advanced Counterpoint 421, 422, 423 2 2 2
Advanced Composition 411, 412, 413 .. . 2 2 2
Advanced Orchestration 405, 406, 407 .2 2 7
Strings Class 455 2
Woodwinds Class 457 2
Brass Class 459 2
Percussion Class Methods 429 2
Applied Music Electives 2 2 2
Electives 4 4
Music Literature Electives 2 2 2
Orch., Band, or Chorus 481 A, B, or C; 482A, B, or C; 483A, B, or C. . .
16 16 14
103
School of Fine Arts
MUSIC COURSES (MUS)
101-102-103— Music Theory. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: A knowledge of music notation.
Scales, intervals, and part-writing, using triads, the dominant seventh chord,
non-harmonic tones and modulation. Correlated keyboard harmony and dicta-
tion. Sight-singing in bass and treble clefs.
131-132-133 — Survey of Music Literature. Two hours each.
A cultural course in the appreciation and understanding of music.
165 — The Enjoyment of Music. Four hours.
Study of the basic elements of music necessary for intelligent nstening
and appreciation; survey of the history of music in its social and cultural
context.
This course satisfies the Fine Arts requirement in the University core but
may not be applied toward a Bachelor of Music, Bachelor of Music Education,
or a music minor. Music minors are to take Music 131-32-33 in lieu of this
course.
201-202-203— Advanced Music Theory. Four hours each.
Prerequisite: Music Theory 101, 102, 103.
Part-writing, including secondary seventh chords, borrowed chords, altered
chords, and foreign modulation. Correlated keyboard harmony, dictation, and
sight-singing.
231-232-233— History of Music. Two hours each.
Prerequisite: 131, 132, 133 and 101, 102, 103
Music of primitive nations; rise and developments of liturgy; the Poly-
phonic Age; the rise of opera and oratorio; the periods of Bach and Handel,
Haydn, and Mozart; advent of Beethoven; American musical development.
301-302-303 — Harmonic and Formal Analysis. Two hours.
Prerequisite: Advanced Music Theory 201, 202, 203.
Music of various periods is analyzed formally, harmonically, and contra-
puntally.
311-312-313— Composition. Two hours.
Prerequisite: 301, 302, 303 and 321, 322, 323.
Composition in the smaller forms. Contemporary and stylistic techniques.
Steps in the preparation of music for publication are included.
321-322-323— Counterpoint. Two hours each.
Prerequisite: Advanced Music Theory 201, 202, 203.
Two, three, and four- voice contrapuntal writing in the style of Palestrina
and/ or Bach.
351-352-353— History of Church Music. Two hours.
History of Christian Church music, with emphasis on the use of literature;
history of organ music with emphasis on its use in the church service; and
history of choral music with emphasis on its use in the church service.
401-402 — Orchestration. Three hours each.
Prerequisite: Advanced Music Theory 201, 202, 203.
A study of the instruments of the band and orchestra. Scoring for instru-
mental and vocal combinations.
405-406-407— G405, G406, G407— Advanced Orchestration. Two hours each.
Prerequisites: 401, 402.
104
Music
411-412-413— G411, G412, G413— Advanced Composition. Two hours each.
Prerequisites: 311, 312, 313.
Writing in larger forms for various choral and instrumental combinations.
421-422-423— G421, G422, G423— Advanced Counterpoint. Two hours each.
Prerequisite: 321, 322, 324.
Eighteenth century canons and fugal writing. Sixteenth century writing in
madrigal style.
430 — G430 — Musical Acoustics. Four hours (winter and summer).
An investigation of the nature and perception of musical sounds designed
to lead to a better understanding of problems of tone production, intonation,
and allied musical aspects.
431-G431 — History of Opera. Four hours.
The history of the musical theatre from Greek drama to the present. Open
to non-music majors with consent of instructor. Offered 1966-67 and alternate
years.
432-G432 — American Music. Four hours.
A study of the development of music in North America with particular
emphasis in three areas: (1) European heritage, (2) jazz, (3) composers of the
twentieth century whose idiom evidences strong roots in American culture.
Open to non-music majors with consent of instructor. Offered 1966-67 and
alternate years.
433-G433— 20th Century Music. Four hours.
Examination of musical trends since Debussy and Mahler. Open to non-
music majors with consent of instructor. Offered 1966-67 and alternate years.
435-G435 — Baroque Music. Four hours.
Rise of oratorio and opera; keyboard literature; development of the con-
certo principle; instrumental ensembles; sacred and secular cantatas; perform-
ance practice. Open to non-music majors with consent of instructor. Offered
1967-68 and in alternate years.
436-G436— 18th Century Music. Four hours.
Development of the sonata-concept and its application to musical forms
through Beethoven; performance practice. Open to non-music majors with
consent of instructor. Offered 1967-68 and in alternate years.
437-G437— 19th Century Music. Four hours.
Origins of musical romanticism; expansion of the sonata- concept; sym-
phonic poem and music drama; piano works and Lieder; nationalism. Open to
non-music majors with consent of instructor. Offered 1967-68 and in alternate
years.
441A-442A-443A— G441A, G442A, G443A— Vocal Literature. Two hours
each.
Required of all senior voice majors.
441B-442B-443B— G441B, G442B, G443B— Piano Literature. Two hours
each.
Required of all senior piano majors.
441C-442C-443C— G441C, G442C, G443C— Organ Literature. Two hours
each.
Required of all senior organ majors.
441D-442D-443D— G441D, G442D, G443D— Instrumental Literature. Two
hours each.
Required of all senior instrumental majors.
^°5
School of Fine Arts
441E-442E-443E— G441E, G442E, G443E— Choral Literature. Two hours
each.
A survey of accompanied and unaccompanied choral music from Gregorian
chant to the present. Open to non-music majors with consent of instructor.
441F-442F-443F— G441F, G442F, G443F— Symphonic Literature. Two hours
each.
The history and literature of the symphony orchestra from 1600 to the
present. Open to non-music majors with consent of instructor.
441H-442H-443H— G441H, G442H, G443H— Chamber Music. Two hours
each.
A survey of music for small instrumental ensembles. Open to non -music
majors with consent of instructor.
458 — Conducting from the Console. Two hours.
A study of techniques required to conduct rehearsals and performances
while seated at the organ console.
459 — Church Music and Materials. Two hours.
A concentrated course in music literature and resources for church use.
460-G460— Liturgies. Two hours.
Liturgy in worship; the Jewish and Roman Catholic liturgies and their
music; liturgies of the Reformation period; music of the Lutheran, Calvinist,
and Anglician churches; music of the non-liturgical churches.
461-G461 — Gregorian Chant. Two hours.
This course is designed to acquaint the student with the history and de-
velopment of Gregorian Chant. Practical experience in conducting Gregorian
Chant is offered also.
462-G462— Hymnology. Two hours.
The history of the Christian Hymn from its roots to present-day forms.
463-G463 — Administration of Church Music. Two hours.
Practical aspects of Church Music are presented in this course, such as:
building a church library, organizing and directing the various choirs of the
church, the volunteer choir system, directing from the console, etc.
DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC EDUCATION (MED)
William Gower, Chairman
Becker, Carnovale, Gilvin, Hong, Lynch, McDonald
Maier, Moody, Neumann, Pound, Saetre, Young, Zahrt
The courses in Music Education are designed to give thorough and practical
training in music pedagogy, as well as the preparation in practical and theoretical
music, psychology, education, and cultural subjects, necessary for a muric
specialist of broad background. The National Teacher Examination is required
of all candidates for Music Education degrees. The following curricula are
planned to meet the demands of modern music education.
MUSIC EDUCATION MAJOR
Piano or Voice Major
General Supervisor
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music Education)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
Major Applied Music (piano or voice) 2 2 2
Minor Applied Music (piano or voice) 1 1 1
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Chorus 181C, 182C, 183C
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
18 18 18
106
Music Education
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Major Applied Music (piano or voice) 2 2 2
Minor Applied Music (piano or Voice) 1 1 1
English Literature 201 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Psychology 201 4
Physical Science I, 104 4
Physical Science II, 105, or Musical Acoustics 430* 4
Biological Science I 106 4
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Chorus 281C, 282C, 283C
18 18 18
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Elmentary Music Methods 311 2
Intermediate Music Methods 312 2
Junior High School Methods 313 2
Major Applied Music (piano or voice) 2 2 2
Minor Applied Music (piano or voice) 2 2 2
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Biological Science II 107 4
Social Studies Core Elective 4
Health 179 A
Education Psychology 319 4
Psychology of Human Growth & Development 332 or 316 4
Brass Methods 459 2
Opera Workshop 343 2
Chorus 381C, 382C, 383C
17 17 17
Senior
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Senior High School Music Methods 421 2
Senior H. S. Choral Methods & Literature 422A 2
Curriculum Problems in Music Education 423A 2
String Methods 455 2
Woodwinds Methods 457 2
Opera Workshop 441 2
Major Applied Music (piano or voice) 4 4
Minor Applied Music (piano or voice) 2
Education Elective 2
Public Address 101 4
Principles of Teaching in High School 313 4
Student Teaching 481S 12
Chorus 481C, 482C, 483C
17 17 16
♦Musical Acoustics must be taken at the Senior level.
MUSIC EDUCATION MAJOR
Instrumental Supervisor
(Leading to degree of Bachelor of Music Education)
Freshman
Music Theory 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Survey of Music Literature 131, 132, 133 2 2 2
Major Instrument 1 1 1
♦Piano 101-1, 102-1, 103-1 1 1 1
ioy
School of Fine Arts
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Political Science 101 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 -1
Band or Orchestra 181B, 182B, 183B, or 181A, 182A, 183A
17 17 17
Sophomore
Music Theory 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
History of Music 231, 232, 233 2 2 2
Major Instrument 1 1 1
*Piano 201-1, 202-1, 203-1 1 1 1
English Literature 201 4
Math 100 or 101 4
Psychology 201 4
Physical Science I, 104 4
Physical Science II, 105, or Musical Acoustics 430** » 4
Biological Science I 106 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201. 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
Band or Orchestra 281B, 282B, 283B, or 281A, 282A, 283A
17 17 17
*A pianist who elects the Instrumental Supervision curriculum must substitute six hours
in private study of appropriate instruments.
**Musical Acoustics must be taken at the Senior level.
Junior
Harmonic & Formal Analysis 301, 302, 303 2 2 2
Elementary Music Methods 311 2
Intermediate Music Methods 312 2
Junior High School Methods 313 2
Woodwind Methods 327 2
String Methods 325 2
Advanced String Methods 425 2
Percussion Methods 429 2
Brass Methods 329 2
Conducting 331, 332, 333 1 1 1
Major Instrument 2 2 2
***Minor Instrument 1 1 1
Biological Science II 107 4
Social Studies Core Elective 4
Health 179 4
Educational Psychology 319 4
Psy. of Human Growth & Development 332 4
Band of Orchestra 381B, 382B, 383B, or 381A, 382A, 383A
18 18 18
Senior
Orchestration 401, 402 3 3
Senior High Methods 421 2
Senior High Instrumental Methods 422B 2
Organization & Administration of School Orch. & Bands 423B 2
Advanced Wind Methods 427 „ 2
Voice Class 301, 302 3 3
Major Instrument 3 3
***Minor Instrument 1 1
Education Elective 2
Public Address 101 4
Principles of Teaching in High School 313 4
Student Teaching 481S 12
Band or Orchestra 481B, 482B, 483B, or 481A, 482A, 483A
18 16 16
*o8
Music Education
***An Instrumental education major is required to study two minor instruments. One is
to be a stringed instrument, the other a wind instrument selected from the family
(woodwinds or brass) other than that of his major instrument. Percussion majors will
select a stringed instrument and either a brass or woodwind.
MUSIC EDUCATION COURSES (MED)
301-302 — Voice Class. Three hours each.
A course designed to give a general knowledge of the principles of good
singing, rrimarily for instrumental and piano majors, but open to non-mu^ic
majors with consent of instructor.
311— Elementary Music Methods. Two hours. (Fall)
This course covers those areas essential to the music specialist who will
teach in the elementary grades — including rhythmic, listening, singing, and
instrumental activities — with emphasis on primary grades one, two, and three.
312— Intermediate Music Methods. Two hours. (Winter)
A continuation of 311, stressing intermediate grades four, five, and six.
313 — Junior High School Methods. Two hours. (Spring)
Materials and methods appropriate for seventh, eighth, and ninth
grades; continuation of part-singing; the adolescent voice; choral and instru-
mental activities; general music classes; materials suitable for junior high
school students.
325— Strings Methods. Two hours. (Fall)
Practical class instruction on violin, viola, violoncello, and string bass;
correct playing position for each instrument; problems of beginning string
students; materials for public school classes.
327— Woodwinds Methods. Two hours. (Winter)
Practical class instruction on clarinet, flute, oboe, bassoon, and saxophone;
basic embouchure and fingering problems; adjusting reeds; materials
appropriate for use in public schools.
329— Brass Methods. Two hours. (Spring)
Class instruction of a practical nature on trumpet, French horn, baritone,
trombone, and tuba; problems of beginning brass students; examination of ma-
terials suitabk for public school use.
331-332-333— Conducting. One hour each.
Prerequisite: 201, 202, 203.
Techniques of choral and instrumental conducting.
341-342-343— Opera Workshop. Two hours each.
An introduction to opera as a performing art. Acting and interpretative
techniques for singers; participation in musical productions. Required of all
junior voice majors. Open to any university student by permission of instructor.
361— Music for Elementary Teachers I. Four hours.
A laboratory course designed to provide students with a basic knowledge
of principles of notation, basic rhythmics, singing, reading of music, and the
use of the autoharp and piano as accompaniment instruments. May not be
applied toward a Bachelor of Music or a Bachelor of Music Education degree.
362 — Music for Elementary Teachers II. Four hours.
Prerequisite: 361.
Application of the fundamental skills of MED 361 in the study and selec-
tion of music materials and methods of presentation for the elementary school.
May not be applied toward a Bachelor of Music or a Bachelor of Music Edu-
cation degree.
363 — Principles of Music in Action. 4 hours. (Winter and Summer)
Prerequisite: 362.
A further refinement in music skills designed specifically for the minor in
Fine Arts for elementary teachers. A laboratory course in basic theory, key-
board, conducting, rhythmics, class instruments, and creative listening. May
^o9
School of Fine Arts
not be applied toward the Bachelor of Music or the Bachelor of Music Education
degree.
382 — Recreational Music. Four hours. (Winter)
Prerequisites: Music 361 or consent of instructor based upon a successful
proficiency examination.
Materials and techniques useful in developing recreational music activities
including vocal and instrumental ensembles, rhythm bands, musical games,
and community singing.
390A, 391A, 392A— Piano Workshop. One and one-half hours each.
A course designed to meet the needs of the piano teacher, including a sur-
vey of standard materials together with a presentation of modern teaching
methods. Each year the workshop utilizes the services of a nationally known
guest consultant and lecturer.
390B, 391B, 392B— Instrumental Workshop. One and one-half hours each.
A survey and analysis of problems relating to instrumental music edu-
cation through lecture, performance, and discussion with nationally recognized
authorities in the field of instrumental music education.
390C, 391C, 392C— Choral Workshop. One and one-half hours each.
An examination, study, and analysis of choral techniques and procedures. A
thorough study of literature in chronological order from early classics through
modern and new publications. Organized and designed to meet the need of
teachers now actively participating in professional work or anticipating entering
the profession immediately.
390E, 391E, 392E— Elementary Music Workshop. One and one-half hours
each.
Intensive examination of current problems, trends, and materials in the
field of elementary music education, with outstanding guest consultants lead-
ing the lecture, discussion, and demonstration sessions.
401-402-403— Diction. One hour each.
Prerequisite: Junior Voice.
The correct use and pronunciation of English, French, Italian, and German
as applied to vocal literature.
421— Senior High Methods. Two hours. (Fall)
Prerequisites: 311, 312, 313.
Organization and administration of music in the high school; music in the
assembly, visual aids, elective music classes, concerts and festivals, tests and
measurements; development of public school music in the United States; con-
rent philosophies of music education.
422A— Senior High Methods; Choral. Two hours. (Winter)
Prerequisite: 421.
Organization and administration of choral activities, voice class, small en-
sembles, boys glee club, girls glee club, chorus, public performances, and
rehearsal techniques; materials for high school use.
422B— Senior High Methods: Instrumental. Two hours. (Winter)
Prerequisite: 421
Preparation for dealing with problems of rehearsal, instrumental ensembles,
program building, and evaluation of materials.
423A-G423A— Curriculum Problems in Music Education. Two hours.
(Spring)
Prerequisite: 422A.
Intensive investigation of current values and trends in music education in
America.
1IO
Music Education
423B-G423B— Organization & Administration of School Orchestras and
Bands. Two hours. (Spring)
Prerequisite: 422B.
Techniques of promoting and maintaining successful orchestra, bands, and
instrumental ensembles; research by students; emphasis on problems of march-
ing bands and pageantry.
424 — Instrument Repair. Two hours.
A study of the techniques and materials necessary to perform minor re-
pairs and adjustments on woodwind, brass, and stringed instruments.
425-G425 — Advanced Strings Methods. Two hours each.
427-G427 — Advanced Winds Methods. Two hours each.
Prerequisites: 327 and 329.
429-G429— Percussion Methods. Two hours each.
Percussion majors may take additional work in brass, woodwinds, or strings
in lieu of this course.
431A-432A-433A— G431A, G432A, G433A— Advanced Choral Conducting.
Two hours each.
Prerequisites: 331, 332, 333 and two years of voice.
Conducting and interpretation of representative works of the great choral
schools and composers since the sixteenth century; opportunities for the for-
mation of judgment of choral music. Church chorus and sacred music studied
in fall quarter.
431B-432B-433B— G431B, G432B, G433B— Advanced Instrumental Conduct-
ing. Two hours each.
441-442-443 — Opera Workshop. Two hours each.
A continuation of Music 341, 342, 343. Required of all senior voice majors.
451A-452A-453A— Vocal Pedagogy. Two hours each.
Comparison of pedagogical concepts; study of vocal production problems
and anatomy of the vocal tract.
451B-452B-453B— Piano Pedagogy. Two hours each.
Modern methods of teaching; lectures, observation of private and class
lessons; teaching piano to adults.
451C-452C-453C— Organ Pedagogy. Two hours each.
Required of all senior organ majors.
451D-452D-453D— String Pedagogy. Two hours each.
Required of all senior string majors.
451E, 452E, 453E— Wind Pedagogy. Two hours each.
Required of all senior wind majors.
455 — Strings Class, Two hours.
Practical string class instruction on violin, viola, violoncello, and double
bass; correct playing position for each instrument; materials for public school
purposes. For music students not following the curriculum in Instrumental
Supervision.
457 — Woodwinds Class. Two hours.
Woodwind instruction of a practical nature on clarinet, flute, oboe, bassoon,
and saxophone; advanced techniques and materials for public school purposes.
For music students not following the curriculum in Instrumental Supervision.
459 — Brass Class. Two hours.
Practical instruction on trumpet, French horn, baritone, trombone, and tuba;
critical examination of materials appropriate for use in public schools. For
music students not following the curriculum in Instrumental Supervision.
490A, 491A, 492A— G490A, G491A, G492A— Piano Workshop. One and one-
half hours each.
A continuation of MED 390A, 391A, 392A.
ill
School of Fine Arts
490B, 491B, 492B— G490B, G491B, G492B— Instrumental Workshop. One and
one -halt hours each.
A continuation of MED 390B, 391B, 392B.
490C, 491C, 492C— G490C, G491C, G492C— Choral Workshop. One and one-
half hours each.
A continuation of 390C, 391C, 392C.
490E, 491E, 492E— G490E, G491E, G492E— Elementary Music Workshop. One
and one -half hours each.
APPLIED MUSIC AND ORGANIZATIONS (APM)
First Year
101-102-103
Piano
1-3 Hrs. Each
111-112-113
Organ
1-3 Hrs.
121-122-123
Strings
1-3 Hrs. Each
131-132-133
Woodwinds
1-3 Hrs. Each
141-142-143
Brass
1-3 Hrs. Each
151-152-153
Percussion
1-3 Hrs. Each
161-162-163
Voice
1-3 Hrs. Each
181A-182A-183A
Orchestra
No Credit
181B-182B-183B
Band
No Credit
181C-182C-183C
Chorus
No Credit
185A-186A-187A
Orchestra
1 Hr. Each
185B-186B-187B
Band
1 Hr. Each
185C-186C-187C
Chorus
1 Hr. Each
Second Year
201-202-203
Piano
1-3 Hrs. Each
211-212-213
Organ
1-3 Hrs. Each
221-222-223
Strings
1-3 Hrs. Each
231-232-233
Woodwinds
1-3 Hrs. Each
241-242-243
Brass
1-3 Hrs. Each
251-252-253
Percussion
1-3 Hrs. Each
261-262-263
Voice
1-3 Hrs. Each
281A-282A-283A
Orchestra
No Credit
Prerequisite:
181A, 182A, 183A
281B-282B-283B
Band
No Credit
Prerequisite:
181B, 182B, 183B
281C-282C-283C
Chorus
No Credit
Prerequisite:
181C, 182C, 183C
285A-286A-287A
Orchestra
1 Hr.'Each
Prerequisite:
185A, 186A 187A
285B-286B-287B
Band
1 Hr. Each
Prerequisite:
185B, 186B, 187B
285C-286C-287C
Chorus
1 Hr. Each
Prerequisite:
185C, 186C, 187C
Third Year
301-302-303
Piano
1-4 Hrs. Each
311-312-313
Organ
1-4 Hrs. Each
321-322-323
Strings
1-4 Hrs. Each
331-332-333
Woodwinds
1-4 Hrs. Each
341-342-343
Brass
1-4 Hrs. Each
351-352-353
Percussion
1-4 Hrs. Each
361-362-363
Voice
1-4 Hrs. Each
371-372-373
Ensemble
2 Hrs. Each
Prerequisite: Junior standing in the applied music area concerned.
Ill
Music Education
Instrumental ensemble in piano, organ, strings, and winds. The study and per-
formance of two-piano literature, and/ or ensemble works for string, piano,
organ, voice, woodwinds, and brasses.
315— Recital. Hrs.
381A-382A-383A Orchestra
Prerequisite: 281C, 282C, 283C
381-B382B-383B Band
Prerequisite: 281B, 282B, 283B
381C-382C-383C Chorus
Prerequisite: 281C, 282C, 283C
385A-386A-387A Orchestra
Prerequisite: 285A-286A-287A
385B-386B-387B Band
Prerequisite: 285B-286B-287B
385C-386C-387C Chorus
Prerequisite: 285C-286C-287C
401-402-403
411-412-413
421-422-423
431-432-433
441-442-443
451-452-453
461-462-463
471-472-473
Piano
Organ
Strings
Woodwinds
Brass
Percussion
Voice
No Credit
No Credit
No Credit
1 Hr. Each
1 Hr. Each
1 Hr. Each
Fourth Year
1-4 Hrs. Each
1-4 Hrs. Each
1-4 Hrs. Each
1-4 Hrs. Each
1-4 Hrs. Each
1-4 Hrs. Each
1-4 Hrs. Each
Advanced Ensemble 2 Hrs. Each
Prerequisite: 371, 372, 373, and senior standing in the applied music area con-
cerned.
The study of chamber music literature with participation in public programs
of chamber music.
415— Recital. (2-3) Hrs.
481A-482A-483A Orchestra No Credit
Prerequisite: 381A-382A-383A
481B-482B-483B Band No Credit
Prerequisite: 381B-382B-383B
481C-482C-483C Chorus No Credit
Prerequisite: 381C-382C-383C
485A-486A-487A Orchestra 1 Hr. Each
Prerequisite: 385A-386A-387A
485B-486B-387B Band 1 Hr. Each
Prerequisite: 385B-386B-387B
485C-486C-487C Chorus 1 Hr. Each
Prerequisite: 385C-386C-387C
DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE (THE)
G. F. Hartwig, Chairman
Hudson
Curricula leading to the degree of Bachelor of Fine Arts or Bachelor of Arts
are given below.
Students who plan to teach speech on the secondary level should nlan their
programs through the Department of Communication in the College of Arts and
Sciences.
M 3
School of Fine Arts
Students not in the field of theatre, but interested in producing musicals and
operas, should take Theatre 201, Theatre 202 or 203, and/or Theatre 302.
A minor program of 28 hours is also available in Theatre and should be
planned with the consent of the major professor.
All theatre majors and minors are required to work in some phase of pro-
duction in current theatre presentations.
The 430-G430 Series, Summer Theatre, may be taken under general elective*
to meet the hours required for graduation, but only 8 hours will be accepted to-
ward fulfilling major or minor requirements.
Theatre Program Leading to the
Degree of Bachelor of Fine Arts
Freshman
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Science 4 4 4
Social Science Core Elective 4 4
Theatre 111 4
Music 165 4
Public Address 101 4
Art 120 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
17 17 17
Sophomore
English 201, 202 4 4
Foreign Language 4 4 4
Political Science 101 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Theatre 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
Mathematics 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 202, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
17 17 17
Junior
English 423, 425 or 479, 483 4 4
Theatre 302, 303, 311 4 4 4
Theatre 405, 406, 407 4 4 4
Theatre 413, 414 4 4
Theatre 443, 444 4 4
16 16 16
Senior
English 423, 425 or 479, 483 4 4
Theatre 421, 422 4 4
Theatre 418, 420 4 4
Theatre 306, 308 4 4
Theatre 440, 441, 442 4 4 4
General Elective 4
16 16 16
Theatre Program Leading to the
Degree of Bachelor of Arts
Freshman
English 101, 102, 103 4 4 4
Science 4 4 4
Social Science Core Elective 4 4
Theatre 111 4
Music 165, or Art 120 /
Public Address 101 4
Philosophy 101 or 201 4
Physical Education
Military Science 101, 102, 103 (male students) 1 1 1
17 17 17
114
Theatre
Sophomore
English 201, 202 4 4
Foreign .Language 4 4 4
roiuieai science iOl 4
History 101, 102 4 4
Mathematics 4
Theatre 201, 202, 203 4 4 4
Physical Education
Military Science 201, 2U2, 203 (male students) 1 1 1
17 17 17
Junior
English 423, 425, 479 or 483 4 4 4
Foreign Language 4 4 4
Public Address 4
Theatre 302 4
Theatre 413, 414 4 4
Theatre 443, 444 4 4
16 Id 16
Senior
English 479 or 483 4
Public Address 4 4 4
Theatre 311 4
Theatre 421, 422 4 4
Theatre 418, 420 4 4
Theatre 440, 441, 442 4 4 4
16 16 16
THEATRE COURSES (THE)
103 — Introduction to Theater. Four hours.
A comprehensive study of theatre as an art form, critical methods em-
ployed, elements of dramatic construction, forms and styles; development of
the theatre, and major movements since 1875; contemporary American theatrical
practice. Not open to Theatre majors.
Ill — Fundamentals of Oral Interpretation. Four hours. (Fall)
Study, analysis, presentation of poetry and prose for reading aloud, with
emphasis upon voice analysis, and critique.
201, 202, 203— Theatre Production I, II, HI. Four hours each.
A survey of all aspects of Theatre. Practical application of one area of
Theatre in a major University production. Recommended for high school play
directors, and those desiring an over-all acquaintance with the various phases
of theatrical production.
302, 303— Stagecraft, I, H. Four hours each.
Construction and painting of stage scenery and properties.
306 — Scene Design. Four hours. (Spring)
Prerequisite: Theatre 302, or consent of instructor.
Elements of stage design. Play analysis in terms of visualization and style,
and the mechanics of developing an effective stage setting.
30&— Stage Lighting. Four hours. (Winter)
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Theory and application of general and special lighting, color, instrumenta
tion and control.
311 — Advanced Oral Interpretation. Four hours. (Spring)
Prerequisite: Theatre 111.
Plays, novels, and long poems arranged for public presentation. Offered
1967-68 and alternate years.
405-G405, 406-G406, 407 -G407— History of European Theatre. Four hours
each.
Prerequisite: Theatre 201 or consent of instructor.
Study and research in the development of theatres, techniques of produc
tion, organization and management from the time of early Egypt to the presen'
Offered 1967-68 and alternate years.
"5
School of Fine Arts
413-G413— Acting I. Four hours. (Fall)
Prerequisite: Theatre 201, 111, or consent of instructor.
Fundamentals of movement, pantomime, voice and characterization for the
stage.
414-G414 — Acting II. Four hours. (Winter)
Prerequisite: 413-G413.
Continuation of Acting I with emphasis on scene work in conjunction with
420-G420.
416-G416 — Playwrighting. Four hours. (Spring)
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Study and research in the elements of play structuring culminating in an
original one-act play. Offered 1966-67 and alternate years.
418-G418— Directing I. Four hours. (Fall)
Prerequisite: 413-G413.
Principles of stage directing.
420-G420— Directing II. Four hours. (Winter)
Prerequisite: 418-G418.
Continuation of Directing I, with emphasis on scene work in conjunction
with 414-G414.
421-G421, 422-G422— History of the American Theatre. Four hours each.
(Winter and Spring)
Prerequisite: Theatre 201 or consent of instructor.
The development of American theatres, techniques of production, organiza-
tion and management from 1668 to the present. Offered 1966-67 and alternate
years.
430-G430, 431-G431, 432-G432, 433 -G433— Summer Theatre I, II, III, IV. Four
hours each.
Prerequisite: Consent of staff.
An eleven-week program covering all phases of theatre production in an
operating summer stock theatre. Must be taken concurrently.
440-G440, 441-G441, 442 -G442— History of the European Drama.
Four hours each.
Dramatic theory, literature and criticism from the Grecian time to the pres-
ent. Offered 1966-67 and alternate years.
443-G443, 444-G444 — History of American Drama. Four hours each. (Winter
and Spring)
Dramatic theory, literature and criticism from 1668 to the present. Offered
1967-68 and alternate years.
492-G492— Problems in Theatre I, II. Two hours each.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Special research study.
Xl6
DIVISION OF CONTINUING EDUCATION
Paul C. Morgan, Dean
PURPOSES
The University of Southern Mississippi is cognizant of community and
public needs. It accepts the challenge of assisting in these areas so far as pos-
sible within the scope of law and policy. It makes available its staff, its lead-
ership, its facilities, and the products of its research in stimulating educational,
cultural, governmental, and material growth. Such services are provided
through consultations, conferences, institutes, workshops, resident centers,
extension classes, correspondence study, and non-credit community service
courses.
DEPARTMENT OF CORRESPONDENCE
For tho c e who are unable to atterd the University, the Department of Cor-
respondence of the Division of Continuing Education offers at a nominal fee
a number of course- which may be taken by correspondence for University
credit. As many as 48 quarter hours (no more than 12 in one academic area)
of the total 192-hour baccalaureate degree requirements may be earned in
such correspondence courses, subiect to the provisions outlined in detail in the
special issue of the University Bulletin devoted to the Division of Continuing
Education. The Department of Correspondence has a contract with the United
States Armed Forces Institute of Madison, Wisconsin. Under the terms of this
contract, the United States Government will pay the tuition charge of cor-
respondence courses for members of the Armed Forces throughout the world.
Additional information concerning rorresnondencp oou^se^ for military per-
sonnel may be obtained from the 1965-66 Bulletin of the Division of Continuing
Education. Correspondence Section, or from the 19 p 5 edition of the United
States Armed Forces Institute's publication entitled, "Correspondence Courses
Offered by Colleges and Universities through the United States Armed Forces
Institute."
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY SERVICES
In 1962, the Division of Continuing Education officially added a Depart-
ment of Adult Education to serve as an administrative unit through which the
University could offer non-credit courses of a special interest nature to the
general public. This department was the forerunner of the present Department
of Community Services.
The activities of the Department of Communitv Services are being gradu-
ally expanded, and currently include courses designed to appeal to the profes-
sional, cultural, and recreational interests of the adult citizens of the Univer-
sity community. In planning non-credit courses, an attempt is made to prevent
duplication of credit courses currently offered in the University curricula.
DEPARTMENT OF
CONFERENCES, INSTITUTES, AND WORKSHOPS
Conferences, institutes, and workshops have been h°ld on the University
of Southern Mississippi campus for several years. However, the coordination of
these activities has only recently become a responsibility of the Division of
Continuing Education. This Division now stands ready at all times to assist
educational, professional, business, and industrial groups in setting up confer-
ences, institutes, workshops, and related activities on the college campus. Such
activities are welcomed to the campus, regardless of whether they are for one
day, several days, or several weeks.
Conferences, institutes, and workshops may carry college credit, provided
prior approval is given by the Academic Council, and provided approved in-
"7
Division of Continuing Education
structors, consultants, and lecturers are employed. Normally a maximum of
one and one-half quarter hours credit per week may be earned in such activi-
ties. The tuition fee for this credit is $8.00 per quarter hour. Sponsoring individ-
uals and organizations may also assess, upon approval, special fees to help
defray the expenses of the program.
Convenient and comfortable building facilities for large and small group
meetings are available on the central campus. Housing in University dormi-
tories or the University Union Building and meals at the University Commons,
all at normal rates, are also available to individuals participating in both credit
and non-credit programs. Motels, restaurants, and shopping centers are within
walking distance of the campus.
DEPARTMENT OF EXTENSION AND RESIDENT CENTERS
The function of the Department of Extension and Resident Centers is to
make available, as largely as possible, to every community and individual in
the state the advantages of the general equipment, educational training, and
specialized information represented on the campus of the University.
Arrangements can be made to offcr by extension most of the undergradu-
ate and some of the graduate courses included in the general catalog of the
University. In-service programs, running over a period of six to nine months,
and short term courses, with or without credit, may also be organized through
the Extension Department.
The University currently operates resident centers on Keesler Air Force
Base, in the Jefferson Davis Junior College facilities at Handsboro, in the Mu-
nicipal Junior College facilities at Meridian, in the Belhaven College facilities
at Jackson, and in the Natchez-Adams County High School facilities at Natchez.
The academic programs of the Jackson. Natchez, and Keesler Air Fo r ce Base
Centers include the first three years of college work, while the centers at Hands-
boro and Meridian offer only the third year of work in order that there may be
no repetition of the courses offered by the local junior college. Graduate
courses are being offered in increasing numbers at all the resident centers.
Permanent extension centers are in operation in the Picayune High School
Building, the Jackson County Junior College facilities at Gautier, and the
Southwest Mississippi Junior College facilities at Summit. The academic pro-
gram at these centers includes the junior year of college work and occasional
graduate courses.
Anyone interested in attending one of these resident or extension centers
should contact Dr. Paul Morgan, Dean of Continuing Education, Box 55, South-
ern Station, Hattiesburg, Mississippi.
ASSOCIATE DEGREE NURSING PROGRAM
The University of Southern Mississippi, through its Division of Continuing
Education, and with the cooperation of the Jefferson Davis Memorial Hospital
in Natchez, initiated the Associate Degree in Nursing Program at the Natchez
Resident Center at the beginning of the 1964 Fall Quarter. This program, based
on the completion of seven quarters of work, is designed to prepare the stu-
dent as a practitioner of general duty nursing. At. the same time, it will pro-
vide experiences whereby scientific knowledge and understanding of human
behavior may be utilized in the performance of patient-centered nursing care.
Graduates of this program are prepared for beginning general duty nurse
positions and are eligible to write the state board examination required for be-
coming a registered nurse.
To earn the Associate of Science in Nursing Degree, a student must make
no less than a "C" in any Nursing course and must make a "C" average in all
other courses comprising the curriculum of the program.
A maximum of th~ee years from the date of beginning the program will
be given the student to complete the work for the Associate of Science
ii8
Nursing Degree
in Nursing Degree. Students withdrawing from the program and returning at a
subsequent date must complete the requirements for a degree which prevail
at the time of re-entrance into the program.
Students who fail to develop the qualities essential to the profession of
Nursing may be asked to withdraw from the Associate Degree Nursing Pro-
gram.
In its effort to attain the objective of prepared competent practitioners of
nursing, the Associate Degree in Nursing Program is designed to provide in
the classroom, in the hospital, and in the community organized subject mat-
ter and learning situations which enable the student to develop:
1. Scientific knowledge, understanding, and clinical skill necessary to iden-
tify nursing problems, plan their solution, initiate appropriate action, and eval-
uate the results as the student practices nursing in general duty positions;
2. Knowledge and skill in human relations to assist in total nursing care;
3. Ability to think and base actions on principles rather than techniques;
3. Social understanding of patients not only as occupants of the sickroom,
but also as members of a family, a neighborhood, and a community;
5. Health knowledge and skills to interpret information for the patient and
his family in formulating and securing goals of positive health in all situations;
6. Realization of obligations — physical, spiritual, social, and moral — to the
nurse, to the profession, and to these served.
THE ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE IN NURSING CURRICULUM
First Year
Fall Quarter Hrs.
English 103 4
Fundamentals of
Science 104 4
Psychology 201 4
Nursing 00
Nursing 101 6
Winter Quarter Hrs.
Biology 228 4
English 102 4
Food & Nutrition 323 2
Psychology 316 4
Nursing 102 4
Spring Quarter Hrs.
Biology 229 4
English 103 4
Sociology 103 4
Nursing 103 6
18
18
18
Fall Quarter Hrs.
Biology 339 4
♦Elective 4
Nursing 201 10
Summer Quarter
Hrs.
Nursing 104 8
Second Year
Winter Quarter Hrs.
♦Elective 4
History 101 4
Nursing 202 10
Spring Quarter Hrs.
History 102 4
Nursing 203 10
Nursing 204 4
18 18 18
*To be chosen from the Basic College core curriculum
The program of studies totals 116 quarter hours credit and is divided into
three areas:
1. Nursing — including all major clinical fields — 60 hours credit.
2. Related Sciences — including anatomy, bacteriology, physical science,
physiology, psychology, and sociology — 28 hours credit.
3. General Education — including English, foods and nutrition, history, and
mathematics — 28 hours credit.
One quarter hour of credit in nursing represents one hour of classwork, or
three hours of clinical laboratory experience a week for one quarter.
xi9
DIVISION OF HOME ECONOMICS
Bertha M. Fritzsche, Chairman
Brister, Chichester, Diekerson, Drain, Gayle, Golden, Hamman,
Hesson, McCarthy, Owings, Weaver, Wilgus
PURPOSE
The curricula and courses in the Division of Home Economics are planned
to place major emphasis on improving family life. Students are prepared to
assume responsibilities in areas related to the various aspects of living con-
cerned with the environment of the individual, the family, and the com-
munity. These areas are child development, clothing and textiles, food and
nutrition, home-economics education, housing and home management, mar-
riage and family life.
ORGANIZATION
Bachelor of Science majors are offered in child development, clothing
merchandising, clothing and textiles, food and nutrition, institution manage-
ment — dietetics, institution management — commercial, teaching home economics
education, home economics extension service, home economics in equipment,
and general home economics. A two-year schedule which leads to a certificate
is offered for school-lunch managers.
CURRICULUM: BASIC COLLEGE AND DIVISION CORE
The core curriculum for the Bachelor of Science degree as outlined below
is to be followed by the student who pursues any major in the Division of Home
Economics.
English 101, 102, 103, 201, and 202 or 330 or 433 20 20
History 101, 102 8 8
Mathematics (Home Economics majors who take Chemistry
must take Mathematics 101) 4 4
Science 12 or 16
Majors in Institution Management, Clothing and Textiles, Home Economics
Education, Food and Nutrition must take:
Chemistry 121, 122, 123, and Biology 101
Majors in Child Development, Clothing Merchandising,
Equipment, and General Home Economics must take:
Biology 101, 339x, and a four-hour course in a laboratory
science, or Biology 101, 102, and 339x
Social Science** 16 16
Political Science 101
Economics 200
Sociology 103
Psychology 201
Other courses 12 "?
Health 179
Public Address 101
Art 111 instead of Art 120
Home Economics* 18 or 18
Home Economics Education 122***
Food and Nutrition 137 or 178 (For Institution Management —
Commercial)
Food and Nutrition 285 or 262 (For Institution Management —
Commercial)
Clothing and Textiles 126
Not required for Institution Management — Commercial majors
Child Development 139***
Military Science (for men) 6 6
Physical Education — six quarters (non-credit)
Total 96 or 100
Note: Majors in Institution Management — Commercial will have only 90 or 94
hours.
•Required by the Division.
♦•Increased hour requirement of courses listed in the core.
•••Not required of transfer students, or students majoring in Institution Management-
Commercial.
xTo be taken the junior year after being admitted to the Division.
HO
Division of Home Economics
RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE
Freshman Year
Course Hours
Home Economics Education 122 2
Food and Nutrition 137 or 178 (Institution Management — Commercial) . . 4
English 101, 102, 103 12
History 101, 102 8
Political Science 101 4
♦Clothing and Textiles 126 4
Mathematics 101 or 100 4
Biology 101 4
Art 111 4
♦Child Development 139 4
Physical Education — one course to be taken each quarter Non-Credit
Total 50
♦Institution Management — Commercial majors substitute a course for these.
Sophomore Year
English 201, 202 or 330 or 433 8
Sociology 103 4
Economics 200 4
Health 179 4
Psychology 201 4
Speech 101 4
Food and Nutrition 285 or 262 (Institution Management — Commercial) . . 4
Chemistry 121, 122, 123 or Biology 102 12 or 4
Requirements for Minor (or electives) 4 or 12
Physical Education — one course to be taken each quarter Non-Credit
Total 48 or 48
Core for Junior-Senior Level
All students in the junior and senior years regardless of the major selected
in the Division of Home Economics are expected to take, in addition to the
core plan for freshman and sophomore years, a common core of courses.
Course Hours
♦Food and Nutrition 335 4
Marriage and Familv Living 351 4
♦♦Child Development 338 4
Health 333 or HHM 334 2
Total in Core for Junior-Senior Level 14
•For Majors in Child Development, substitute F. & N. 336.
**For Majors in Clothing and Textiles, Clothing Merchandising. Home Economics in
Equipment, and Institution Management — Dietetics, Child Development 139 may be sub-
stituted.
CURRICULUM MAJORS
The curriculum requirements for majors are outlined under the respective
sub -titles below.
OFFERINGS FOR NON-MAJORS
Students may earn a minor in home economics by selecting twenty- eight
hours of work from the following pour c es: Child Development 139 and 338;
Clothing and Textiles 12«. 304. and 312; Food and Nutrition 137, 178. 262, 285, 323,
335, and 336; Housing and Home Management 305 and 482; Marriage and Family
111
Division of Home Economics
Life 151 and 351. The same courses may be selected for electives. The only
prerequisite to these courses for non -majors is the necessary academic standing;
courses with junior or senior numbers may not be taken by freshmen and
sophomores. Non-majors who wish to substitute other courses for those named
above may do so if they have had the necessary prerequisites to the courses.
A student may minor in any area in which he can major. The twenty-eight
hours of courses for a minor in a specialized area such as Institution Manage-
ment should be approved by the Chairman of The Division of Home Economics.
CHILD DEVELOPMENT (CD)
The child development curriculum is designed to interest majors with
special abilities and interests in young children. It provides opportunities to
observe and work with nursery school children. Specialization in this area pre-
pares a student for nursery school teaching and administration and for leader-
ship in educational programs of children's institutions. Those who wish to
begin study for positions in such areas as child welfare, college nursery schools,
or private nursery schools should follow the curriculum in child development.
NURSERY SCHOOL
The University Nursery School was established in 1929 as a unit within the
Division of Home Economics to provide a laboratory in which students might
observe the development and relationships of a group of normal, healthy young
children and participate in directing the various Nursery School activities. The
School accommodates children between the ages of two and a half and five
years. It operates on a full schedule (nine o'clock in the morning to three o'clock
in the afternoon) five days per week, throughout the year.
The daily program is planned to create an environment rich in possibilities
for developing the child's mental, physical, and social self as well as attaining
a greater degree of emotional maturity. The enrollment is made up of an equal
number of boys and girls in the various age groups from town, faculty, and
student families.
The Nursery School, which was the first to be established in Mississippi,
is located on the first floor of the Home Economics Building. It has ample space
indoors and a large porch and fenced-in play area out-doors. In both space and
equipment it meets high standards. The climate permits outdoor play the year
round. Requests for registration must be filed with the Director of the Nursery
School well in advance of the time the child is to be enrolled. Any child may
qualify who meets the age and development requirements.
INFANT DEVELOPMENT CENTER
The Infant Development Center is the newest child development labora-
tory. It i^ providing learning experiences in observation and participation with
children less than three years of age. Students are able to see and work with
two-year-olds in a morning play group and help care for infants who are given
all day care. This Center increases the opportunities for home economics ma-
jors to observe, study, and participate with children from the ages of babyhood
through pre -school years. The child development program enriches the home
economics major by providing learning experiences that develop competencies
in understanding infants and young children.
CHILD DEVELOPMENT
Course Hours
Basic College Core 72
Major and Division Requirements 64
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Health 333
Other Requirements in Home Economics 32
Housing and Home Management 482 4
Housing and Home Management 484 6
111
Child Development
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Child Development 420 4
Child Development 482 4
Child Development 484 6
Child Development 486 4
Other Requirements 6
Psychology 316 4
Housing and Home Management 334 2
Minor Requirements 28 28
Electives 22 22
Total 192
CHILD DEVELOPMENT COURSES (CD)
139 — The Individual and the Family. Four hours.
Three one-hour recitations and four hours of laboratory.
Not required of junior transfer students.
A functional course dealing with the student's immediate concerns regarding
his family life. Special attention will be given to the development of the in-
dividual in seeing himself objectively. Experiences in the Nursery School will
contribute to a greater awareness of behavioral differences among individuals.
90 or 390— Preschool Teacher's Workshop I, n, DDL One and one -half hours.
For day-care operators, nursery school teachers, and educational leaders in
preschool centers dealing with:
a. Administration of Preschool Centers.
Good principles of administration in group programs of young children.
b. Curriculum Planning.
Improving programs through better administrative procedures. Good group
experiences for the preschool child.
c. Personality of the Preschool Child.
Understanding children's behavior — or guiding personality development.
d. Creative Activities.
Emphasis on art for young children.
e. Literature and Language.
Appropriate literature for the preschool child and use of bulletin boards,
flannel graphs, puppets, and other resouroes.
338 — Child Development. Four hours.
Three one -hour class periods and five hours of observation and participa-
tion in the Nursery School weekly.
Designed to create interest in preschool children and to develop an under-
standing of the development and behavior patterns of preschool children. Prob-
lems involved in guiding children toward happy, successful adulthood.
420- G420— Advanced Child Development. Four hours.
440 — Infant Development. Four hours.
Three one-hour clas<= periods and five hours of laboratory for observation
and participation in the Infant Development Center.
A course for students and parents concerned with the infant. Particular
emphasis will be placed on acauiring understanding of infant development.
Readings, class discussions, and field trips into home and group situations will
apply theory to practice.
482— The Child's Play Environment. Four hours.
17,3
Division of Home Economics
Two one-hour class periods weekly, plus six hours of participation in the
Nursery School.
A course for students interested in further study of preschool children and
in developing teaching techniques. Sharing responsibilities in the daily activities
of the Nursery School will be assumed.
A study of the role of play in the development of young children, with
emphasis upon selection, care, and use of equipment. Opportunities provided
to evaluate materials in use, to plan play activities for children, and to con-
struct toys.
484 — Supervised Participation. Six hours.
Prerequisite: Child Development 420.
Directed participation as an assistant in the Nursery School for one quarter.
486 — Creative Materials and Activities for the Preschool Child. Four hours.
A study of creative activities for children of the preschool years, including
literature, art, music, nature study, and others. Practical experiences with these
in the Nursery School.
CLOTHING AND TEXTILES (C&T)
This area offers opportunities to the future homemaker for the selection
and care of clothing and household fabrics for the family, and basic principles
of clothing construction. Two curricula are offered: Clothing and Textiles, and
Clothing Merchandising.
The curriculum for the major, Clothing and Textiles, is appropriate for a
person wishing to begin preparation for a position as a designer of clothing
or textiles, or as an editorial writer for women's pages of newspapers or maga-
zines. It may serve as a basis for graduate study in clothing and textiles which
might lead to college teaching or research. Suggested minor areas appropriate
for this major include art, chemistry, journalism, radio and television, and
economics.
The major in Clothing Merchandising makes advancement more readily
available to those seeking positions as buyers for apparel specialty stores or
apparel departments in department stores. Also, it leads to the management
of one's own small store or to the management of ladies apparel chain stores.
TEXTILES AND CLOTHING
Courses Hours
Basic College Core 76 or 76
Major and Division Requirements 66 or 68
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 34 or 36
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Clothing and Textiles 313 or 452 4
Clothing and Textiles 350 3
Clothing and Textiles 360 4
Clothing and Textiles 420 3
Clothing and Textiles 456 or 457 or 365 2 or 4
Housing and Home Management 305 4
Housing and Home Management 482 4
♦Housing and Home Management 484 6
Minor Requirements 28 or 28
Electives 22 or 20
Total 192 or 192
♦Young men may substitute HMM 315 for this course.
7,14,
Clothing and Textiles
CLOTHING MERCHANDISING
Basic College Core 72
Major and Division Requirements 60
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 28
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Housing and Home Management 482 4
♦Housing and Home Management 484 6
Housing and Home Management 305 4
Clothing and Textiles 365 4
Clothing and Textiles 350 3
Clothing and Textiles 312 3
Other Requirements 8
Art 107 4
Psychology 202 4
Minor in Marketing 32
Finance 100 4
Marketing 300 4
Marketing 330 4
Marketing 332 4
Marketing 461-462 12
Marketing 355 4
Electives 20
Total 192
*Young men may substitute HMM 315 for this course.
CLOTHING AND TEXTILES COURSES (C&T)
126 — Fundamentals of Clothing Selection and Construction. Four hours.
Two 1-hour periods and two 2-hour laboratory periods per week.
Application of art principles in individual wardrobe planning and buying;
understanding and applying the fundamental principles of garment to a specific
garment; application of construction principles to selection of ready-made
garments.
304 — Art Related to the Home and Dress. Four hours.
Three 1-hour periods and one 2-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Art 111.
A course designed to develop an understanding of applied principles of
design in clothing, clothing accessories, exterior and interior of houses. Op-
portunity furnished for practical solution of personal and home design problems.
312 — Consumer Textiles. Three hours.
A practical consumer study of textiles; the fibers, structure, design, finish,
and aualitv of fabrics for clothing and house furnishings including selection,
use and care.
313 — Garment Selection and Wardrobe Planning. Four hours.
Designed as an elective for home economics, marketing, business, education,
and other majors.
Prerequisite: Junior status or special permission of instructor.
Selection of ready-to-wear garments on basis of need, appropriateness,
aesthetic value, cost, serviceability.
350— Family Clothing. Three hours.
One 1-hour period and two 2-hour laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisite: C&T 126 and 304, or equivalent.
Interpreting the problems of clothing the familv in terms of the familv life
cycle; understanding factors affecting clothing decisions; socio-economic aspects
11$
Division of Home Economics
of clothing and textiles as they affect the family members; constructing new
garments for family members and utilizing old garments of good fabric through
re -designing and lenovating.
360— Textiles. Four hours.
Three 1-hour periods and one 2-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry and junior status.
A study of the fundamental aspects of textiles: physical and chemical
properties of fibers, yarn structure, weaves and fabric design, and finishes as
they relate to consumer selection, use, care, and over-all satisfaction; markets
and legislative consumer aids.
365 — Clothes and Cultures. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Junior or senior status.
A study of the wearing apparel of selected cultures from ancient times to
the present: structured to evolve concepts of dress as it relates to and is in-
fluenced by the climatic, social, economic, and political forces of any group of
people at any given time, culminated in an evaluation of how the historic past
affects the present-day fashion world and its dynamic impact on society.
420 — Tailoring. Three hours.
One 1-hour period and two 2-hour laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisites: C&T 126 and 304 or equivalent.
Principles and techniques of tailoring applied to a suit or coat; attention
given to suitability of pattern and fabric to individual, pattern and fabric to
each other, cost, garment fitting, creative design details, and appropriate acces-
sories; application of learnings to selection and evaluation of ready-made
tailored garments.
452 or G452— Textile Testing. Four hours.
Two 1-hour and two 2-hour laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisite: C&T 312, or approval of instructor.
Testing apparel and household textile fabrics by standard ASTM and
AATCC methods; interpreting and evaluating test results; application of data
to better consumer understanding and practices.
456 or G456 — Textile Economics. Two hours.
Prerequisite: C&T 312, or C&T 360, or equivalent.
A study of problems which affect the consumer in the production, distribu-
tion, and consumption of textiles and clothing. Survey of recent developments
in the textile and clothing field.
457 — Fashion Fundamentals. Four hours
Fashion as a social force and the factors that affect and influence it. A study
of the workings of the fashion world, including designers, leading markets, and
fashion cycles.
FOOD AND NUTRITION (F&N)
This area provides courses in foods, nutrition, and institution management
for undergraduate and graduate students in the Division of Home Economics.
Some of the basic courses may be elected by non-majors from other schools of
the University or by those selecting minors in food and nutrition or institution
management.
Students selecting food and nutrition as a major can prepare for Tv>sitions
in public health, extension, research, ioumalism, and commercial organizations.
Institution management majors may elect the curriculum for dietetics or the
one designated as commercial. A two-year certificate course is available for
school lunch managers.
116
Institutional Management
Positions as dietitians in hospitals, government services, or clinics are open
to those who receive the B.S. degree with a major in institution management —
dietetics. This curriculum meets the academic requirements for admission to
hospitals or administrative internships approved by the American Dietetic
Association.
Students majoring in institution management — commercial can prepare for
positions as food service administrators in restaurants, hotels, colleges, industry,
business, school food service, and related fields.
Suggested minors for food and nutrition majors are: chemistry or journal-
ism; for institution management — dietetics majors: chemistry, general science,
or health; and for institution management — commercial majors: chemistry,
marketing, accounting, biology, economics, art, or business administration.
CHARCOAL ROOM
The Charcoal Room is a modern academic laboratory for institution man-
agement majors operated by The Division of Home Economics, Department of
Food and Nutrition. Physically, the Charcoal Room is in the University Com-
mons Building which is centrally located on the campus.
The facility provides good food of high quality in attractive surroundings
for congenial association of faculty members, staff, and graduate students with
their colleagues, guests, and families. It also offers an excellent stimulating ex-
perience and training center for institution management majors under the
guidance of the Institution Management faculty.
INSTITUTION MANAGEMENT— DIETETICS
Chemistry, Health or General Science: Minor
Basic College Core 76
Major and Division Requirements 76
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 10
Other requirements in Home Economics 48
Food and Nutrition 394 2
Food and Nutrition 442 4
Food and Nutrition 444 4
Food and Nutrition 459 4
Food and Nutrition 476 4
Food and Nutrition 478 4
Food and Nutrition 483 6
Food and Nutrition 485 6
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Housing and Home Management 482 4
Housing and Home Management 484 6
Other requirements to meet American Dietetic Association
Requirements and the Minor 32
Psychology 319 4
Chemistry 251 4
Chemistry 252 4
Chemistry 253 4
Biology 229 4
Accounting 201 4
Biology 339 4
Personnel Management 364 or Psychology 449 , 4
Electives and Other Requirements for Minor 8
Total 192
INSTITUTION MANAGEMENT— COMMERCIAL
Chemistry, Marketing, Accounting, Biology, Economics,
Arts, or Business Administration: Minor
17,J
Division of Home Economics
Basic College Core 76 or 82
For Women— 76
For Men— 82
Major and Division Requirements 63
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 8
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 41
Food and .Nutrition 263 4
Food and Nutrition 394 2
Food and Nutrition 442 4
Food and Nutrition 459 4
Food and Nutrition 461 6
Food and Nutrition 462 6
Food and Nutrition 483 6
Food and Nutrition 485 6
Clothing and Textiles 312 3
Other Requirements 28
Biology 339 4
Chemistry 251, 252 8
Accounting 201 4
Finance 100 4
Marketing 330 4
Psychology 319 4
♦Summer Practicum
Minor and Electives 25 or 19
Total 192
•Students must meet the requirements of one summer (a minimum of eight weeks) or
equivalent of practical experience. This entails full-time employment of an approved job
preferably in tne summer between the junior and senior year. This experience must be
completed before registering in F&N 461.
FOOD AND NUTRITION
Chemistry or Journalism: Minor
Basic College 76
Major and Division Requirements 60
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 28
Food and Nutrition 442 4
Food and Nutrition 476 4
Food and Nutrition 478 4
Food and Nutrition 394 2
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Housing and Home Management 482 4
Housing and Home Management 484 6
Other Requirements 12
Chemistry 251 4
Chemistry 252 4
Biology 339 4
Minor Requirements 28
Electives 16
Total 192
Two- Year Certificate Course
A two-year schedule of courses which leads to a certificate is planned for
school-lunch managers. The program includes general education courses as well
as those designed to add to the special preparation of the individual as a
school-lunch manager.
llS
Food and Nutrition
Curriculum
General Education Courses Hours
English 101, 102, 103 1
Mathematics 100
History (any course)
Psychology 201
Biology 101
Health 179
Art (any course)
Healtn 333, 3o4
Economics 200
Clothing and Textiles 312
Child Development and the Family 139
English (Literature)
Food and Nutrition 137
Food and Nutrition 285
Food and Nutrition 178
Food and Nutrition 262
Food and Nutrition 263
Food and Nutrition 264
Electives
Total 96
FOOD AND NUTRITION COURSES (F&N)
137— Food Study. Four hours.
Two 1-hour theory and two 2-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Study of the body's need for food. Application of principles in planning,
preparing and serving simple meals.
56-156 — School Lunchroom Conference: Purchasing. One and one-half
hours.
Thirty-six hours of class and laboratory work.
Involves study of available stocks; receiving and storing practices; em-
phasis on inventories, storage room, and food purchasing.
57-157 — School Lunchroom Conference: Planning Better School Lunches.
One and one-half hours.
Thirty-six hours of class and laboratory work.
Emphasis on planning and serving nutritious quantity meals at minimum
cost.
58-158 — School Lunchroom Conference: Food Cost Control. One and one-
half hours.
Emphasis on budget break-down, records, inventories, and real cost for
school lunch.
59-159 — School Lunchroom Conference: Personnel Management. One and
one-half hours.
Thirty-six hours of class and laboratory work.
Emphasis on problems of personnel for school lunch.
65-165 — School Lunchroom Conference: Quantity Food Preparation. One
and one -half hours.
Preparation of appetizing, nutritious, and attractive meals for the school
child.
66-166 — School Lunchroom Conference: School Cafeteria Equipment. One
and one-half hours.
A course designed to teach managers how to conserve time and energy
through efficient arrangement, use, and care of equipment.
12.9
Division of Home Economics
67-167 — School Lunchroom Conference: New Developments in the School
Lunch Program. One and one -half hours.
Recent research and findings in phases related to the school cafeteria; spe-
cial problems of the manager.
68-168 — School Lunchroom Conference: Nutrition and the School Child.
One and one-half hours.
69-169 — School Lunchroom Conference: Organization and Management of
Food Services. One and one-half hours.
Designed to give experiences in executive leadership, planning, organizing
and controlling the activities of the organization.
70-170 — School Lunchroom Conference: Food Storage. One and one-half
hours.
Designed to give understanding of how to prevent the loss of food. Em-
phasis placed on proper temperature, ventilation, and systematic food storage.
71-171 — School Lunchroom Conference: Methods and Materials in School
Lunch. One and one-half hours.
A professional specialized course in techniques and methods necessary for
training school lunch personnel and to develop leadership in supervisory per-
sonnel.
72-172 — School Lunchroom Conference: Work Simplifications. One and one-
half hours.
Principle of motion economy as related to use of human body in work
places; application of work simplification procedure to school cafeteria prob-
lems.
178 — Foods and Nutrition. Four hours.
Two one-hour theory and two two-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Practical knowledge of nutrition and its relation to health. Application of
principles in food preparation.
262 — Problems in Managing a School Cafeteria. Four hours.
Three theory and one laboratory periods weekly.
Prerequisite: Food and Nutrition 137 or 178.
Course in the organizational structure of the federal school lunch program.
Emphasis placed on food cost control records and management procedures con-
cerned with nutritional aspects of the school lunch operation at the local level.
Experience in organization, equipment, and operation of food for large groups.
263 — Menu Planning, Food Preparation and Serving for the School Cafe-
teria. Four hours.
Two theory and two laboratory periods weekly.
Planning balanced school lunches and banquets, actual experiences in
preparation and service for large groups, including lunch program.
264 — Sanitation for the School Cafeteria. Four hours.
Three theory and one laboratory period weekly.
Prerequisites: Health 179 and 433, and Foods and Nutrition 137.
Emphasis on all phases of sanitation in school lunchrooms.
285 — Meal Planning and Table Service. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Foods and Nutrition 137.
Two one-hour theory and two two-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Continuation of Food Study 137. Emphasis on more advanced meal plan-
ning, preparation, and service; scientific principles of cookery stressed.
323 — Elementary Course in Nutrition. Two hours.
2-3°
Food and Nutrition
Planned for non-home-economics majors. Nutritional needs of body and
proper selection of foods emphasized.
335 — Nutrition. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Foods and Nutrition 285 or 178.
Intensive study of the body's need for foods, including the chemistry of
digestion, care of digestive system, nutritive requirements of body during dif-
ferent stages of life.
336 — Child Nutrition. Four hours.
A study of nutritive requirements of young children, with laboratory ex-
periences in the Nursery School.
346 — Teaching Food and Nutrition in the Elementary Grades. Four hours.
Course planned to give those preparing to teach in the elementary grades
some understanding of materials and methods for teaching nutrition.
394 — Food Problems. Two hours.
A study of individual problems in food preparation. Problems developed
by students in conference with instructor.
442 or G442 — Experimental Foods. Four hours.
Two 1-hour theory and two 2-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Prerequisite: i? oods and Nutrition 285 or 178.
Elementary research to determine factors affecting standard products. Ex-
perimentation in preparation, ingredients, methods of cooking, temperature,
and utensils used.
444 or G444 — The School Lurueh. Four hours.
One one-hour theory period and three two-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Designed to give experience in menu planning, records, food buying, and
preparing and serving food on quantity level
459 or G459 — Institution Food Purchasing. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Junior status.
The purchase of food for institutional use, including investigation of mar-
keting conditions, sources, standards of quality, grades, methods of purchase,
care and storage of different classes of food.
461 — Field Experiences with Commercial Establishments. Six hours.
Prerequisite: Senior standing and permission of the Chairman of the Divi-
sion of Home Economics.
Experiences in the operation and management of commercial food and hotel
service with cooperating establishments. Reports will be made to the faculty
adviser.
462 — Institution Management with Commercial Establishments. Six hours.
Course correlated with F&N 461 and taken concurrently with it. Problems
in operation and management of commercial food and hotel service based upon
experiences of the student, and professional literature.
476 or G476 — Diet in Diseane. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Food and Nutrition 335.
Study of diseases influenced by diet, and dietary treatment of diseases.
478 or G478 — Advanced Nutrition. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Food and Nutrition 335.
Study of current literature for new findings in field of nutrition.
483 — Quantity Food Production and Service. Six hours.
Two one-hour theory and three two-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Prerequisite: Foods and Nutrition 285.
Emphasis on actual food preparation and serving on quantity level.
1$1
Division of Home Economics
485 — Organization and Management. Six hours.
Two one-hour theory and three two-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Prerequisite: Foods and Nutrition 483.
Organization, financial control, and personnel management for institution
food departments.
HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION (HEE)
The curricula in Home Economics Education are planned for those who
wish to be teachers of home economics education in the schools, or who wish to
work in the home economics extension service. Those preparing for teaching
should major in teaching home economics education, and those preparing for
extension service in home economics extension service.
Students who complete the curriculum in teaching home economics educa-
tion will receive the vocational license to teach home economics education in
the secondary schools of the State of Mississippi.
TEACHING HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION
Basic College Core 76
Major and Division Requirements 63
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 31
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Clothing and Textiles 312 3
Clothing and Textiles 350 3
Clothing and Textiles 420 3
Housing and Home Management 305 4
Housing and Home Management 315 4
Housing and Home Management 482 4
Housing and Home Management 484 6
Other Requirements 6
♦Housing and Home Management 334 or Health 333 2
Biology 339 4
Requirements in Education and Psychology 37
Psychology 319 4
Psychology 332 4
Education 313 4
Home Economics Education 380 4
Home Economics Education 481 6
Home Economics Education 482 6
Home Economics Education 489 5
Education 469 4
Electives 10
Total 192
*One of these courses is part of the Junior-Senior Core. Both must be taken.
HOME ECONOMICS EXTENSION SERVICE
Hours
Basic College Core 76
Major and Division Requirements 63
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 31
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Clothing and Textiles 312 3
Clothing and Textiles 350 3
1^7,
Home Economics Education
Clothing and Textiles 420 3
Housing and Home Management 305 4
Housing ana nome Management 315 4
Housing and Home Management 482 4
Housing and Home Management 484 6
Other Requirements 6
Biology 6'6it 4
*Housing and Home Management 334 or Health 333 2
Requirements in nome Economics uiaucation 33
Psychology 319 4
Psychology 332 4
Education 313 4
Education 462 2
Home Economics Education 380 4
Home Economics Education 485 5
Home Economics Education 486 5
Home Economics Education 489 5
Electives 14
Journalism or Radio recommended 4
Total 192
*One of these courses is part of the Junior-Senior Core. Both must be taken.
HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION COURSES (HEE)
122 — Introduction to Home Economics. Two hours.
A course designed to show the value of home economics in personal and
family living, as well as in vocational pursuits.
380 — Ihe Teaching of Home Economics Education. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Junior standing in home economics.
A study of the place of home economics education in the total school pro-
gram. Emphasis on organization of teaching plans and materials; opportunity
for class and home experiences, and evaluation for the school home economics
education program.
481-482 — Observation and Student Teaching (Participation in Teaching
Home Economics Education). Twilve hours
Prerequisite: Home Economics Education 380.
485 — Extension; Education. Five hours.
Opportunities provided to work with state extension specialists and with
the district extension leader to become acquainted with special methods in
extension work.
486 — Extension Teaching and Observation. Five hours.
Prerequisite: Home Economics Education 380.
Educational experiences in extension service program for a six-week
period, or the equivalent, with a home agent. Supervision of work provided
co-operatively with the University and Agricultural Extension Service.
489 — Teaching Home Economics to Adults. Five hours.
Prerequisite: Home Economics Education 380.
A study of the adult home economics program, including emphasis on gain-
ful employment as provided through the Vocational Education Act of 1963.
Observation of, and participation in, existing programs will be provided so as
to help the student in the teaching of home economics to adults.
HOUSING AND HOME MANAGEMENT (HHM)
The increasing opportunities for home economists in business with utility
companies and manufacturers of equipment for the home have created many
positions for those with the necessary educational background. The major,
home economics in equipment, is designed for those preparing for such careers.
*33
Division of Home Economics.
HOME ECONOMICS IN EQUIPMENT
Basic College Core 72
Major and Division Requirements 75
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 43
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Clothing and Textiles 312 3
Clothing and Textiles 420 3
Home Economics Education 489 5
Housing and Home Management 305 4
Housing and Home Management 315 4
Housing and Home Management 480 5
Housing and Home Management 482 4
Housing and Home Management 484 6
Housing and Home Management 485 5
Minor 28
Electives 17
Marketing 330 or Journalism or Radio recommended
Total 192
HOUSING AND HOME MANAGEMENT COURSES (HMM)
305 — Housing and House Furnishings. Four hours.
Prerequisite: C&T 304.
Three one-hour periods and one two-hour period a week.
A study of the economic and sociological problems in housing and house
furnishings; house plans in relation to their influence on family life; trends in
heating, plumbing, and lighting houses; selection and arrangement of house
furnishings.
315 — Household Equipment. Four hours
Two one-hour theory and two two-hour laboratory periods weekly.
Prerequisite: Foods and Nutrition 285.
A study of the selection, operation, care, repair, and arrangement of appli-
ances in the home.
334 — Home Nursing. Two hours.
The care of the sick in the home.
480 — Field Work in Equipment. Five hours-
Educational experiences with home economists in the co-operatives, or
with other utility companies.
485 — Home Economics in Equipment. Five hours.
Courses taken with Home Economics Education 480.
Planned experiences with home economists in power and utility companies,
lecturers, and field visits. Introduction to the role of the home economist in
business.
Field work for those planning to become home economists in equipment.
482 — Economics of the Home. Four hours
Problems of homemaking relating to wise use of time, energy, money, and
resources of home. Consumer problems of the homemaker.
484 — Home Management Residence. Six hours.
Prerequisites: Food and Nutrition 335 and Housing and Home Manage-
ment 482.
Application of the principles of homemaking through actual participation
in responsibilities of home. Care of home; meal-planning, preparation, and
serving; responsibility for baby; and social responsibilities.
a 34
Marriage and Family Life
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY LIFE (M&FL)
Marriage today is becoming widely recognized as the most important voca-
tion for which young people can prepare.
The primary objective of the marriage and family life curriculum is to
assist college students to grow into intelligent, effective and satisfying family
members in their own homes. The vast majority of youth today marry and
establish homes of their own. There is grave evidence of the need for giving
intelligent and functional guidance to these young people in order that their
homes can be satisfying and lasting. Although the basic emphasis of the cur-
riculum is learning to become a good marriage partner and parent, it also
qualifies the student for some avenues of employment for additional income
and/or as a means of self-expression.
There is one major, General Home Economics, which incorporates under-
graduate Marriage and Family Life courses in the Home Economics core.
GENERAL HOME ECONOMICS
Basic College Core 72
Major and Division Requirements 69
Freshman and Sophomore Home Economics Core 18
Junior and Senior Home Economics Core 14
Other Requirements in Home Economics 37
Clothing and Textiles 304 4
Clothing and Textiles 312 3
Clothing and Textiles 350 3
Clothing and Textiles 420 3
Housing and Home Management 305 4
Housing and Home Management 315 4
Housing and Home Management 334 2
Housing and Home Management 482 4
Housing and Home Management 484 6
Child Development 420 4
Other Requirements 4
Psychology 319 4
Minor Requirements 28
Electives 19
Total 192
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY LIFE COURSES (M&FL)
151 — Personal Development, Dating and Courtship. Four hours.
Identifying student interests and problems arising out of college life; estab-
lishing satisfying relationships in intellectual, social, and emotional environ-
ment of college living; study personal social policies influencing dating and
courtship.
351 — Marriage and Family Living. Four hours.
Prerequisite: Junior or Senior standing.
A course designed to give better understanding of the factors that contri-
bute to success and happiness in marriage. Preparation for marriage; marriage
adjustment; family functions and situations; factors making for successful
family living.
*35
INDEX
Absences 60
Academic Advisement 40
Academic Probation 61
Academic Programs 58-59
Academic Regulations 59-62
Accreditation . . . Inside Front Cover
Accounting 135-137
Administrative Officers 12
Admission Requirements 37-39
Aid, Scholarships, and Loans . .50-52
Alumni Association 53
Alumni News 53
American College Test 37, 40
Anatomy and Physiology 85
Anthropology (see Sociology) ...127
Application for Degree 65
Application Procedures for
Admission 39
Application for Student Aid
and Scholarships 50
Approval of Faculty,
Degree Requirement 65
Archaeology (see Religion) 123
Architectural Drafting 173
Art 189-195
Art Education 68
Arts and Sciences,
College of 57, 66, 76-132
Assistant Professors 24-29
Associate Professors 20-23
Astronomy 118
Athletics 45
Audiology 68, 130
Audio- Visual Center 155
Automobiles on Campus 42
Bacteriology 85
Bands 44
Basic College 63, 70-75
Biology '. .77-86
Board of Trustees 11
"Bootstrap" Program for
Military Personnel 38, 63
Botany 84
Business Administration,
School of 57, 66, 133-149
Business Education 157-161
Calendar 5-9
Campus Life and Activities ...40-45
Campus Map 2
Certification for Teachers 152
Change of College,
School, or Division 64
Change of Major 65, 133
Change of Registration 60
Charcoal Room 227
Chemistry 86-89
Child Development 222-224
Choice of Catalog 62
Classification of Under-
graduates 62
Clinic 42, 46
Clothing and Textiles 224-226
Committees, Faculty 13-14
Communication 89-94
Community Services 217
Computer Center 36
Computer, courses 95
Conferences 217
Continuing Education,
Division of 39, 217-219
Continuing Education Fees 49
Coordinator of Armed
Forces Education 38
Core Curriculum 70
Corrective Therapy 165, 171
Correspondence,
courses 38, 39, 63, 217
Counseling Services 40
Course Numbering 62
Course Sequences 62
Courses Numbered
300 and Above 65
Credit Hours 62
Dean's List 61
Degrees 57-59, 66-68
Degree Requirements,
General 58, 62-65
Degree Requirements,
Specific 66-68
Degrees with Honors 65
Director of Admissions 37, 39, 64
Division of Continuing
Education 39, 217
Division of Home
Economics 220
E
Economics 96, 137-140
Education & Psychology,
School of 57, 67, 150-188
Educational Foundations 161
Educational Psychology 180
Elementary Education ..154,161-164
English & Literature 97-100
English Proficiency
Examination 5-9, 65
Entrance Requirements 37-39
Examinations (Also see
Calendar) 49, 60
136
INDEX
Executive Secretarial
Studies 158
Exemption from Core
Requirements 64
Expenses, Student 46-50
Extension Service 38, 39, 218
F
Faculty
Emeriti 15
Professors .15-19
Associate Professors 20-23
Assistant Professors 24-29
Instructors 29-31
Graduate Fellows 31-33
Faculty Committees 13-14
Fees 41, 46-50
Fellows, Graduate 31-33
Finance and General
Business 140-143
Fine Arts,
School of 58, 66, 189-216
Food and Nutrition 226-232
Foreign Languages 99-102
Foreign Students 39, 50
Foreign Trade 96, 138
Foundation, University of
Southern Mississippi 50
Fraternities, Social 45
French 100
G
Geography 102-104
Geology 104-107
German 101
Grading System 60
Graduate Fellows 31-33
Graduate Record Examination . . 5-9
Graduation Exercises 8, 9
Graduation Fees 49
Greek 101
Guidance, Department of 164
Gulf Coast Research
Laboratory 80, 86
H
Health, courses 167-168
Health, Physical Education,
and Recreation 68, 164-171
Health and Safety Services 42
Historical Sketch 35
History, courses 107-109
Home Economics,
Division of 58, 67, 220-235
Home Economics Education 232
Honors, Degrees with 65
Honors Program 77
Honor Societies 43
Hour Requirements 62
Housing and Home
Management 233
Housing, Student 40-42
Human Relations, courses 183
I
Incidental Fee 46
Industrial Arts 172-176
Industrial Technology 174
Infant Development Center 222
Information Center 45
Instructors 29-31
Italian 101
J
Journalism 91-93
L
Language Disorders 68, 131
Latin 101
Latin- American Institute 39, 52
Library 53
Library Science 68, 176-178
Living Accommodations 40-42
Load of Work 60
Loans & Scholarships 50-52
M
Major 66
Management 143-146
Map of Campus 2
Marine Biology 83, 86
Marketing 146-149
Marriage and Family
Life 235
Mathematics 110-113
Medical Examination 39, 42
Medical Technology 72
Membership Inside Front Cover
Memorandum of Credits 50, 62
Military Credit 38
Military Personnel 38
Military Science ..64, 113-116
Minor 68
Music 66, 195-206
Music Education 68, 206-213
Music Fees 49
N
National Teacher
Examination . . 5-9, 152, 186, 189, 206
Non-Resident Students 46
Nursery School 222
Nursing 73, 218
O
Oceanography 79
Office Management 158
Office of Research and
Projects 36
Organization Chart 56
Organization for Instruction . . 57-59
*37
INDEX
Organizations, Campus 43, 133
Orientation 40
P
Payment of Fees 46
Penalties for Late Registration . . 59
Philosophy 120-123
Physical Education 63, 168
Physics and Astronomy 116-118
Physiology 85
Placement Bureau 54, 133
Political Science 119-120
Pre-Professional Curricula 71
Pre-Professional Degree,
Hour and Quality Point
Requirement 62
President's List 61
Probation, Academic 61
Professors 15-19
Provisional Admission 37
Psychological and Special
Education Clinic 155
Psychology 179-183
Public Address 90-91
Public Relations Minor 90
Purposes of University 36
Q
Quality Point Requirement . . .60, 65
Quarter System 59
Quarter Hours 59
R
Radio-Television 93-94
Reading Center 49, 156
Recreation, courses 166, 170
Regulations, General
Academic 59-62
Refund Policy 41, 47
Registration 5-9, 49, 59, 60
Religion & Philosophy 120-123
Religious Life 43
Remedial Services 40
Research 36
Residence Hour Requirement ... 62
Resident Centers 218
Room and Board 46, 48
ROTC 50, 113-116
ROTC Flight Training 115
ROTC Scholarship Program ....115
Russian 101
S
Sam Woods Collection 54
Scholarship Standards 61
Scholarships and Loans 50-52
School Administration 184
Science Education . .123-126, 184-186
Second Baccalaureate Degree ... 65
Secondary Education . . . 153, 186-188
Secretarial Training 159
Societies, Honor 43, 133
Sociology 126-128
Sororities, Social 45
Southern News & Views 53
Southern Players 44
Southern Quarterly 36
Spanish 101
Special Education 181
Special Students 39
Special School Services 155
Speech and Hearing
Sciences 129-132
Speech Education 94
Speech Pathology 68, 131
Speech and Hearing Center 129
Speech and Hearing Clinic ... 49, 156
Staff Members 33
Student Activities 42-45
Student Aid and
Scholarships 50-52
Student Government 42
Student Publications 43
Student Teaching 153-154
T
Table of Contents 3
Tables of Expenses 48
Teacher-Education
Programs 150-151
Textbooks 46
Theatre 213-216
Therapy, courses 171
Transcript of Credit 46
Transfer from Basic College
to Upper-Level 64
Transfer Students 37-38, 150
Trustees, Board of 11
U
University Union 45, 46
University Activities Council ... 45
V
Veterans 38
Veterans Administration 48
W
Work Scholarships 50
Z
Zoology 81
x 3 8
ki v.
U-i <*
*>.*
J*F
TVNews
OpenLibrary